2013 Chevrolet Camaro Owner Manual M

Black plate (1,1)Chevrolet Camaro Owner Manual - 2013 - CRC 2nd Edition - 9/12/12

2013 Chevrolet Camaro Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Performance andMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

Keys, Doors, andWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1Additional Storage Features . . . 4-2

Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-25Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-43Universal Remote System . . . . 5-46

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-16Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-26Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . 9-32Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-37Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44Object Detection Systems . . . . 9-46Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-59


2013 Chevrolet Camaro Owner Manual M

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-3Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-37Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-85Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89

Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-2Special ApplicationServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Additional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . 11-12

Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-16

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-2Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-18Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19

OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1OnStar Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1OnStar Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2OnStar AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1


Introduction iii

The names, logos, emblems,slogans, vehicle model names, andvehicle body designs appearing inthis manual including, but not limitedto, GM, the GM logo, CHEVROLET,the CHEVROLET Emblem,CAMARO, and the CAMAROEmblem are trademarks and/orservice marks of General MotorsLLC, its subsidiaries, affiliates,or licensors.

This manual describes features thatmay or may not be on your specificvehicle either because they areoptions that you did not purchase,or due to changes subsequent tothe printing of this owner manual.Please refer to the purchasedocumentation relating to yourspecific vehicle to confirm each ofthe features found on your vehicle.For vehicles first sold in Canada,substitute the name “GeneralMotors of Canada Limited” forChevrolet Motor Division wherever itappears in this manual.

Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.

Canadian Vehicle Owners

Propriétaires Canadiens

A French language manual can beobtained from your dealer, atwww.helminc.com, or from:

On peut obtenir un exemplaire dece guide en français auprès duconcessionnaire ou à l'adressesavant:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 20951304 B Second Printing ©2012 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.


iv Introduction

Using this ManualTo quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle, use the Index in theback of the manual. It is analphabetical list of what is in themanual and the page number whereit can be found.

Danger, Warnings, andCautionsWarning messages found on vehiclelabels and in this manual describehazards and what to do to avoid orreduce them.

Danger indicates a hazard with ahigh level of risk which will result inserious injury or death.

Warning or Caution indicates ahazard that could result in injury ordeath.

{ WARNING

These mean there is somethingthat could hurt you or otherpeople.

Notice: This means there issomething that could result inproperty or vehicle damage. Thiswould not be covered by thevehicle's warranty.

A circle with a slash through it is asafety symbol which means “DoNot,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not letthis happen.”

SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols instead oftext. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specificcomponent, control, message,gauge, or indicator.

M : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see your owner manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

* : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see a service manualfor additional instructions orinformation.


Introduction v

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbolsthat may be found on the vehicleand what they mean. For moreinformation on the symbol, refer tothe Index.

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

# : Air Conditioning

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

% : Audio Steering Wheel Controlsor OnStar®

$ : Brake System Warning Light

" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

O : Exterior Lamps

# : Fog Lamps

. : Fuel Gauge

+ : Fuses

3 : Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger

j : LATCH System ChildRestraints

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

} : Power

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Safety Belt Reminders

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

d : Traction Control/StabiliTrak®

M : Windshield Washer Fluid


vi Introduction

2 NOTES


In Brief 1-1

In Brief

Instrument PanelInstrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Initial Drive InformationInitial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-4Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . 1-7Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Passenger Sensing System . . . 1-7Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 1-8Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-10Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

Vehicle FeaturesRadio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-14Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-14Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 1-15Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15

Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 1-15Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16Universal Remote System . . . 1-16Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16Convertible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

Performance and MaintenanceTraction ControlSystem (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 1-17Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-17Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18

Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-18Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19


1-2 In Brief

Instrument Panel


In Brief 1-3

1. Air Vents on page 8‑3.

2. Turn and Lane-Change Lever.See Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals on page 6‑4.

Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger on page 6‑2.

Flash-to-Pass on page 6‑2.

Driver Information Center (DIC)Buttons (If Equipped). SeeDriver Information Center (DIC)on page 5‑25.

3. Driver Shift Controls (IfEquipped). See AutomaticTransmission on page 9‑26.

4. Instrument Cluster on page 5‑7.

5. Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑3.

6. Light Sensor. See AutomaticHeadlamp System on page 6‑3.

7. Infotainment on page 7‑1.

8. Hood Release (Out of View).See Hood on page 10‑5.

9. Data Link Connector (DLC) (Outof View). See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 5‑17.

10. Exterior Lamp Controls onpage 6‑1.

Front Fog Lamps on page 6‑5(If Equipped).

Instrument Panel IlluminationControl on page 6‑5.

11. Cruise Control on page 9‑44.

12. Steering Wheel Adjustment onpage 5‑2.

13. Horn on page 5‑3.

14. Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5‑2.

15. Head-Up Display (HUD) onpage 5‑28 (If Equipped).

16. Climate Control Systems onpage 8‑1.

17. Transmission TemperatureGauge (Except ZL1) onpage 5‑13.

Voltmeter Gauge on page 5‑14.

Engine Oil Temperature Gaugeon page 5‑12.

Engine Oil Pressure Gauge onpage 5‑11.

Boost Gauge (ZL1 Only) onpage 5‑10.

18. Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9‑37.

Performance TractionManagement (PTM). SeeCompetitive Driving Mode onpage 9‑39 (ZL1 Model Only).

19. Shift Lever. See AutomaticTransmission on page 9‑26 orManual Transmission onpage 9‑32.

20. Power Outlets on page 5‑5.

21. Hazard Warning Flashers onpage 6‑4.


1-4 In Brief

Initial DriveInformationThis section provides a briefoverview about some of theimportant features that may or maynot be on your specific vehicle.

For more detailed information, referto each of the features which can befound later in this owner manual.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemThe RKE transmitter may work up to20 m (65 ft) away from the vehicle.

Press the key release button toextend the key blade. The key canbe used for the ignition and alllocks.

Press K to unlock the driver door orall doors.

Press Q to lock all doors.

Lock and unlock feedback can bepersonalized. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑43.

Press and holdV to open thetrunk.

Press and release 7 to initiatevehicle locator.

Press and hold 7 for at leastthree seconds to sound the panicalarm.

Press 7 again to cancel the panicalarm.

See Keys on page 2‑1 and RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2‑3.

Remote Vehicle StartFor vehicles with this feature, theengine may be started from up to60 m (195 ft) away outside thevehicle.


In Brief 1-5

Starting the Vehicle

1. Aim the RKE transmitter at thevehicle.

2. Press and release Q.3. Immediately after completing

Step 2, press and hold/ for atleast two seconds or until theturn signal lamps flash.

When the engine starts, the parkinglamps will turn on and remain on aslong as the engine is running. Thedoors will be locked and the climatecontrol system may come on.

The engine will continue to run for10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a10-minute time extension. Remotestart can be extended only once.

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start, do one ofthe following:. Aim the RKE transmitter at the

vehicle and press and hold/until the parking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the vehicle on and then off.

See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2‑4.

Door LocksTo lock or unlock a door:. To lock the door from the inside,

use the door lock knob on thetop of the door.

. To unlock the door from inside,pull the handle once. Pulling thehandle again unlatches the door.

. From the outside turn the keyclockwise or counterclockwise,or press Q or K on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.See Door Locks on page 2‑6 orRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2‑3.

Power Door Locks

If equipped, there is a power doorlock switch on the instrument paneland on the front door panels.

Q : Press to lock the doors.

K : Press to unlock the doors.

See Power Door Locks on page 2‑7.

Trunk ReleaseThe trunk may be opened bypressing the remote trunk releasebutton on the lower portion of thedriver door orV on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.See Trunk on page 2‑8.


1-6 In Brief

Seat Adjustment

Manual Seats

To adjust the seat, if equipped:

1. Lift the handle under the seat tounlock it.

2. Slide the seat and release thehandle.

3. Try to move the seat back andforth to be sure it is locked inplace.

See Seat Adjustment on page 3‑3.

Power Seats

To adjust the seat, if equipped:. Move the seat forward or

rearward by sliding thehorizontal control forward orrearward.

. Raise or lower the front part ofthe seat cushion by moving thefront of the horizontal control upor down.

. Raise or lower the entire seat bymoving the entire horizontalcontrol up or down.

See Power Seat Adjustment onpage 3‑4.

To raise or recline the seatback, tiltthe vertical control forward orrearward. See Reclining Seatbackson page 3‑4.

Heated Seats

If available, press L or M to turn onthe heated seat. A light indicatesthis feature is on.

To operate, the engine must berunning.

Press the button once for thehighest setting. With each press ofthe button, the heated seat willchange to the next lower setting,


In Brief 1-7

and then the off setting. Two lightsindicate the highest setting, and onelight indicates the lowest.

See Heated Front Seats onpage 3‑6.

Head RestraintAdjustmentDo not drive until the head restraintsfor all occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

To achieve a comfortable seatingposition, change the seatbackrecline angle as little as necessarywhile keeping the seat and the headrestraint height in the properposition.

See Head Restraints on page 3‑2and Seat Adjustment on page 3‑3.

Safety Belts

Refer to the following sections forimportant information on how to usesafety belts properly:. Safety Belts on page 3‑8.. How to Wear Safety Belts

Properly on page 3‑9.. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑10.. Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) onpage 3‑37.

Passenger SensingSystem

United States

Canada and Mexico

The passenger sensing system willturn off the right front passengerfrontal airbag under certainconditions. The driver airbag androof‐rail airbags, if equipped, are notaffected by the passenger sensingsystem.

The passenger airbag statusindicator will be visible on theoverhead console when the vehicle


1-8 In Brief

is started. See Passenger SensingSystem on page 3‑24 for moreinformation.

Mirror Adjustment

Exterior

Coupe Shown, Convertible Similar

Vehicles with outside power mirrorshave controls on the driver doorarmrest.

To adjust each mirror:

1. Press the switch to select thedriver or passenger side mirror.

2. Press one of the four sides ontheh (control pad) to adjust themirror.

3. Adjust each outside mirror sothat a little of the vehicle and thearea behind it can be seen.

See Power Mirrors on page 2‑12.

Interior

Adjust the inside rearview mirror fora clear view of the area behind yourvehicle. To avoid glare of theheadlamps from behind, push thetab forward for daytime and pull itfor nighttime use. See ManualRearview Mirror on page 2‑13.

On vehicles with an automaticdimming inside rearview mirror. Themirror reduces glare from theheadlamps of the vehicle behindyou. The dimming feature comes onand the indicator light illuminateseach time the vehicle is started. SeeAutomatic Dimming Rearview Mirroron page 2‑13.

Cleaning the Mirror

To avoid accidental OnStar calls (ifequipped), clean the mirror with theignition off.

Do not spray glass cleaner directlyon the mirror. Use a soft toweldampened with water.

Steering WheelAdjustment

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever down.


In Brief 1-9

2. Move the steering wheel upor down.

3. Pull or push the steering wheelcloser or away from you.

4. Pull the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.

Interior LightingDome Lamps

The dome lamp buttons areoverhead near the rearview mirror.

To change the settings, press thefollowing:

( : Turns the lamp off, evenwhen a door is open.

H : Turns the lamp onautomatically when a door isopened.

' : Turns the lamp on.

For more information on interiorlighting, see Instrument PanelIllumination Control on page 6‑5.

Exterior Lighting

The exterior lamp control is on theinstrument panel, on the outboardside of the steering wheel.

There are four positions:

P : Briefly turn to this position toturn the automatic light control off oron again. When released, thecontrol returns to the AUTOposition.

AUTO: Use to automatically turn onthe headlamps, parking lamps,taillamps, sidemarker lamps, licenseplate lamps, and instrument panellights.

; : Use to turn on the parkinglamps together with the taillamps,sidemarker lamps, license platelamps, and instrument panel lights.

5 : Use to turn on the headlampstogether with the parking lamps,taillamps, sidemarker lamps, licenseplate lamps, and instrument panellights.

# : Use to turn the fog lamps on oroff. The fog lamps come on togetherwith the parking lamps, taillamps,sidemarker lamps, license platelamps, and instrument panel lights.


1-10 In Brief

See:. Exterior Lamp Controls on

page 6‑1.. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)

on page 6‑2.. Front Fog Lamps on page 6‑5.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper/washer leveris on the right side of the steeringcolumn. With the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, movethe windshield wiper lever to selectthe wiper speed.

HI: Use for fast wipes.

LO: Use for slow wipes.

INT: Move the lever up to INT forintermittent wipes, then turn thexINT band up for more frequentwipes or down for less frequentwipes.

OFF: Use to turn the wipers off.

8 : For a single wipe, briefly movethe wiper lever down. For severalwipes, hold the wiper lever down.

nL : Pull the windshield wiperlever toward you to spray windshieldwasher fluid and activate the wipers.

See Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑3.


In Brief 1-11

Climate ControlsThe heating, cooling, defrosting, and ventilation for the vehicle can becontrolled with this system.

1. Fan Control

2. Heated Seats (If Equipped)

3. Temperature Control

4. Air Delivery Mode Controls

5. Air Conditioning

6. Defrost

7. Rear Window Defogger

8. Recirculation

See Climate Control Systems onpage 8‑1.

Transmission

Automatic Transmission

Tap Shift

Tap Shift allows the driver tomanually control the automatictransmission. To use Tap Shift, theshift lever must be in M (ManualMode) or D (Drive). Vehicles withthis feature have indicators on thesteering wheel. The controls are onthe back of the steering wheel. Tapthe left control to downshift, and theright control to upshift. A DriverInformation Center (DIC) messageindicates the gear the vehicle is in.

Electronic Range Select(ERS) Mode

Vehicles with axle code GW8 havean ERS mode. ERS mode allowsyou to choose the top-gear limit ofthe transmission with fully automaticgear selection. This can help controlthe vehicle's speed while drivingdownhill or towing a trailer. Thevehicle has an electronic shiftposition indicator within the


1-12 In Brief

instrument cluster. When using theERS mode a number will displaynext to the M, indicating the currentmaximum gear allowed.

To use this feature:

1. Move the shift lever toM (Manual Mode).

2. Press the plus/minus buttons onthe back of the steering wheel,to increase or decrease the gearrange available.

See Manual Mode on page 9‑29.

Manual Transmission

One to Four Shift Message(V8 Only)

When this message comes on, youcan only shift from 1 (First) to4 (Fourth) instead of 1 (First) to2 (Second). The message will bedisplayed in the Driver InformationCenter. See Manual Transmissionon page 9‑32.

Vehicle Features

Radio(s)

VOL/ O : Press to turn the systemon and off. Turn to increase ordecrease the volume.

RADIO/BAND: Press to choosebetween FM, AM, or SiriusXM®,if equipped.

MENU/SELECT: Turn to selectradio stations.

SEEK7 : Press to seek theprevious radio station or track.

SEEK6 : Press to seek the nextradio station or track.

Buttons 1−6: Press to save andselect favorite stations.

INFO: Press to show availableinformation about the current stationor track.

For more information about theseand other radio features, seeOverview on page 7‑2.


In Brief 1-13

Storing a Favorite Station

Stations from all bands can bestored in the favorite lists in anyorder. Up to six stations can bestored in each favorite page and thenumber of available favorite pagescan be set.

To store the station to a position inthe list, press the correspondingnumeric button 1−6 until the stationcan be heard again.

For more information, see “Storingand Retrieving Favorites” in AM-FMRadio on page 7‑7.

Setting the Clock

Adjusting the Time

The clock menu can only be usedwith the radio on while in ON/RUNor ACC/ACCESSORY.

1. Press the CONFIG button.

2. Select Time and Date Settings.

3. Select Set Time.

4. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob toadjust the highlighted value.

5. Press the MENU/SELECT knobto select the next value.

6. To save the time or date andreturn to the Time and DateSettings menu, press the /BACK button at any time orpress the MENU/SELECT knobafter adjusting the minutes.

Setting the 12/24 Hour Format



3. Highlight 12/24 Hour Format.

4. Press the MENU/SELECT knobto select the 12 hour or 24 hourdisplay format.

For detailed instructions on settingthe clock, see Clock on page 5‑4.

Satellite RadioVehicles with a SiriusXM® satelliteradio tuner and a valid SiriusXMsatellite radio subscription canreceive SiriusXM programming.

SiriusXM Satellite RadioService

SiriusXM is a satellite radio servicebased in the 48 contiguous UnitedStates and 10 Canadian provinces.SiriusXM satellite radio has a widevariety of programming andcommercial-free music, coast tocoast, and in digital-quality sound.A fee is required to receive theSiriusXM service.

Refer to:. www.siriusxm.com or call

1-866-635-2349 (U.S.).. www.xmradio.ca or call

1-877-209-0079 (Canada).

See Satellite Radio on page 7‑9.


1-14 In Brief

Portable Audio DevicesThis vehicle may have a 3.5 mm(1/8 in) auxiliary input and a USBport in the center console bin.External devices such as iPods®,laptop computers, MP3 players, andUSB drives may be connected,depending on the audio system.

See Auxiliary Devices on page 7‑15.

Bluetooth®

The Bluetooth® system allows userswith a Bluetooth-enabled mobilephone to make and receivehands-free calls using the vehicleaudio system and controls.

The Bluetooth-enabled mobilephone must be paired with thein-vehicle Bluetooth system before itcan be used in the vehicle. Not allphones will support all functions.

See Bluetooth (Voice Recognition)on page 7‑25 or Bluetooth(Infotainment Controls) onpage 7‑22 or Bluetooth (Overview)on page 7‑20.

Steering Wheel Controls

Some audio steering wheel controlscan be adjusted at the steeringwheel.

b / g : Press to interact with theavailable Bluetooth or OnStarsystems.

$ /i : Press to silence thevehicle speakers only. Press againto turn the sound on. For vehicleswith OnStar or Bluetooth systems,press to reject an incoming call,or end a current call.

_ SRC ^ : Press to select an audiosource.

Turn up or down to select the nextor previous favorite radio station,CD, or MP3 track.

+ x −: Press + to increase thevolume; press − to decrease thevolume.

See Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5‑2.


In Brief 1-15

Cruise Control

5 : Press to turn the cruise controlsystem on and off. An indicator lightcomes on in the instrument cluster.

\ : Press to disengage cruisecontrol without erasing the setspeed from memory.

RES/+: Move the thumbwheel up tomake the vehicle resume to apreviously set speed or toaccelerate to a higher speed.

SET/−: Move the thumbwheel downto set a speed or to make thevehicle decelerate.

See Cruise Control on page 9‑44.

Infotainment SystemSee the infotainment manual forinformation on the radio, audioplayers, phone, navigation system,and voice or speech recognition.There is also information on settingsand downloadable applications (ifequipped).

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The DIC display is in the center ofthe instrument cluster. It shows thestatus of many vehicle systems. Thecontrols for the DIC are on the turnsignal lever.

1. SET/CLR: Press to set, or pressand hold to clear, the menu itemdisplayed.

2. w / x : Use the thumbwheel toscroll through the items ineach menu.

3. MENU: Press to display the DICmenus. This button is also usedto return to or exit the lastscreen displayed on the DIC.

See Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 5‑25.

Ultrasonic Parking AssistIf available, this system usessensors on the rear bumper toassist with parking and avoidingobjects while in R (Reverse).It operates at speeds less than


1-16 In Brief

8 km/h (5 mph). URPA uses audiblebeeps to provide distance andsystem information.

Keep the sensors on the vehicle'srear bumper clean to ensure properoperation.

See Ultrasonic Parking Assist onpage 9‑46.

Power OutletsThe vehicle has two accessorypower outlets; one is below theclimate control system and the otheris inside the center console storage.They can be used to plug inelectrical equipment, such as a cellphone or an MP3 player.

The accessory power outlets do notwork when the key is removed fromthe ignition and the driver door isopened. This helps to preserve thebattery life of the vehicle.

See Power Outlets on page 5‑5.

Universal Remote System

This system provides a way toreplace up to three remote controltransmitters used to activatedevices such as garage dooropeners, security systems, andhome automation devices.

Read the instructions completelybefore attempting to program theUniversal Remote system. Becauseof the steps involved, it may behelpful to have another personavailable to assist you withprogramming the Universal Remotesystem.

See Universal Remote System onpage 5‑46.

SunroofThe ignition must be in ON/RUN,ACC/ACCESSORY, or RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) to operatethe sunroof. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9‑21.

On vehicles with a sunroof, theswitch is on the overhead console.

Open/Close: Press and hold therear or front of the switch to open orclose the sunroof.


In Brief 1-17

Express-open: Press and releasethe rear of the switch two times toexpress-open the sunroof.

Vent: Press and release the rear ofthe switch to vent the sunroof.

ConvertibleIf equipped, the convertible top canbe lowered and stowed under thetonneau cover behind the rear seat.For step-by-step instructions, seeConvertible Top on page 2‑17.

Performance andMaintenance

Traction ControlSystem (TCS)The traction control system limitswheel spin. The system turns onautomatically every time the vehicleis started.. To turn off traction control, press

and release the TCS/StabiliTrakbutton g on the console in front

of the shift lever. i illuminates.

. Press the TCS/StabiliTrak buttonagain to turn traction controlback on.

See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9‑37.

StabiliTrak® SystemStabiliTrak assists with directionalcontrol of the vehicle in difficultdriving conditions. The system turnson automatically every time thevehicle is started.. To turn off both traction control

and electronic stability control,press and hold the TCS/StabiliTrak button g on theconsole in front of the shift lever.i and g illuminate.

. Press the TCS/StabiliTrak buttonagain to turn on both systems.

See StabiliTrak® System onpage 9‑38.

Tire Pressure MonitorThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).


1-18 In Brief

The low tire pressure warning lightalerts to a significant loss inpressure of one of the vehicle'stires. If the warning light comes on,stop as soon as possible and inflatethe tires to the recommendedpressure shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 9‑12.The warning light will remain on untilthe tire pressure is corrected.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thismay be an early indicator that thetire pressures are getting low andthe tires need to be inflated to theproper pressure.

The TPMS does not replace normalmonthly tire maintenance. Maintainthe correct tire pressures.

See Tire Pressure Monitor Systemon page 10‑58.

Tire Sealant andCompressor KitThis vehicle may come with a sparetire and tire changing equipment ora tire sealant and compressor kit.The kit can be used to temporarilyseal small punctures in the treadarea of the tire. See Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit on page 10‑72.

If the vehicle came with a spare tireand tire changing equipment, see Ifa Tire Goes Flat on page 10‑70.

Engine Oil Life SystemThe engine oil life system calculatesengine oil life based on vehicle useand displays the CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message when it is timeto change the engine oil and filter.

The oil life system should be resetto 100% only following an oilchange.

Resetting the Oil Life System

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN withthe engine off.

2. Fully press and release theaccelerator pedal three timeswithin five seconds.

See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑15.

Car Wash Guidelines

Notice: Automatic car washes arenot recommended for ZL1 modelsand 1LE performance packages.Some car washes cause damageto the vehicle, the wheels, and theconvertible top, if the vehicle isequipped.

If the vehicle is driven through anautomatic car wash that does nothave enough clearance for theundercarriage and/or wide rear tiresand wheels, the vehicle could bedamaged. Verify with the manager


In Brief 1-19

of the car wash that the vehicle willfit before entering the car wash oruse a touchless car wash. SeeWashing the Vehicle on page 10‑89under Exterior Care.

Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuelmileage. Here are some driving tipsto get the best fuel economypossible.. Avoid fast starts and accelerate

smoothly.. Brake gradually and avoid

abrupt stops.. Avoid idling the engine for long

periods of time.. When road and weather

conditions are appropriate, usecruise control.

. Always follow posted speedlimits or drive more slowly whenconditions require.

. Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated.

. Combine several trips into asingle trip.

. Replace the vehicle's tires withthe same TPC Spec numbermolded into the tire's sidewallnear the size.

. Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.

Roadside AssistanceProgramU.S.: 1-800-243-8872

TTY Users (U.S. Only):1-888-889-2438

Canada: 1-800-268-6800

Mexico: 01-800-466-0800

As the owner of a new Chevrolet,you are automatically enrolled in theRoadside Assistance program.

See Roadside Assistance Program(Mexico) on page 13‑7 or RoadsideAssistance Program (U.S. andCanada) on page 13‑11.

Roadside Assistance and OnStar(U.S. and Canada)

If the vehicle has an active OnStarsubscription, contact OnStar and thevehicle’s current GPS location willbe sent to an OnStar advisor toassess the situation, contactRoadside Assistance, and relay theexact location to send help.

OnStar®

If equipped, this vehicle has acomprehensive, in-vehicle systemthat can connect to a live Advisorfor Emergency, Security, Navigation,Connection, and DiagnosticServices. See OnStar Overview onpage 14‑1.


1-20 In Brief

2 NOTES


Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors, andWindows

Keys and LocksKeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-4Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

DoorsTrunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Vehicle SecurityVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Vehicle Alarm System . . . . . . . 2-10Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . . 2-11

Exterior MirrorsConvex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . 2-12

Interior MirrorsManual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-13Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

WindowsWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Convertible Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

Keys and Locks

Keys

{ WARNING

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe ignition key is dangerous formany reasons. Children or otherscould be badly injured or evenkilled. They could operate thepower windows or other controlsor even make the vehicle move.The windows will function with thekeys in the ignition and childrencould be seriously injured or killedif caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave the keys ina vehicle with children.


2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows

The key that is part of the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter canbe used for the ignition and alllocks.

If it becomes difficult to turn the key,inspect the key blade for debris.Periodically clean with a brushor pick.

Press the key release button on theRKE transmitter to extend the keyblade. Press the button and the keyblade to retract the key.

If it becomes difficult to turn theignition key, inspect the key bladefor debris. Periodically clean with abrush or pick.

See your dealer if a new key isneeded.

If locked out of the vehicle, seeRoadside Assistance Program(Mexico) on page 13‑7 or RoadsideAssistance Program (U.S. andCanada) on page 13‑11.

With an active OnStar subscription,an OnStar Advisor may remotelyunlock the vehicle. See OnStarOverview on page 14‑1.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑21 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

If there is a decrease in the RKEoperating range:. Check the distance. The

transmitter may be too far fromthe vehicle.

. Check the location. Othervehicles or objects may beblocking the signal.

. Check the transmitter's battery.See “Battery Replacement” laterin this section.



. If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see yourdealer or a qualified technicianfor service.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System OperationThe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter may work up to 20 m(65 ft) away from the vehicle.

Other conditions can affect theperformance of the transmitter. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System on page 2‑2.

RKE without Remote Start Shown

The following may be available:

Q (Lock): Press to lock all doors.

The turn signal indicators may flashand/or the horn may sound toindicate locking. See “LockingFeedback” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑43.

If the passenger door is open whenQ is pressed, all doors lock.

If the driver door is open when Q ispressed, all doors lock except thedriver door, if enabled throughvehicle personalization.

Pressing Q may also arm thetheft-deterrent system. See VehicleAlarm System on page 2‑10.

K (Unlock): Press to unlock thedriver door or all doors. See “DoorUnlock Options” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑43.

The turn signal indicators may flashand/or the horn may sound toindicate unlocking. See “UnlockFeedback (Lights)” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑43.

Pressing K will disarm thetheft-deterrent system. See VehicleAlarm System on page 2‑10.

V (Remote Trunk Release):Press and hold to open the trunk.

7 (Vehicle Locator/PanicAlarm): Press and release onetime to initiate vehicle locator. Theexterior lamps flash and the hornchirps three times.

Press and hold 7 for at leastthree seconds to sound the panicalarm. The horn sounds and the



turn signals flash until 7 is pressedagain or the key is placed in theignition and turned to ON/RUN.

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): Forvehicles with this feature, press Qand then/ to start the engine fromoutside the vehicle using the RKEtransmitter. See Remote VehicleStart on page 2‑4 for additionalinformation.

The buttons on the keys aredisabled when there is a key in theignition.

Programming Transmitters tothe Vehicle

Only RKE transmitters programmedto this vehicle will work. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased andprogrammed through your dealer.When the replacement transmitter isprogrammed to this vehicle, allremaining transmitters must also bereprogrammed. Any lost or stolen

transmitters will no longer workonce the new transmitter isprogrammed.

Battery Replacement

The battery is not rechargeable. Toreplace the battery:

1. Extend the key blade and openthe battery cover on the back ofthe transmitter by prying it with afinger.

2. Remove the used battery bypushing on the battery andsliding it toward the key blade.

3. Insert the new battery, positiveside facing up. Push the batterydown until it is held in place.Replace with a CR2032 orequivalent battery.

4. Snap the battery cover back onto the transmitter.

Remote Vehicle StartFor vehicles with this feature, theengine may be started from up to60 m (195 ft) away outside thevehicle.

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): Thisbutton will be on the RKEtransmitter if you have remote start.

The climate control system will usethe previous settings during aremote start. The rear defog maycome on during remote start basedon cold ambient conditions. Therear fog indicator light does notcome on during remote start. If thevehicle has heated seats, they maycome on during a remote start.

Laws in some local communitiesmay restrict the use of remotestarters. For example, some lawsmay require a person using remotestart to have the vehicle in view.Check local regulations for anyrequirements.



Other conditions can affect theperformance of the transmitter. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System on page 2‑2.

Starting the Vehicle

To start the engine using the remotestart feature:

1. Aim the RKE transmitter at thevehicle.

2. Press and release Q.

3. Immediately after completingStep 2, press and hold/ for atleast two seconds until the turnsignal lamps flash. The turnsignal lamps flashing confirmsthe request to remote start thevehicle has been received.

When the engine starts, theparking lamps will turn on andremain on as long as the engineis running. The vehicle's doorswill be locked and the climatecontrol system may come on.

The engine will continue to runfor 10 minutes. Repeat the stepsfor a 10-minute time extension.Remote start can be extendedonly once.

Insert the key and turn it to ON/RUNbefore driving.

Extending Engine Run Time

For a 10-minute extension, repeatSteps 1–3 while the engine is stillrunning. The remote start can onlybe extended once.

When the remote start is extended,the second 10 minutes will startimmediately.

For example, if the vehicle has beenrunning for five minutes, and10 minutes are added, the enginewill run for a total of 15 minutes.

A maximum of two remote starts areallowed between ignition cycles.

The vehicle's ignition switch mustbe turned to ON/RUN and then backto LOCK/OFF using the key beforethe remote start procedure can beused again.

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start, do one ofthe following:. Aim the RKE transmitter at the

vehicle and press and hold/until the parking lamps turn off.



. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the vehicle on and then off.

Conditions in Which Remote StartWill Not Work

The remote start will not operate if:. The key is in the ignition.. The hood is not closed.. The hazard warning flashers

are on.. There is an emission control

system malfunction.. The engine coolant temperature

is too high.. The oil pressure is low.. Two remote vehicle starts, or a

single remote start with anextension, have alreadybeen used.

. The vehicle is not in P (Park).

Door Locks

{ WARNING

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

. Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily open thedoors and fall out of a movingvehicle. The chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in acrash is increased if thedoors are not locked. So, allpassengers should wearsafety belts properly and thedoors should be lockedwhenever the vehicle isdriven.

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A child canbe overcome by extreme heatand can suffer permanentinjuries or even death fromheat stroke. Always lock thevehicle whenever leaving it.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen slowing or stopping thevehicle. Lock the doors tohelp prevent this fromhappening.

Manual Door Locks

Lock the doors from inside thevehicle by pressing down on thedoor lock knob on the top ofthe door.

The doors can also be unlockedfrom the inside by pulling the doorhandle. Pulling the door handleagain unlatches the door.

Only the driver door has a keycylinder. Unlock the door from theoutside by turning the keycounterclockwise.

Lock all doors from the outside byturning the key clockwise.



The door lock cylinder turns freelywhen either the wrong key is used,or the correct key is not fullyinserted. The free turning door lockfeature prevents the lock from beingforced open.

To reset the lock, turn it to thevertical position with the correct keyfully inserted. Remove the key andinsert it again.

If this does not reset the lock, turnthe key half-way around in thecylinder and repeat the resetprocedure.

Power Door LocksIf equipped, there is a power doorlock switch on the instrument paneland on the front door panels.

Instrument Panel

Front Door Panels

Q (Lock): Press to lock the doors.

K (Unlock): Press to unlock thedoors.

To program the power door locks,see Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑43.

Lockout ProtectionIf the power door lock switch ispressed when the key is in theignition and a door is open, all thedoors will lock and only the driverdoor will unlock. If the doors areclosed, they can be locked by usingthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. Be sure to remove thekey from the ignition when lockingthe vehicle. This feature can beoverridden by pressing Q on theRKE transmitter or by pressing thepower door lock switch asecond time.

This feature can be disabled. See“Power Door Locks” in VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑43.



Doors

Trunk

{ WARNING

Exhaust gases can enter thevehicle if it is driven with theliftgate, trunk/hatch open, or withany objects that pass through theseal between the body and thetrunk/hatch or liftgate. Engineexhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

If the vehicle must be driven withthe liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:

. Close all of the windows.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside air andset the fan speed to thehighest setting. See “ClimateControl Systems” in theIndex.

. If the vehicle has a powerliftgate, disable the powerliftgate function.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑25.

Remote Trunk Release

To open the trunk from the outsideof the vehicle, pressV on theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter.

From inside the vehicle, pressVon the lower portion of thedriver door.



Emergency Trunk ReleaseLock (Convertible Only)

If the trunk lid cannot be openedusing the RKE transmitter or thetrunk release button:

1. Locate the manual releasebeside the rear seatbackcushion on the driver side.

2. Pull the cushion to the side, thenfully insert the key into the lockcylinder.

3. Firmly turn the key clockwise tounlatch the trunk lid.

4. Remove the key.

Emergency Trunk ReleaseHandle

Notice: Do not use theemergency trunk release handleas a tie-down or anchor pointwhen securing items in the trunkas it could damage the handle.The emergency trunk releasehandle is only intended to aid aperson trapped in a latched trunk,enabling them to open the trunkfrom the inside.

There is an emergency trunkrelease handle inside the trunk onthe liner, near the trunk latch. Onsome vehicles, the release handlecan be accessed by folding the rearseatback down. See Rear Seats onpage 3‑7.

Pull the release handle to open thetrunk from the inside.

Return the release handle to itsoriginal position for properoperation.



Vehicle SecurityThis vehicle has theft-deterrentfeatures; however, they do not makethe vehicle impossible to steal.

Vehicle Alarm SystemThis vehicle has an anti-theft alarmsystem.

The security light is located on theinstrument panel.

Arming the System

To arm the system do one of thefollowing:. Close all of the windows and

doors, then lock the doors withthe RKE transmitter.

. Lock the vehicle using the powerdoor lock switch inside thevehicle if “Unlocked Door AntiLock Out” is turned off.

See “Unlocked Door Anti LockOut” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑43.

The alarm will arm after30 seconds. Pressing Q on theRKE transmitter a second timewill bypass the 30-second delayand immediately arm thesystem.

Disarming the System

To disarm the system, do one of thefollowing:

. Press K on the RKE transmitter.

. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN.

The security light stays on forapproximately one second when thevehicle is disarming.

If the system is armed when thereare people inside of the vehicle,pulling the door handle from theinside one time will unlock the door.Pulling the handle a second time willunlatch the door.

How the System Alarm isActivated

To activate the system if it is armed,open any door, the trunk, or hood.The horn will sound and the hazardwarning flashers will flash.

How to Turn Off the SystemAlarm

To turn off the system alarm, do oneof the following:

. Press K on the RKE transmitter.

. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN.

The theft-deterrent system isdisarmed when the alarm isturned off.



How to Detect a TamperCondition

If the horn sounds and the turnsignal lamps flash three times whenK is pressed, an attempted break-inoccurred while the system wasarmed. The vehicle may alsodisplay a message on the DIC. SeeSecurity Messages on page 5‑41 formore information.

ImmobilizerSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑21 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Immobilizer OperationThis vehicle has a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The system does not have to bemanually armed or disarmed.

The vehicle is automaticallyimmobilized when the key isremoved from the ignition.

The system is automaticallydisarmed when the vehicle isstarted with the correct key. The keyuses a transponder that matches animmobilizer control unit in thevehicle and automatically disarmsthe system. Only the correct keystarts the vehicle. The vehicle maynot start if the key is damaged.

The immobilizer light in theinstrument cluster comes on if thereis a problem with arming ordisarming the theft-deterrentsystem. See Immobilizer Light onpage 5‑24.

When trying to start the vehicle, theimmobilizer light comes on brieflywhen the ignition is turned on.

If the engine does not start and theimmobilizer light stays on, there is aproblem with the system. Turn theignition off and try again.

If the engine still does not start, andthe key appears to be undamaged,try another ignition key.

If the engine still does not start andthe light continues to stay on, tryanother key.

If the engine still does not start withthe other key, the vehicle needsservice. If the vehicle does start, thefirst key may be damaged. See yourdealer who can service thetheft-deterrent system and have anew key made.

Do not leave the key or device thatdisarms or deactivates thetheft-deterrent system in the vehicle.



Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors

{ WARNING

A convex mirror can make things,like other vehicles, look fartheraway than they really are. If youcut too sharply into the right lane,you could hit a vehicle on theright. Check the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convexshaped. A convex mirror's surface iscurved so more can be seen fromthe driver seat.

Power Mirrors


Vehicles with outside power mirrorshave controls on the driver doorarmrest.

To adjust each mirror:

1. Press the switch to select thedriver or passenger side mirror.

2. Press one of the four sides ontheh (control pad) to adjust themirror.

3. Adjust each outside mirror sothat a little of the vehicle and thearea behind it can be seen.

Turn Signal Indicator

If the vehicle has a turn signalindicator on the mirror, an arrow onthe mirror flashes in the direction ofthe turn or lane change.

Heated MirrorsFor vehicles with heated mirrors:

1 (Rear Window Defogger):Press to heat the mirrors.

See “Rear Window Defogger” underClimate Control Systems onpage 8‑1.

Automatic DimmingMirrorIf the vehicle is equipped with anautomatic dimming outside mirror onthe driver side, the mirror will adjustfor the glare of headlampsbehind you.



Interior Mirrors

Manual Rearview MirrorAdjust the inside rearview mirror fora clear view of the area behind yourvehicle. To avoid glare of theheadlamps from behind, push thetab forward for daytime and pull itfor nighttime use.

Vehicles with OnStar® have threecontrol buttons at the bottom of themirror. See OnStar Overview onpage 14‑1.

Cleaning the Mirror

To avoid accidental OnStar calls,clean the mirror with the ignition off.


Automatic DimmingRearview MirrorThe vehicle may have an automaticdimming inside rearview mirror.Automatic dimming reduces theglare from the headlamps of thevehicle behind you. The dimmingfeature and the indicator light comeon each time the vehicle is started.

Vehicles with OnStar have threecontrol buttons at the bottom of themirror. See OnStar Overview onpage 14‑1.

Cleaning the Mirror

To avoid accidental OnStar calls,clean the mirror with the ignition off.


Windows

{ WARNING

Never leave a child, a helplessadult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,especially with the windowsclosed in warm or hot weather.They can be overcome by theextreme heat and sufferpermanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke.



Power Windows

{ WARNING

Children could be seriouslyinjured or killed if caught in thepath of a closing window. Neverleave keys in a vehicle withchildren. See Keys on page 2‑1.


The power window switches on thedriver door control all windows. Thewindow switch on the passengerdoor is only for that window. Push

the front of the switch down to openthe window. Pull the switch up toclose it.

The switches work when the ignitionis in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or in RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). SeeRetained Accessory Power (RAP)on page 9‑21.

Window Indexing

This automatically lowers thewindow a small amount when thedoor is opened. When the door isclosed, the window will raise fully.

If the vehicle loses power, you mayneed to reprogram the windows.Follow the procedure under"Programming the Power Windows"later in this section. If a messageabout the windows appears in theDriver Information Center (DIC), seeWindow Messages on page 5‑43.

If the window freezes to the door,this feature may not work. To closea door with a frozen window, push

the top of the window inward whileclosing the door so the top of thewindow goes under the roof seal.

Express Window Operation

Coupe and Convertible Top

The window switches have anexpress-up and down feature thatraises or lowers the window withoutholding the switch. Pull the switchup or press it down all the way andrelease it. Stop the window byoperating the switch in the samedirection.

Convertible Top Only

To express-up a front window, thesame side rear window must beclosed.

To close all the windows, pull allwindow switches up fully andrelease within four seconds. Thiswill result in the windows closingautomatically.



Express Window Anti-PinchFeature

When express-up is active, thewindow will auto-reverse if there isan obstruction or severe icing. Thewindow returns to normal operationafter the obstruction or condition isremoved.

If conditions prevent a window fromclosing and it continues toauto-reverse, the window can beclosed by having the ignition in ON/RUN and holding the window switchup until the window is closed.

Express Window Anti-PinchOverride

{ WARNING

If express override is activated,the window will not reverseautomatically. You or others couldbe injured and the window couldbe damaged. Before you use

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

express override, make sure thatall people and obstructions areclear of the window path.

In an emergency, the anti-pinchfeature can be overridden in asupervised mode. Hold the windowswitch all the way up to the secondposition. The window will rise for aslong as the switch is held. Once theswitch is released, the expressmode is re-activated.

In this mode, the window can stillclose on an object in its path. Usecare when using the override mode.

Programming the PowerWindows

If the battery on the vehicle hasbeen recharged or disconnected,or is not working, you may need toreprogram the windows for theexpress-up feature to work. Beforereprogramming, replace or rechargethe vehicle's battery.

To program each front window:

1. With the ignition in ON/RUN,close all doors.

2. With the window partially open,pull the power window switch upuntil the window is fully closed.

3. Repeat Step 2 on all remainingwindows.

The windows are nowreprogrammed.

Sun VisorsPull the sun visor down to blockglare. Detach the sun visor from thecenter mount to pivot it to the side,if available.



Roof

SunroofOn vehicles with a sunroof, theswitch is on the overhead console.

Open/Close: Press and hold therear or front of the switch to open orclose the sunroof.

Express-open: Press and releasethe rear of the switch two times toexpress-open the sunroof.

Vent: Press and release the rear ofthe switch to vent the sunroof.

The sunroof only operates when theignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or if RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) is active.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9‑21.

Express Sunroof Operation

The sunroof can be opened withoutholding the switch down. Push theswitch in the open direction until thesecond pause. The sunroof willfully open.

To stop the sunroof from moving,press either the open or closesunroof switch.

Press and release the back of theswitch to open the sunroof to thevent position. Press it again toexpress-open the sunroof. To stopthe sunroof from opening, press theswitch again.

A deflector automatically raiseswhen the sunroof is opened andretracts while the sunroof closes.

If the sunshade is closed, it opensautomatically when the sunroofopens past the vented position.

Notice: Forcing the sunshadeforward of the sliding glass panelmay cause damage and thesunroof may not operate properly.Always close the glass panelbefore closing the sunshade.

To close the sunroof, press the frontof the switch and hold it until thesunroof is closed. The sunroof willstop if the switch is released. Closethe sunshade by hand.



The sunroof glass panel cannot beopened or closed if the vehicle hasan electrical failure.

Dirt and debris may collect on thesunroof seal or in the track. Thiscould cause an issue with sunroofoperation or noise. It could also plugthe water drainage system.Periodically open the sunroof andremove any obstacles or loosedebris. Wipe the sunroof seal androof sealing area using a cleancloth, mild soap, and water. Do notremove grease from the sunroof.

Convertible Top

Power Operation

1. Convertible Top

2. Tonneau Cover (In the Trunk)

To operate the convertible top usethe following steps.

Notice: Leaving the convertibletop down and exposing theinterior of the vehicle to outdoorconditions may cause damage.Always close the convertible topif leaving the vehicle outdoors.

Notice: Lowering the convertibletop when there are objects in thestorage area could damage it orbreak the glass rear window.Always verify that no objects arein the storage area beforelowering the convertible top.

Notice: Lowering the convertibletop if it is damp, wet, or dirty cancause stains, mildew, anddamage to the inside of thevehicle. Dry off the convertibletop before lowering it.

Notice: If you lower theconvertible top on the vehicle incold weather (0°C (32°F) orlower), you may damageconvertible top components. Donot lower the top in cold weather.

Notice: If you raise or lower theconvertible top while the vehicleis in motion, you could damagethe top or the top mechanism.The repairs would not be coveredby the warranty. Always put anautomatic transmission in



P (Park) or a manual transmissionin Neutral before raising orlowering the convertible top.

Lowering the Convertible Top

1. Park on a level surface. Placethe vehicle in P (Park) with anautomatic transmission andNeutral with a manualtransmission. Set the parkingbrake.

2. Remove the tonneau cover fromthe trunk.

3. The rear trunk partition must bein the fastened position. SeeRear Storage on page 4‑1.

4. Remove all objects on or abovethe rear trunk partition.

5. Close the trunk.

6. Start the engine.

7. Release the convertible top frontlatch above the inside rearviewmirror, by pulling down andturning it clockwise.

8. Return the convertible top frontlatch to the closed position.

9. Push and hold the rear of theconvertible top button. Thewindows will automatically lowerand the convertible top will lowerinto the rear of the vehicle.A chime will sound when theconvertible top has loweredcompletely. If the radio is on thesound may be muted for a brieftime so the chime can be heard.

10. Install the tonneau cover. SeeTonneau Cover on page 4‑2.

If the convertible top is operatedmultiple times, the engine should berunning to prevent drain on the



vehicle's battery. Under certainconditions, the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) may display amessage regarding the convertibletop. See Convertible Top Messageson page 5‑34.

Raising the Convertible Top

Notice: If you raise or lower theconvertible top while the vehicleis in motion, you could damagethe top or the top mechanism.The repairs would not be coveredby the warranty. Always put anautomatic transmission inP (Park) or a manual transmissionin Neutral before raising orlowering the convertible top.

Notice: If you raise the topwithout removing the tonneaucover you may damage the topcomponents and the tonneaucover. Remove the tonneau coverbefore operating theconvertible top.


2. Remove the tonneau cover ifinstalled. See Tonneau Cover onpage 4‑2.

3. Move any objects that havefallen against the convertible topinside the trunk.

4. Close the trunk.


{ WARNING

Placing hands on the top of thewindshield frame when closingthe convertible soft top couldcause fingers to be pinched andmay cause injury. Keep handsbelow the windshield frame whenclosing the convertible top.

6. Push and hold the front of theconvertible top button. The topwill raise and the windows willlower.



7. After the convertible top iscompletely raised, release theconvertible top button.

8. Release the convertible top frontlatch from the lock position bypulling down and turning itclockwise.

9. Lock the convertible top frontlatch by pulling down and turningit counterclockwise, then pushit up.

If the convertible top has beenopened repeatedly within a shorttime and is not working, waitfive minutes before pressing theconvertible top button again.

Operation of the convertible topcannot be attempted for five minutesafter the last time the convertible topswitch was pressed if theconvertible top was openedrepeatedly within a short time andthe top has stopped functioning.

If the vehicle has lost power, theconvertible top can still be raised byreleasing pressure on thehydraulic pump.

Never attempt to open or close theconvertible top manually without firstreleasing pressure.

Raising the Convertible TopManually

Notice: If you raise the topwithout removing the tonneaucover you may damage the topcomponents and the tonneau

cover. Remove the tonneau coverbefore operating theconvertible top.


2. Remove the tonneau cover ifinstalled. See Tonneau Cover onpage 4‑2.

3. Move any objects that havefallen against the convertible topinside the trunk.



4. Remove the trim cover to accessthe hydraulic pressurerelease bolt.

5. Locate the pressure release bolton the top of the hydraulic pump.

6. Using the provided wrench, turnthe pressure release boltcounterclockwise no more thanone turn.

7. Reinstall the trim cover.

8. Pull the front of the convertibletop up and forward.

9. After the convertible top iscompletely raised, release theconvertible top front latch fromthe lock position by pulling downand turning it clockwise.

10. Lock the convertible top frontlatch by pulling down andturning it counterclockwise,then push it up.

When power is restored to thevehicle, the pressure release boltmust be tightened using theprovided wrench, by turning itclockwise. The convertible topbutton can then be used to lower orraise the convertible top.

If the convertible top is operatedmultiple times, the engine should berunning to prevent drain on thevehicle's battery. Under certainconditions, the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) may display amessage regarding the convertibletop. See Convertible Top Messageson page 5‑34.

If the battery has beendisconnected, the power windowsmust be programmed for theconvertible top to operate. SeePower Windows on page 2‑14.



Cleaning the Convertible Top

The convertible top should becleaned often. High pressure carwashes may cause water to enterthe vehicle.

Hand wash the convertible top inthe shade. Use a mild soap,lukewarm water, and a soft sponge.A chamois or cloth may leave lint onthe top, and a brush can chafe thethreads in the top fabric. Do not usedetergents, harsh cleaners,solvents, or bleaching agents.

Wet the entire vehicle and wash thetop evenly to avoid spots or rings.Let the soap remain on the fabric fora fewminutes. When the top is verydirty, use a mild foam-type cleaner.Thoroughly rinse, then let the topdry in direct sunlight.

To protect the convertible top:. After washing, the top must be

completely dry before lowering.. Do not get any cleaner on the

painted finish; it could leavestreaks.

. Before going through anautomatic car wash, find out ifthe equipment could damage theconvertible top.


Seats and Restraints 3-1

Seats andRestraints

Head RestraintsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Front SeatsSeat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-4Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Seatback Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Rear SeatsRear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Safety BeltsSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-15Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-15Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-15

Airbag SystemAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-18When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

Servicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-28

Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-29Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-29

Child RestraintsOlder Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30Infants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32

Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-34Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-36Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-42

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43

Securing Child Restraints(Right FrontPassenger Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45


3-2 Seats and Restraints

Head RestraintsThe vehicle's front seats haveadjustable head restraints in theoutboard seating positions.

{ WARNING

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do notdrive until the head restraints forall occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

Adjust the head restraint so that thetop of the restraint is at the sameheight as the top of the occupant'shead. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

The height of the head restraint canbe adjusted. Pull the head restraintup to raise it. Try to move the headrestraint to make sure that it islocked in place.

To lower the head restraint, pressthe button, located on the top of theseatback, and push the restraintdown. Try to move the headrestraint after the button is releasedto make sure that it is locked inplace.

The front seat outboard headrestraints are not designed to beremoved.



Front Seats

Seat Adjustment

{ WARNING

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust a driverseat while the vehicle is moving.Adjust the driver seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

Seat Position

To adjust a manual seat,if equipped:

1. Lift the handle under the seat tounlock it.

2. Slide the seat and release thehandle.

3. Try to move the seat back andforth to be sure it is locked inplace.

Height Adjustment

If equipped, move the lever up ordown repeatedly to manually raiseor lower the seat.



Power Seat Adjustment

To adjust a power seat, if equipped:. Move the seat forward or

rearward by sliding thehorizontal control forward orrearward.

. Raise or lower the front part ofthe seat cushion by moving thefront of the horizontal control upor down.

. Raise or lower the entire seat bymoving the entire horizontalcontrol up or down.

Reclining Seatbacks

Power Reclining Seatbacks

To adjust the seatback:. Tilt the top of the control

rearward to recline.. Tilt the top of the control forward

to raise.

{ WARNING

Sitting in a reclined position whenthe vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even when buckledup, the safety belts cannot dotheir job.

The shoulder belt will not beagainst your body. Instead, it willbe in front of you. In a crash, youcould go into it, receiving neck orother injuries.

The lap belt could go up overyour abdomen. The belt forceswould be there, not at your pelvicbones. This could cause seriousinternal injuries.

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear thesafety belt properly.



Do not have a seatback reclined ifthe vehicle is moving.

Seatback Latches

To access the rear seats, pull up onthe latch on the rear of the driver orfront passenger seatback. Fold theseatback forward.

{ WARNING

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

To return the seatback to the uprightposition, lift the seatback andmanually push it rearward until itlocks in place. Push and pull on theseatback to make sure it is locked.

The power recline control isdeactivated when the seatback isfolded forward and will not functionuntil the seatback has beenmanually returned to the upright,locked position. This is normal. Donot use the power recline control onthe outboard side of the seat toraise the seatback. See RecliningSeatbacks on page 3‑4.



Heated Front Seats

{ WARNING

If you cannot feel temperaturechange or pain to the skin, theseat heater may cause burns. Toreduce the risk of burns, peoplewith such a condition should usecare when using the seat heater,especially for long periods oftime. Do not place anything onthe seat that insulates againstheat, such as a blanket, cushion,cover, or similar item. This maycause the seat heater tooverheat. An overheated seatheater may cause a burn or maydamage the seat.

If available, press L or M to turn onthe heated seat. A light indicatesthis feature is on.

To operate, the engine must berunning.

Press the button once for thehighest setting. With each press ofthe button, the heated seat willchange to the next lower setting,and then the off setting. Two lightsindicate the highest setting, and onelight indicates the lowest.

The passenger seat may takelonger to heat up.

Remote Start Heated Seats

When it is cold outside, the heatedseats can be turned onautomatically during a remote start.They are canceled when the ignitionis turned on. Press the button to usethe heated seats after the vehicle isstarted.

The heated seat indicator lights donot turn on during a remote start.

The temperature performance of anunoccupied seat may be reduced.This is normal.

The heated seats will not turn onduring a remote start unless theyare enabled in the vehiclepersonalization menu. See RemoteVehicle Start on page 2‑4 andVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑43.



Rear SeatsNotice: On convertible models,there is a speaker between thetwo rear seating positions on theseatback. If someone leans onthe speaker, if cargo is loaded onit, or if liquid is spilled on it,damage could occur. Do not leanagainst the speaker, place cargoon the speaker, or spill liquids onthe speaker.

On coupe models, the rear seat hastwo designated seating positionsand can be folded for more cargospace. Fold the seat only when thevehicle is parked.

To fold the seatback down:

1. Pull on the strap on the top ofthe rear seatback.

2. Fold the seatback down.

{ WARNING

A safety belt that is improperlyrouted, not properly attached,or twisted will not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising therear seatback, always check to besure that the safety belts areproperly routed and attached, andare not twisted.

Lift the seatback up to raise it, andpush it back to lock it into place.Make sure the safety belt is nottwisted or caught in the seatback.



Safety BeltsThis section of the manualdescribes how to use safety beltsproperly. It also describes somethings not to do with safety belts.

{ WARNING

Do not let anyone ride where asafety belt cannot be wornproperly. In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearingsafety belts, injuries can be muchworse than if you are wearingsafety belts. You can be seriouslyinjured or killed by hitting thingsinside the vehicle harder or bybeing ejected from the vehicle. Inaddition, anyone who is notbuckled up can strike otherpassengers in the vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area, inside or outsideof a vehicle. In a collision,passengers riding in these areasare more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed. Do not allowpassengers to ride in any area ofthe vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts.

Always wear a safety belt, andcheck that all passenger(s) arerestrained properly too.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the safety belts.See Safety Belt Reminders onpage 5‑15.

Why Safety Belts Work

When riding in a vehicle, you travelas fast as the vehicle does. If thevehicle stops suddenly, you keepgoing until something stops you.It could be the windshield, theinstrument panel, or the safety belts!

When you wear a safety belt, youand the vehicle slow down together.There is more time to stop becauseyou stop over a longer distance and,when worn properly, your strongestbones take the forces from the



safety belts. That is why wearingsafety belts makes such goodsense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing asafety belt?

A: You could be— whether you arewearing a safety belt or not.Your chance of being consciousduring and after a crash, so youcan unbuckle and get out, ismuch greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear safetybelts?

A: Airbags are supplementalsystems only; so they work withsafety belts— not instead ofthem. Whether or not an airbagis provided, all occupants stillhave to buckle up to get themost protection.

Also, in nearly all states and inall Canadian provinces, the lawrequires wearing safety belts.

How to Wear Safety BeltsProperlyThis section is only for people ofadult size.

There are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. Andthere are different rules for smallerchildren and infants. If a child will beriding in the vehicle, see OlderChildren on page 3‑30 or Infantsand Young Children on page 3‑32.Follow those rules for everyone'sprotection.

It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who arewearing safety belts.

There are important things to knowabout wearing a safety belt properly.

. Sit up straight and always keepyour feet on the floor in frontof you.

. Always use the correct bucklefor your seating position.

. Wear the lap part of the belt lowand snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs. In a crash,this applies force to the strongpelvic bones and you would beless likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the beltwould apply force on yourabdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries.



. Wear the shoulder belt over theshoulder and across the chest.These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restrainingforces. The shoulder belt locks ifthere is a sudden stop or crash.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured,or even killed, by not wearingyour safety belt properly.

. Never allow the lap orshoulder belt to becomeloose or twisted.

. Never wear the shoulder beltunder both arms or behindyour back.

. Never route the lap orshoulder belt over anarmrest.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt.

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.

1. If the seat has a safety beltguide, and the safety belt is notrouted through the guide, snapthe guide around the beltwebbing. Be sure the belt is nottwisted.

2. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see “Seats”in the Index.



3. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not let itget twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lock ifyou pull the belt across you veryquickly. If this happens, let thebelt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across youmore slowly.

If the shoulder portion of apassenger belt is pulled out allthe way, the child restraintlocking feature may be engaged.If this happens, let the belt goback all the way and start again.

4. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If the beltis not long enough, see SafetyBelt Extender on page 3‑15.

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

5. To make the lap part tight, pullup on the shoulder belt.

It may be necessary to pullstitching on the safety beltthrough the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smalleroccupants.

To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle. The belt shouldreturn to its stowed position.



Before a door is closed, be sure thesafety belt is out of the way. If adoor is slammed against a safetybelt, damage can occur to both thesafety belt and the vehicle.

Safety Belt Pretensioners

This vehicle has safety beltpretensioners for the front outboardoccupants. Although the safety beltpretensioners cannot be seen, theyare part of the safety belt assembly.They can help tighten the safetybelts during the early stages of amoderate to severe frontal or nearfrontal crash if the thresholdconditions for pretensioneractivation are met. If the vehicle hasside impact airbags, safety beltpretensioners can help tighten thesafety belts in a side crash. And,if the vehicle has roof-rail airbagsthe safety belt pretensioners canhelp tighten the safety belts during arollover crash.

Pretensioners work only once. If thepretensioners activate in a crash,the pretensioners and probablyother parts of the vehicle's safetybelt system will need to be replaced.See Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash on page 3‑15.

Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides

Rear shoulder belt comfort guidesmay provide added safety beltcomfort for older children who haveoutgrown booster seats and forsome adults. When installed on ashoulder belt, the comfort guidepositions the shoulder belt awayfrom the neck and head.

There is one guide for eachoutboard passenger position in therear seat. Here is how to install acomfort guide to the safety belt:

1. Pull the elastic cord out frombetween the edge of theseatback and the interior body toremove the guide from itsstorage clip.



2. Place the guide over the beltand insert the two edges of thebelt into the slots of the guide.

3. Be sure that the belt is nottwisted and it lies flat. Theelastic cord must be under thebelt and the guide on top.

{ WARNING

A safety belt that is not properlyworn may not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulderand across the chest. These partsof the body are best able to takebelt restraining forces.



4. Buckle, position, and release thesafety belt as describedpreviously in this section. Makesure the shoulder portion of thebelt is on the shoulder and notfalling off of it. The belt shouldbe close to, but not contacting,the neck.

To remove and store the comfortguide, squeeze the belt edgestogether so that the safety belt canbe removed from the guide. Slidethe guide onto the clip, leaving onlythe loop of the elastic cord exposed.

Properly secure the guide beforefolding the seatback.

Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancySafety belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likely tobe seriously injured if they do notwear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear alap-shoulder belt, and the lapportion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding,throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus isto protect the mother. When a safetybelt is worn properly, it is more likelythat the fetus will not be hurt in acrash. For pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making safetybelts effective is wearing themproperly.



Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle's safety belt will fastenaround you, you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not longenough, your dealer will order youan extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat youwill wear, so the extender will belong enough for you. To help avoidpersonal injury, do not let someoneelse use it, and use it only for theseat it is made to fit. The extenderhas been designed for adults. Neveruse it for securing child seats. Towear it, attach it to the regular safetybelt. See the instruction sheet thatcomes with the extender.

Safety System CheckNow and then, check that the safetybelt reminder light, safety belts,buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are all working properly.Look for any other loose ordamaged safety belt system partsthat might keep a safety belt systemfrom doing its job. See your dealer

to have it repaired. Torn or frayedsafety belts may not protect you in acrash. They can rip apart underimpact forces. If a belt is torn orfrayed, get a new one right away.

Make sure the safety belt reminderlight is working. See Safety BeltReminders on page 5‑15.

Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Safety Belt Care on page 3‑15.

Safety Belt CareKeep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after aCrash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the safetybelt system in the vehicle.A damaged safety belt systemmay not properly protect theperson using it, resulting inserious injury or even death in acrash. To help make sure thesafety belt systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

After a minor crash, replacement ofsafety belts may not be necessary.But the safety belt assemblies thatwere used during any crash mayhave been stressed or damaged.



See your dealer to have the safetybelt assemblies inspected orreplaced.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the safety beltsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Have the safety belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been in acrash, or if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start the vehicleor while you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑15.

Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the followingairbags:. A frontal airbag for the driver.. A frontal airbag for the right front

passenger.. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the driver.. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the right frontpassenger.

The vehicle may also have thefollowing airbags:. A roof-rail airbag for the driver

and the passenger seateddirectly behind the driver.

. A roof-rail airbag for the rightfront passenger and thepassenger seated directlybehind the right front passenger.

All of the airbags in your vehicle willhave the word AIRBAG embossedin the trim or on an attached labelnear the deployment opening.

For frontal airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear on the middlepart of the steering wheel for thedriver and on the instrument panelfor the right front passenger.

With seat-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAG willappear on the side of the seatbackclosest to the door.

With roof-rail airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear along theheadliner or trim.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by safetybelts. Even though today's airbagsare also designed to help reducethe risk of injury from the force of aninflating bag, all airbags must inflatevery quickly to do their job.



Here are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system:

{ WARNING

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing your safety belt, evenwith airbags. Airbags aredesigned to work with safetybelts, not replace them. Also,airbags are not designed to inflatein every crash. In some crashessafety belts are the only restraint.See When Should an AirbagInflate? on page 3‑20.

Wearing your safety belt during acrash helps reduce the chance ofhitting things inside the vehicle orbeing ejected from it. Airbags are“supplemental restraints” to thesafety belts. Everyone in thevehicle should wear a safety beltproperly, whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ WARNING

Because airbags inflate with greatforce and faster than the blink ofan eye, anyone who is upagainst, or very close to anyairbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Do notsit unnecessarily close to anyairbag, as you would be if sittingon the edge of the seat or leaningforward. Safety belts help keepyou in position before and duringa crash. Always wear a safetybelt, even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle.

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withseat-mounted side impact airbagsand/or roof-rail airbags.

{ WARNING

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protectionfor adults and older children, butnot for young children and infants.Neither the vehicle's safety beltsystem nor its airbag system isdesigned for them. Youngchildren and infants need theprotection that a child restraintsystem can provide. Alwayssecure children properly in thevehicle. To read how, see OlderChildren on page 3‑30 or Infantsand Young Children onpage 3‑32.



There is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument cluster, whichshows the airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbagelectrical system for malfunctions.The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑15 formore information.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver frontal airbag is in themiddle of the steering wheel.

The right front passenger frontalairbag is in the instrument panel onthe passenger side.



Coupe Models, Driver Side Shown,Passenger Side Similar

On coupe models, the seat-mountedside impact airbags for the driverand right front passenger are in theside of the seatbacks closest tothe door.

Convertible Models, Driver SideShown, Passenger Side Similar

On convertible models, theseat-mounted side impact airbagsfor the driver and right frontpassenger are in the side of theseatbacks closest to the door.

Coupe Models, Driver Side Shown,Passenger Side Similar

On coupe models, the roof-railairbags for the driver, right frontpassenger, and second rowoutboard passengers are in theceiling above the side windows.



{ WARNING

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, theairbag might not inflate properlyor it might force the object intothat person causing severe injuryor even death. The path of aninflating airbag must be keptclear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or putanything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any otherairbag covering.

Do not use seat accessories thatblock the inflation path of aseat-mounted side impact airbag.

Never secure anything to the roofof a vehicle with roof-rail airbagsby routing a rope or tie‐downthrough any door or windowopening. If you do, the path of aninflating roof-rail airbag will beblocked.

When Should an AirbagInflate?Frontal airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe frontalor near frontal crashes to helpreduce the potential for severeinjuries mainly to the driver's or rightfront passenger's head and chest.However, they are only designed toinflate if the impact exceeds apredetermined deploymentthreshold. Deployment thresholdsare used to predict how severe acrash is likely to be in time for theairbags to inflate and help restrainthe occupants.

Whether the frontal airbags will orshould deploy is not based on howfast your vehicle is traveling.It depends largely on what you hit,the direction of the impact, and howquickly your vehicle slows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate atdifferent crash speeds. Forexample:. If the vehicle hits a stationary

object, the airbags could inflateat a different crash speed than ifthe vehicle hits a moving object.

. If the vehicle hits an object thatdeforms, the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits an objectthat does not deform.

. If the vehicle hits a narrow object(like a pole), the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a wideobject (like a wall).

. If the vehicle goes into an objectat an angle, the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle goes straightinto the object.

Thresholds can also vary withspecific vehicle design.



Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, rearimpacts, or many side impacts.

In addition, the vehicle hasdual-stage frontal airbags.Dual-stage airbags adjust therestraint according to crash severity.The vehicle has electronic frontalsensors, which help the sensingsystem distinguish between amoderate frontal impact and a moresevere frontal impact. For moderatefrontal impacts, dual-stage airbagsinflate at a level less than fulldeployment. For more severe frontalimpacts, full deployment occurs.

The vehicle has a seat positionsensor which enables the sensingsystem to monitor the position of thedriver seat. The seat position sensorprovides information that is used todetermine if the airbag(s) shoulddeploy at a reduced level or at fulldeployment.

The vehicle has seat-mounted sideimpact airbags. The vehicle may ormay not have roof-rail airbags. See

Airbag System on page 3‑16.Seat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags are intended toinflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes. In addition, these roof‐railairbags are intended to inflateduring a rollover or in a severefrontal impact. Seat-mounted sideimpact and roof-rail airbags willinflate if the crash severity is abovethe system's designed thresholdlevel. The threshold level can varywith specific vehicle design.

Seat-mounted side impact airbagsare not intended to inflate in frontalimpacts, near frontal impacts,rollovers, or rear impacts.A seat-mounted side impact airbagis intended to deploy on the side ofthe vehicle that is struck. Bothroof-rail airbags will deploy wheneither side of the vehicle is struck,or if the sensing system predictsthat the vehicle is about to roll over,or in a severe frontal impact.

In any particular crash, no one cansay whether an airbag should haveinflated simply because of the

damage to a vehicle or because ofwhat the repair costs were. Forfrontal airbags, inflation isdetermined by what the vehicle hits,the angle of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down. Forseat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags, deployment isdetermined by the location andseverity of the side impact.

In a rollover event, roof-rail airbagdeployment is determined by thedirection of the roll. In a rolloverevent, both roof‐rail airbags willdeploy.

What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills theairbag causing the bag to break outof the cover and deploy. The inflator,the airbag, and related hardware areall part of the airbag module.



Frontal airbag modules are locatedinside the steering wheel andinstrument panel. For vehicles withseat-mounted side impact airbags,there are airbag modules in the sideof the front seatbacks closest to thedoor. For vehicles with roof-railairbags, there are airbag modules inthe ceiling of the vehicle, near theside windows that have occupantseating positions.

How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions,even belted occupants can contactthe inside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts. Frontalairbags distribute the force of theimpact more evenly over theoccupant's upper body, stopping theoccupant more gradually.

Seat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags distribute the forceof the impact more evenly over theoccupant's upper body.

Rollover‐capable roof‐rail airbagsare designed to help contain thehead and chest of occupants in theoutboard seating positions in thefirst and second rows. The rollover‐capable roof‐rail airbags aredesigned to help reduce the risk offull or partial ejection in rolloverevents, although no system canprevent all such ejections.

But airbags would not help in manytypes of collisions, primarilybecause the occupant's motion isnot toward those airbags. See WhenShould an Airbag Inflate? onpage 3‑20 for more information.

Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplementto safety belts.

What Will You See afteran Airbag Inflates?After the frontal airbags andseat-mounted side impact airbagsinflate, they quickly deflate, soquickly that some people may noteven realize an airbag inflated.Roof-rail airbags may still be at leastpartially inflated for some time afterthey inflate. Some components ofthe airbag module may be hot forseveral minutes. For location of theairbags, see Where Are theAirbags? on page 3‑18.

The parts of the airbag that comeinto contact with you may be warm,but not too hot to touch. There maybe some smoke and dust comingfrom the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does notprevent the driver from seeing out ofthe windshield or being able to steerthe vehicle, nor does it preventpeople from leaving the vehicle.



{ WARNING

When an airbag inflates, theremay be dust in the air. This dustcould cause breathing problemsfor people with a history ofasthma or other breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon asit is safe to do so. If you havebreathing problems but cannotget out of the vehicle after anairbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door.If you experience breathingproblems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.

The vehicle has a feature that mayautomatically unlock the doors, turnthe interior lamps on, turn thehazard warning flashers on, andshut off the fuel system after theairbags inflate. You can lock thedoors, turn the interior lamps off,

and turn the hazard warningflashers off by using the controls forthose features.

{ WARNING

A crash severe enough to inflatethe airbags may have alsodamaged important functions inthe vehicle, such as the fuelsystem, brake and steeringsystems, etc. Even if the vehicleappears to be drivable after amoderate crash, there may beconcealed damage that couldmake it difficult to safely operatethe vehicle.

Use caution if you should attemptto restart the engine after a crashhas occurred.

In many crashes severe enough toinflate the airbag, windshields arebroken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the front outboardpassenger airbag.

. Airbags are designed to inflateonly once. After an airbaginflates, you will need some newparts for the airbag system.If you do not get them, theairbag system will not be thereto help protect you in anothercrash. A new system will includeairbag modules and possiblyother parts. The service manualfor the vehicle covers the needto replace other parts.

. The vehicle has a crash sensingand diagnostic module whichrecords information after acrash. See Vehicle DataRecording and Privacy onpage 13‑19 and Event DataRecorders on page 13‑19.

. Let only qualified technicianswork on the airbag systems.Improper service can mean thatan airbag system will not workproperly. See your dealer forservice.



Passenger SensingSystemThe vehicle has a passengersensing system for the right frontpassenger position. The passengerairbag status indicator will be visibleon the overhead console when thevehicle is started.

United States

Canada and Mexico

The words ON and OFF, or thesymbol for on and off, will be visibleduring the system check. If you areusing remote start, if equipped, to

start the vehicle from a distance,you may not see the system check.When the system check iscomplete, either the word ON orOFF, or the symbol for on or off, willbe visible. See Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator on page 5‑16.

The passenger sensing system willturn off the right front passengerfrontal airbag under certainconditions. The driver airbags androof‐rail airbags (if equipped) are notaffected by the passenger sensingsystem.

The passenger sensing systemworks with sensors that are part ofthe right front passenger seat. Thesensors are designed to detect thepresence of a properly seatedoccupant and determine if the rightfront passenger frontal airbagshould be enabled (may inflate)or not.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlysecured in a rear seat in the correctchild restraint for their weightand size.

We recommend that children besecured in a rear seat, including: aninfant or a child riding in arear-facing child restraint; a childriding in a forward-facing child seat;an older child riding in a boosterseat; and children, who are largeenough, using safety belts.

A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front.” This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great if theairbag deploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

rear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though theairbag is turned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as far

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

back as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag if:. The right front passenger seat is

unoccupied.. The system determines that an

infant is present in a rear-facinginfant seat.

. The system determines that asmall child is present in a childrestraint.

. The system determines that asmall child is present in abooster seat.

. A right front passenger takeshis/her weight off of the seat fora period of time.

. The right front passenger seat isoccupied by a smaller person,such as a child who hasoutgrown child restraints.

. Or, if there is a critical problemwith the airbag system or thepassenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag, the offindicator will light and stay lit toremind you that the airbag is off.See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5‑16.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn on (may inflate) theright front passenger frontal airbagany time the system senses that aperson of adult size is sittingproperly in the right front passengerseat. When the passenger sensingsystem has allowed the airbag to beenabled, the on indicator will lightand stay lit to remind you that theairbag is active.



For some children who haveoutgrown child restraints and forvery small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turnoff the right front passenger frontalairbag, depending upon theperson's seating posture and bodybuild. Everyone in the vehicle whohas outgrown child restraints shouldwear a safety belt properly —whether or not there is an airbag forthat person.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑15 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

If the On Indicator is Lit for aChild Restraint

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle.

3. Remove any additional itemsfrom the seat such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

4. Reinstall the child restraintfollowing the directions providedby the child restraintmanufacturer and refer toSecuring Child Restraints (RightFront Passenger Seat) onpage 3‑45 or Securing ChildRestraints (Rear Seat) onpage 3‑43.

5. If, after reinstalling the childrestraint and restarting thevehicle, the on indicator is still lit,turn the vehicle off. Then slightlyrecline the vehicle seatback andadjust the seat cushion,

if adjustable, to make sure thatthe vehicle seatback is notpushing the child restraint intothe seat cushion.

6. Restart the vehicle.

If the on indicator is still lit,secure the child in the childrestraint in a rear seat position inthe vehicle, and check with yourdealer.

If the Off Indicator is Lit for anAdult-Size Occupant



If a person of adult-size is sitting inthe right front passenger seat, butthe off indicator is lit, it could bebecause that person is not sittingproperly in the seat. If this happens,use the following steps to allow thesystem to detect that person andenable the right front passengerfrontal airbag:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat, such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

3. Place the seatback in the fullyupright position.

4. Have the person sit upright inthe seat, centered on the seatcushion, with legs comfortablyextended.

5. Restart the vehicle and have theperson remain in this position forone minute after the on indicatoris lit.

Additional Factors AffectingSystem Operation

Safety belts help keep thepassenger in position on the seatduring vehicle maneuvers andbraking, which helps the passengersensing system maintain thepassenger airbag status. See“Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”in the Index for additionalinformation about the importance ofproper restraint use.

A thick layer of additional material,such as a blanket or cushion,or aftermarket equipment such asseat covers, seat heaters, and seatmassagers can affect how well thepassenger sensing systemoperates. We recommend that younot use seat covers or otheraftermarket equipment except whenapproved by GM for your specificvehicle. See Adding Equipment tothe Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑28 for more informationabout modifications that can affecthow the system operates.

The passenger sensing system mayturn on the passenger airbag whenliquid soaks into the seat. If thishappens, the on indicator will be lit.

If the passenger seat gets wet, drythe seat immediately. If the airbagreadiness light is lit, do not install achild restraint or allow anyone tooccupy the seat. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑15 forimportant safety information.

{ WARNING

Stowing of articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion andseatback may interfere with theproper operation of the passengersensing system.

Servicing theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicleshould be serviced. There are partsof the airbag system in several



places around the vehicle. Yourdealer and the service manual haveinformation about servicing thevehicle and the airbag system. Topurchase a service manual, seeService Publications OrderingInformation on page 13‑17.

{ WARNING

For up to 10 seconds after thevehicle is turned off and thebattery is disconnected, an airbagcan still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if youare close to an airbag when itinflates. Avoid yellow connectors.They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, andmake sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAdding accessories that change thevehicle's frame, bumper system,height, front end, or side sheetmetal, may keep the airbag systemfrom working properly. Theoperation of the airbag system canalso be affected by changing ormoving any parts of the front seats,safety belts, the airbag sensing anddiagnostic module, steering wheel,instrument panel, roof-rail airbagmodules, ceiling headliner or pillargarnish trim, front sensors, sideimpact sensors, or airbag wiring.

Your dealer and the service manualhave information about the locationof the airbag sensors, sensing anddiagnostic module, and airbagwiring.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system for thefront outboard passenger position,which includes sensors that are partof the passenger seat. Thepassenger sensing system may notoperate properly if the original seattrim is replaced with non-GMcovers, upholstery, or trim; or withGM covers, upholstery, or trimdesigned for a different vehicle. Anyobject, such as an aftermarket seatheater or a comfort-enhancing pador device, installed under or on topof the seat fabric, could alsointerfere with the operation of thepassenger sensing system. Thiscould either prevent properdeployment of the passengerairbag(s) or prevent the passengersensing system from properlyturning off the passenger airbag(s).See Passenger Sensing System onpage 3‑24.

If the vehicle has rollover roof-railairbags, see Different Size Tiresand Wheels on page 10‑66.



If your vehicle needs to be modifiedbecause you have a disability andyou have questions about whetherthe modifications will affect thevehicle's airbag system, or if youhave questions about whether theairbag system will be affected if thevehicle is modified for any otherreason, call Customer Assistance.See Customer Assistance Offices(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑5 orCustomer Assistance Offices(Mexico) on page 13‑5.

Airbag System CheckThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenance orreplacement. Make sure the airbagreadiness light is working. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 5‑15.

Notice: If an airbag covering isdamaged, opened, or broken, theairbag may not work properly. Donot open or break the airbagcoverings. If there are anyopened or broken airbag covers,

have the airbag covering and/orairbag module replaced. For thelocation of the airbags, seeWhere Are the Airbags? onpage 3‑18. See your dealer forservice.

Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the airbagsystems in the vehicle.A damaged airbag system maynot work properly and may notprotect you and yourpassenger(s) in a crash, resultingin serious injury or even death. Tohelp make sure the airbagsystems are working properlyafter a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

If an airbag inflates, you will need toreplace airbag system parts. Seeyour dealer for service.

If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started or comeson when you are driving, the airbagsystem may not work properly. Havethe vehicle serviced right away. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 5‑15.



Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear thevehicle safety belts.

The manufacturer instructions thatcome with the booster seat state theweight and height limitations for thatbooster. Use a booster seat with alap-shoulder belt until the childpasses the fit test below:. Sit all the way back on the seat.

Do the knees bend at the seatedge? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.Does the shoulder belt rest onthe shoulder? If yes, continue.If no, try using the rear safetybelt comfort guide. See “RearSafety Belt Comfort Guides”under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3‑10. If the shoulder beltstill does not rest on theshoulder, then return to thebooster seat.

. Does the lap belt fit low andsnug on the hips, touching thethighs? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Can proper safety belt fit bemaintained for the length of thetrip? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

Q: What is the proper way towear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide. The shoulderbelt should not cross the face orneck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, justtouching the top of the thighs.This applies belt force to thechild's pelvic bones in a crash.It should never be worn over theabdomen, which could causesevere or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

Also see “Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3‑10.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a child



restraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Olderchildren need to use safety beltsproperly.

{ WARNING

Never allow more than one childto wear the same safety belt. Thesafety belt cannot properly spreadthe impact forces. In a crash, theycan be crushed together andseriously injured. A safety beltmust be used by only one personat a time.

{ WARNING

Never allow a child to wear thesafety belt with the shoulder beltbehind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly. In acrash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt.The child could move too farforward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. The childmight also slide under the lap

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

belt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.



Infants and YoungChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infants andall other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age andsize of the traveler changes theneed, for everyone, to use safetyrestraints. In fact, the law in everystate in the United States and inevery Canadian province sayschildren up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and neverallow children to play with thesafety belts.

Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offerprotection for adults and olderchildren, but not for young childrenand infants. Neither the vehicle'ssafety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Everytime infants and young children ridein vehicles, they should have theprotection provided by appropriatechild restraints.

Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people,or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

{ WARNING

Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.For example, in a crash at only40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)infant will suddenly become a110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

arms. An infant should besecured in an appropriaterestraint.

{ WARNING

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Never put a rear-facing

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

child restraint in the right frontseat. Secure a rear-facing childrestraint in a rear seat. It is alsobetter to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in a rear seat. If youmust secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat, always move the frontpassenger seat as far back as itwill go.

Q: What are the different types ofadd-on child restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, whichare purchased by the vehicleowner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particularrestraint should take intoconsideration not only the child'sweight, height, and age but alsowhether or not the restraint willbe compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of childrestraints, there are manydifferent models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, besure it is designed to be used ina motor vehicle. If it is, therestraint will have a label sayingthat it meets federal motorvehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturerinstructions that come with therestraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particularchild restraint. In addition, there

are many kinds of restraintsavailable for children withspecial needs.

{ WARNING

To reduce the risk of neck andhead injury during a crash, infantsneed complete support. In acrash, if an infant is in arear-facing child restraint, thecrash forces can be distributedacross the strongest part of aninfant's body, the back andshoulders. Infants should alwaysbe secured in rear-facing childrestraints.

{ WARNING

A young child's hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle's regularsafety belt may not remain low onthe hip bones, as it should.

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child's abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on abody area that is unprotected byany bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatalinjuries. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, young children shouldalways be secured in appropriatechild restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

Rear-Facing Infant Seat

A rear-facing infant seat providesrestraint with the seating surfaceagainst the back of the infant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts tokeep the infant positioned in therestraint.

Forward-Facing Child Seat

A forward-facing child seat providesrestraint for the child's body with theharness.



Booster Seats

A booster seat is a child restraintdesigned to improve the fit of thevehicle's safety belt system.A booster seat can also help a childto see out the window.

Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle. Secure the childrestraint properly in the vehicleusing the vehicle safety belt orLATCH system, following theinstructions that came with thatchild restraint and the instructionsin this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury,the child restraint must be securedin the vehicle. Child restraintsystems must be secured in vehicleseats by lap belts or the lap beltportion of a lap-shoulder belt, or bythe LATCH system. See LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3‑37.

Children can be endangered in acrash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructionsthat come with the restraint whichmay be on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both, and to this manual.The child restraint instructions areimportant, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacementcopy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle— even when no child isin it.

In some areas of the United Statesand Canada, Certified ChildPassenger Safety Technicians(CPSTs) are available to inspectand demonstrate how to correctlyuse and install child restraints. Inthe U.S., refer to the NationalHighway Traffic Safety



Administration (NHTSA) website tolocate the nearest child safety seatinspection station. For CPSTavailability in Canada, check withTransport Canada or the ProvincialMinistry of Transportation office.

Securing the Child Within theChild Restraint

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the child is notproperly secured in the childrestraint. Secure the childproperly following the instructionsthat came with that child restraint.

Where to Put theRestraintAccording to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

We recommend that children andchild restraints be secured in a rearseat, including: an infant or a childriding in a rear-facing child restraint;a child riding in a forward-facingchild seat; an older child riding in abooster seat; and children, who arelarge enough, using safety belts.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great if theairbag deploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right front

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

passenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3‑24 for additionalinformation.



When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with the childrestraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

Child restraints and booster seatsvary considerably in size, and somemay fit in certain seating positionsbetter than others. Always makesure the child restraint is properlysecured.

Depending on where you place thechild restraint and the size of thechild restraint, you may not be ableto access adjacent safety beltassemblies or LATCH anchors foradditional passengers or childrestraints. Adjacent seatingpositions should not be used if thechild restraint prevents access to orinterferes with the routing of thesafety belt.

Wherever a child restraint isinstalled, be sure to secure the childrestraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle — even when no child isin it.

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System)The LATCH system secures a childrestraint during driving or in a crash.LATCH attachments on the childrestraint are used to attach the childrestraint to the anchors in thevehicle. This system is designed tomake installation of a child restrainteasier.

Make sure that a LATCH-compatiblechild restraint is properly installedusing the anchors, or use thevehicle's safety belts to secure therestraint, following the instructionsthat came with that restraint, as wellas the instructions in this manual.When installing a child restraint with

a top tether, you must also useeither the lower anchors or thesafety belts to properly secure thechild restraint. A child restraint mustnever be installed using only the toptether and anchor.

In order to use the LATCH system inthe vehicle, you need a childrestraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraintmanufacturer will provide you withinstructions on how to use the childrestraint and its attachments. Thefollowing explains how to attach achild restraint with theseattachments in the vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions orchild restraints have lower anchorsand attachments or top tetheranchors and attachments.

Some child restraints with a toptether are designed to be usedwhether the top tether is anchoredor not. Other child restraints requirethat the top tether be anchored.A national or local law may requirethat the top tether be anchored.



In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

Convertible models do not have toptether anchors to secure a childrestraint. If a national or local lawrequires that the top tether beanchored, do not use a childrestraint in this vehicle because atop tether cannot be properlyanchored.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (1) are metal barsbuilt into the vehicle. There are twolower anchors for each LATCHseating position that willaccommodate a child restraint withlower attachments (2).

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (3, 4) anchors the top ofthe child restraint to the vehicle.A top tether anchor is built into thevehicle. The top tetherattachment (2) on the child restraintconnects to the top tether anchor inthe vehicle in order to reduce theforward movement and rotation ofthe child restraint during driving or ina crash.



The child restraint may have asingle tether (3) or a dual tether (4).Either will have a singleattachment (2) to secure the toptether to the anchor.

Some child restraints that have atop tether are designed for use withor without the top tether beingattached. Others require the toptether always to be attached. InCanada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for the childrestraint.

Lower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor Locations

Rear Seat — Coupe Model

I (Top Tether Anchor): Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.

H (Lower Anchor): Seatingpositions with two lower anchors.

Rear Seat— Convertible Model

H (Lower Anchor): Seatingpositions with two lower anchors.

Lower Anchors



To assist in locating the loweranchors, each seating position withlower anchors has two labels, nearthe crease between the seatbackand the seat cushion.

Top Tether Anchors

On coupe models, the top tetheranchors are on the rear seatbackfiller panel.

To assist in locating the top tetheranchors, the top tether anchorsymbol is on the cover of theanchor.

Convertible top models do not havetop tether anchors to be used tosecure a child restraint in anyseating position.

Be sure to use an anchor on thesame side of the vehicle as theseating position where the childrestraint will be placed.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be attached, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top tethermust be attached.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition. See Where to Put theRestraint on page 3‑36 foradditional information.

Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCHSystem

{ WARNING

If a LATCH-type child restraint isnot attached to anchors, the childrestraint will not be able to protectthe child correctly. In a crash, thechild could be seriously injured orkilled. Install a LATCH-type childrestraint properly using theanchors, or use the vehicle safetybelts to secure the restraint,following the instructions thatcame with the child restraint andthe instructions in this manual.



{ WARNING

Do not attach more than one childrestraint to a single anchor.Attaching more than one childrestraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachmentto come loose or even breakduring a crash. A child or otherscould be injured. To reduce therisk of serious or fatal injuriesduring a crash, attach only onechild restraint per anchor.

{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Buckle any unused safetybelts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pullthe shoulder belt all the way out

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

of the retractor to set the lock,if the vehicle has one, after thechild restraint has been installed.

Notice: Do not let the LATCHattachments rub against thevehicle’s safety belts. This maydamage these parts. If necessary,move buckled safety belts toavoid rubbing the LATCHattachments.

Do not fold the empty rear seatwith a safety belt buckled. Thiscould damage the safety belt orthe seat. Unbuckle and return thesafety belt to its stowed position,before folding the seat.

If you need to secure more than onechild restraint in the rear seat, seeWhere to Put the Restraint onpage 3‑36.

This system is designed to makeinstallation of child restraints easier.When using lower anchors, do not

use the vehicle's safety belts.Instead, use the vehicle's anchorsand child restraint attachments tosecure the restraints. Somerestraints also use another vehicleanchor to secure the top tether.

1. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments to the loweranchors. If the child restraintdoes not have lowerattachments, secure the childrestraint with the safety beltsand top tether, if equipped. Referto the child restraintmanufacturer instructions andthe instructions in this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors forthe desired seatingposition.

1.2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

1.3. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments on the childrestraint to the loweranchors.



2. On coupe models, if the childrestraint manufacturerrecommends that the top tetherbe attached, attach and tightenthe top tether to the top tetheranchor, if equipped. Refer to thechild restraint instructions andthe following steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.

2.2. Route, attach, and tightenthe top tether according tothe child restraintinstructions and thefollowing instructions:

If the child restraint has asingle tether, route thetether over the seatback.

If the child restraint has adual tether, route the tetherover the seatback.

3. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at theLATCH path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. There should be nomore than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement, for properinstallation.

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the LATCHsystem in the vehicle. A damagedLATCH system may not properlysecure the child restraint,resulting in serious injury or evendeath in a crash. To help makesure the LATCH system isworking properly after a crash,see your dealer to have thesystem inspected and anynecessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If the vehicle has the LATCH systemand it was being used during acrash, new LATCH system partsmay be needed.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the LATCHsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.



Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat)When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with the childrestraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑37 for how andwhere to install your child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured in the vehicle using asafety belt and it uses a top tether,see Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3‑37 for top tether anchorlocations.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.


If the child restraint does not havethe LATCH system, you will beusing the safety belt to secure thechild restraint in this position. Besure to follow the instructions thatcame with the child restraint. Securethe child in the child restraint whenand as the instructions say.

If more than one child restraintneeds to be installed in the rearseat, be sure to read Where to Putthe Restraint on page 3‑36.

1. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.


Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.



4. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.

5. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 4 and 5.

6. If the child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑37.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.If the top tether is attached to a toptether anchor, disconnect it.



Securing Child Restraints(Right FrontPassenger Seat)This vehicle has airbags. A rearseat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint onpage 3‑36

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system which isdesigned to turn off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag undercertain conditions. See PassengerSensing System on page 3‑24 andPassenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 5‑16 for more information,including important safetyinformation.

A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front.” This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great if theairbag deploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3‑24 for additionalinformation.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑37 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured using a safety belt and ituses a top tether, see LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3‑37 fortop tether anchor locations.



Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.


You will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint inthis position. Follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.

1. Move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag,the off indicator on thepassenger airbag statusindicator should light and stay litwhen the vehicle is started. SeePassenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5‑16.

2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

If the seat has a safety beltguide, remove the safety beltfrom the guide by unsnappingthe guide on the seat. Do notsecure the child restraint withthe safety belt routed throughthe guide.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.


Position the release button onthe buckle, so that the safetybelt could be quickly unbuckledif necessary.



5. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.

6. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 5 and 6.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

If the airbag is off, the off indicator inthe passenger airbag statusindicator will come on and stay onwhen the vehicle is started.

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit, see “If theOn Indicator is Lit for a ChildRestraint” under Passenger SensingSystem on page 3‑24 for moreinformation.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.

If the seat has a safety belt guide,return the safety belt into the guideby snapping the guide around thewebbing.



2 NOTES


Storage 4-1

Storage

Storage CompartmentsGlove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-2

Additional Storage FeaturesTonneau Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

StorageCompartments

Glove BoxOpen the glove box by lifting up onthe lever. Use the key to lock andunlock the glove box.

Rear Storage

Rear Trunk Partition

The trunk partition keeps cargoaway from the convertible top.

The trunk partition attaches to thesides of the trunk to protect theconvertible top or can be rolled upand stored when the convertible topis up.

Fastened Position

1. Pull on the handle (1) to detachand roll out the trunk partition (2)at the front of the trunk (3).

2. Attach the trunk partition (2) intothe brackets (1).

3. Remove any objects from thetop of the trunk partition (2).


4-2 Storage

Stored Position

1. Pull the handle (3) toward therear of the trunk while pulling upto release the trunk partition (2)from the brackets (1).

2. Hold the handle (3) and slowlylet the trunk partition (2) roll uptoward the front of the trunk (4).

3. Attach the handle (1) to therolled-up trunk partition (2) at thefront of the trunk (3).

See Convertible Top Messages onpage 5‑34.

Center Console StorageTo open, lift the latch on the frontedge of the armrest.

There is an accessory power outletand an optional USB/audio jack inthe storage area. See Power Outletson page 5‑5 and Auxiliary Deviceson page 7‑15.

Additional StorageFeatures

Tonneau Cover

Installation

1. Remove the tonneau coverstorage bag from the trunk andremove the tonneau cover.

2. Unfold and place the tonneaucover on the vehicle.


Storage 4-3

3. Fold the sides of the tonneaucover over. Attach the cord (1) atthe front edge of the tonneaucover to the post (2) on the backseat rear panel on both sides.

4. Insert the tab (1) under thetrim (2) on both sides.

5. Push the outside rim (1) of thetonneau cover under the vehicletrim (2) on both sides.


4-4 Storage

6. Push the edge (2) of the centerof the tonneau cover (1) underthe vehicle trim (3).

Removal

1. Grip the tonneau cover at thenotch and pull back to releasethe tab on both sides.

2. Fold the sides of the tonneaucover over and remove thecord (1) from the post (2) on theback seat rear panel on bothsides.

3. Fold the tonneau cover, place itin the storage bag, and store it inthe trunk.


Storage 4-5

Convenience NetFor vehicles with a convenience netinside the trunk, it can be used tosecure loose items.

The upper (1) and lower (3) hookson each side of the trunk openingare provided to attach the net.

Install the opening of the net at thetop and over the two middlehooks (2).


4-6 Storage

2 NOTES


Instruments and Controls 5-1

Instruments andControls

ControlsSteering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-3Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Boost Gauge (ZL1 Only) . . . . . 5-10Engine Oil PressureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Engine Oil TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Transmission TemperatureGauge (Except ZL1) . . . . . . . . 5-13

Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-15Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-15Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-17MalfunctionIndicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Brake System WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . 5-22

Traction Control System(TCS) OFF/StabiliTrak® OFFLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-23Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-23Immobilizer Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-24Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 5-24Taillamp Indicator Light . . . . . . 5-24Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-24

Information DisplaysDriver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25

Head-Up Display (HUD) . . . . . 5-28

Vehicle MessagesVehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33Battery Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33

Brake System Messages . . . . 5-34Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-34Convertible Top Messages . . . 5-34Cruise Control Messages . . . . 5-35Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-35Engine Cooling SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35

Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-36Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-36Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-37Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-37Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37Object Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38

Ride Control SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38

Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-41Security Messages . . . . . . . . . . 5-41Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-41Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41


5-2 Instruments and Controls

Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-42Vehicle ReminderMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42

Vehicle Speed Messages . . . . 5-42Window Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43

Vehicle PersonalizationVehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-43

Universal Remote SystemUniversal Remote System . . . 5-46Universal Remote SystemProgramming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46

Universal Remote SystemOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49

Controls

Steering WheelAdjustment

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel upor down.

3. Pull or push the steering wheelcloser or away from you.

4. Pull the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.


Some audio controls can beadjusted at the steering wheel.



b / g (Push to Talk): For vehicleswith Bluetooth® or OnStar®, press tointeract with those systems. SeeBluetooth (Voice Recognition) onpage 7‑25 or Bluetooth(Infotainment Controls) onpage 7‑22 or Bluetooth (Overview)on page 7‑20 or OnStar Overviewon page 14‑1.

$ /i (Mute/End Call): Press toreject an incoming call, or end acurrent call. Press to silence thevehicle speakers while using theinfotainment system. Press again toturn the sound on.

_ SRC ^ (Toggle Switch): Press toselect an audio source.

Turn up or down to select the nextor previous favorite radio station orCD, or MP3 track.

+ x − (Volume): Press + or − toincrease or decrease the volume.

Horn

Pressa on the steering wheel padto sound the horn.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper/washer leveris on the right side of the steeringcolumn. With the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, movethe windshield wiper lever to selectthe wiper speed.

HI: Use for fast wipes.

LO: Use for slow wipes.

INT: (Intermittent Wipes): Movethe lever up to INT for intermittentwipes, then turn thex INT bandup for more frequent wipes or downfor less frequent wipes.

OFF: Use to turn the wipers off.

8 (Mist): For a single wipe, brieflymove the wiper lever down. Forseveral wipes, hold the wiperlever down.

Clear snow and ice from the wiperblades and windshield before usingthem. If frozen to the windshield,carefully loosen or thaw them.Damaged blades should bereplaced. See Wiper BladeReplacement on page 10‑35.

Heavy snow or ice can overload thewiper motor.



Wiper Parking

If the ignition is turned to LOCK/OFF while the wipers are on LO, HI,or INT, they will immediately stop.

If the windshield wiper lever is thenmoved to off before the driver dooris opened or within 10 minutes, thewipers will restart and move to thebase of the windshield.

If the ignition is turned to LOCK/OFF while the wipers are performingwipes due to windshield washing,the wipers continue to run until theyreach the base of the windshield.

nL (Windshield Washer): Pullthe windshield wiper lever towardyou to spray windshield washer fluidand activate the wipers. The wiperswill continue until the lever isreleased or the maximum wash timeis reached. When the windshieldwiper lever is released, additionalwipes may occur depending on howlong the windshield washer hadbeen activated.

See Washer Fluid on page 10‑30 forinformation on filling the windshieldwasher fluid reservoir.

{ WARNING

In freezing weather, do not usethe washer until the windshield iswarmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.

CompassThe vehicle may have a compassdisplay on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). The compass receivesits heading and other informationfrom the Global PositioningSystem (GPS) antenna, StabiliTrak,and vehicle speed information.

Avoid covering the GPS antenna forlong periods of time with objectsthat may interfere with the antenna'sability to receive a satellite signal.See Backglass Antenna onpage 7‑12 and Satellite RadioAntenna on page 7‑13 for the

location of the vehicle's antennas.The compass system is designed tooperate for a certain number ofmiles or degrees of turn beforeneeding a signal from the GPSsatellites. When the compassdisplay shows CAL, drive thevehicle for a short distance in anopen area where it can receive aGPS signal. The compass systemwill automatically determine whenthe GPS signal is restored andprovide a heading again. SeeCompass Messages on page 5‑34for more information on themessages that may be displayed forthe compass.

ClockThe infotainment system controlsare used to access the time anddate settings through the menusystem. The clock menu can onlybe used with the radio on while inON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY.



Setting the Time and Date



3. Select Set Time or Set Date.

4. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob toadjust the highlighted value.

5. Press the MENU/SELECT knobto select the next value.

6. To save the time or date andreturn to the Time and DateSettings menu, press the /BACK button at any time orpress the MENU/SELECT knobafter adjusting the minutesor year.

Setting the 12/24 Hour Format



3. Highlight 12/24 Hour Format.

4. Press the MENU/SELECT knobto select the 12 hour or 24 hourdisplay format.

Setting the Month & DayFormat



3. Highlight Month & Day Format.

4. Press the MENU/SELECT knobto select MM/DD (month/day) orDD/MM (day/month).

Power OutletsThe vehicle has two accessorypower outlets; one is below theclimate control system and the otheris inside the center console storage.They can be used to plug inelectrical equipment, such as a cellphone or an MP3 player.

The accessory power outlets do notwork when the key is removed fromthe ignition and the driver door isopened. This helps to preserve thebattery life of the vehicle.

Certain power accessory plugs maynot be compatible with theaccessory power outlet and couldoverload vehicle and adapter fuses.If a problem is experienced, seeyour dealer.

When adding electrical equipment,be sure to follow the properinstallation instructions included withthe equipment. See Add-OnElectrical Equipment on page 9‑59.

Notice: Hanging heavyequipment from the power outletcan cause damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty. Thepower outlets are designed foraccessory power plugs only, suchas cell phone charge cords.



Warning Lights,Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning lights and gauges cansignal that something is wrongbefore it becomes serious enoughto cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to thewarning lights and gauges couldprevent injury.

Warning lights come on when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Some warning lights comeon briefly when the engine is startedto indicate they are working.

Gauges can indicate when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Often gauges and warninglights work together to indicate aproblem with the vehicle.

When one of the warning lightscomes on and stays on whiledriving, or when one of the gaugesshows there may be a problem,check the section that explains whatto do. Follow this manual's advice.Waiting to do repairs can be costlyand even dangerous.



Instrument Cluster

V8 English Shown, V6, Metric, and Manual Transmission Similar



ZL1 English Shown, Metric and Manual Transmission Similar



SpeedometerThe speedometer shows thevehicle's speed in either kilometersper hour (km/h) or miles perhour (mph).

OdometerThe odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven, in eitherkilometers or miles.

This vehicle has a tamper-resistantodometer. If the vehicle needs anew odometer installed, the newone is set to the mileage of the oldodometer. If this is not possible, it isset at zero and a label is put on thedriver door to show the old mileagereading.

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer can show how farthe vehicle has been driven sincethe trip odometer was last reset.

The trip odometer is accessed andreset through the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑25.

TachometerThe tachometer displays the enginespeed in revolutions perminute (rpm).

Fuel Gauge

Metric

English



When the ignition is on, the fuelgauge shows about how much fuelthe vehicle has left in the fuel tank.

An arrow on the fuel gauge showsthe side of the vehicle on which thefuel door is located.

The gauge indicates empty beforethe vehicle is out of fuel, to showthat the vehicle's fuel tank should befilled soon.

When the fuel tank is low on fuel, aFUEL LEVEL LOW message willappear on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). For more informationsee Fuel System Messages onpage 5‑37.

Here are some situations that canoccur with the fuel gauge. None ofthese indicate a problem with thefuel gauge.. At the gas station, the fuel pump

shuts off before the gaugereads full.

. It takes a little more or less fuelto fill up than the fuel gaugeindicated. For example, thegauge may have indicated thetank was half full, but it actuallytook a little more or less thanhalf the tank's capacity to fillthe tank.

. The pointer on the fuel gauge ison empty when the ignition is off.

Boost Gauge (ZL1 Only)

Metric

English



This gauge, near the shift lever,indicates vacuum during light tomoderate throttle and boost underheavier throttle.

It displays the air pressure level inthe intake manifold before it entersthe engine's combustion chamber.

The gauge is automatically centeredat zero every time the engine isstarted. Actual vacuum or boost isdisplayed from this zero point.Changes in ambient pressure, suchas driving in mountains andchanging weather, will slightlychange the zero reading.

Engine Oil PressureGauge

Metric

English

For vehicles with the oil pressuregauge, it is near the shift lever, andshows the engine oil pressure

in kPa (kilopascals) or psi (poundsper square inch) when the engine isrunning.

Oil pressure may vary with enginespeed, outside temperature, and oilviscosity, but readings above thelow pressure zone indicate thenormal operating range. When theoil pressure reaches the lowpressure zone, a message appearsin the Driver Information Center(DIC). See Engine Oil Messages onpage 5‑36 and Engine Oil onpage 10‑13 for more information.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. Driving with the engineoil low can also damage theengine. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Check the oil level as soon aspossible. Add oil if required, butif the oil level is within theoperating range and the oilpressure is still low, have thevehicle serviced. Always followthe maintenance schedule forchanging engine oil.



A reading in the low pressure zonecan be caused by a dangerouslylow oil level or some other problemcausing low oil pressure. Check theoil as soon as possible.

Engine Oil TemperatureGauge

Metric

English

For vehicles with this gauge, it isnear the shift lever and indicatesengine oil temperature. If the gaugepointed moves to the higher end ofthe gauge, the engine oiltemperature is operating hotter thannormal. It is acceptable if thishappens during aggressive drivingor racetrack usage. The DIC willdisplay a warning message if theengine oil temperature exceeds anacceptable level. See Engine OilMessages on page 5‑36 in DIC.



Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge

Metric

English

This gauge indicates the enginecoolant temperature. If the gaugepointer moved to the H or theshaded area, the engine coolant isoperating hotter than normal. It isacceptable if this happens duringaggressive driving or racetrackusage. The DIC will display awarning message if the enginecoolant temperature exceeds anacceptable level. See EngineCooling System Messages onpage 5‑35 in DIC.

TransmissionTemperature Gauge(Except ZL1)

Metric

English

For vehicles with this gauge, it isnear the shift lever, and shows thetransmission oil temperature whenthe ignition is on. If the gauge is



reading in the red area and/or amessage appears in the DriverInformation Center (DIC), thevehicle must be stopped and thecause checked. One possible causeis a low fluid level in thetransmission.

For information on the DICmessages see TransmissionMessages on page 5‑42.

Notice: If the vehicle is drivenwith the transmissiontemperature gauge above thenormal operating range, thetransmission can be damaged.This could lead to costly repairsthat would not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Do not drive thevehicle while the transmissiontemperature gauge reading isabove normal. See your dealer forservice.

Voltmeter Gauge

Metric

English

For vehicles with this gauge, it isnear the shift lever, and shows thebattery's state of charge in DC volts.

When the engine is running, and theignition is on, this gauge shows thecondition of the charging system.

The vehicle's charging systemregulates voltage based on the stateof charge of the battery. It is normalfor the voltmeter to fluctuate.Readings between the low and highwarning zones indicate the normaloperating range.

Readings in the low warning zonecan occur when a large number ofelectrical accessories are operatingin the vehicle and the engine is leftidling for an extended period.

If there is a problem with the batterycharging system, a messageappears in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) and/or the chargingsystem light comes on. See BatteryVoltage and Charging Messages onpage 5‑33 and Charging SystemLight on page 5‑17 for moreinformation.

However, readings in either warningzone can indicate a possibleproblem in the electrical system.Have the vehicle serviced as soonas possible.



Safety Belt Reminders

Driver Safety Belt ReminderLight

There is a driver safety beltreminder light on the instrumentcluster.

When the vehicle is started, thislight flashes and a chime may comeon to remind the driver to fastentheir safety belt. Then the light stayson solid until the belt is buckled.This cycle may continue severaltimes if the driver remains orbecomes unbuckled while thevehicle is moving.

If the driver safety belt is buckled,neither the chime nor the lightcomes on.

Passenger Safety BeltReminder Light

There is a passenger safety beltreminder light near the passengerairbag status indicator. SeePassenger Sensing System onpage 3‑24.

When the vehicle is started, thislight flashes and a chime may comeon to remind passengers to fastentheir safety belt. Then the light stayson solid until the belt is buckled.This cycle continues several times ifthe passenger remains or becomesunbuckled while the vehicle ismoving.

If the passenger safety belt isbuckled, neither the chime nor thelight comes on.

The front passenger safety beltwarning light and chime may turn onif an object is put on the seat suchas a briefcase, handbag, grocerybag, laptop, or other electronicdevice. To turn off the warning lightand/or chime, remove the objectfrom the seat or buckle thesafety belt.

Airbag Readiness LightThis light shows if there is anelectrical problem with the airbagsystem. The system check includesthe airbag sensor(s), passengersensing system, the pretensioners,the airbag modules, the wiring, andthe crash sensing and diagnosticmodule. For more information on theairbag system, see Airbag Systemon page 3‑16.



The airbag readiness light comes onfor several seconds when thevehicle is started. If the light doesnot come on then, have it fixedimmediately.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it meansthe airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags inthe vehicle might not inflate in acrash, or they could even inflatewithout a crash. To help avoidinjury, have the vehicle servicedright away.

If there is a problem with the airbagsystem, a Driver Information Center(DIC) message may also come on.See Airbag System Messages onpage 5‑41.

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicatorThe vehicle has a passengersensing system. See PassengerSensing System on page 3‑24 forimportant safety information. Theoverhead console has a passengerairbag status indicator.

United States

Canada and Mexico

When the vehicle is started, thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light ON and OFF, or the symbolfor on and off, for several secondsas a system check. If you are usingremote start, if equipped, to startyour vehicle from a distance, youmay not see the system check.Then, after several seconds, thestatus indicator will light either ONor OFF, or either the on or off



symbol, to let you know the status ofthe right front passenger frontalairbag.

If the word ON or the on symbol islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that the rightfront passenger frontal airbag isenabled (may inflate).

If the word OFF or the off symbol islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that thepassenger sensing system hasturned off the right front passengerfrontal airbag.

If, after several seconds, both statusindicator lights remain on, or if thereare no lights at all, there may be aproblem with the lights or thepassenger sensing system. Seeyour dealer for service.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑15 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

Charging System Light

The charging system light comes onbriefly when the ignition is turnedon, but the engine is not running, as

a check to show the light is working.It should go out when the engine isstarted.

If the light stays on, or comes onwhile driving, there may be aproblem with the electrical chargingsystem. Have it checked by yourdealer. Driving while this light is oncould drain the battery.

When this light comes on, the DriverInformation Center (DIC) alsodisplays a message.

See Battery Voltage and ChargingMessages on page 5‑33.

If a short distance must be drivenwith the light on, be sure to turn offall accessories, such as the radioand air conditioner.

MalfunctionIndicator LampA computer system called OBD II(On-Board Diagnostics-SecondGeneration) monitors the operationof the vehicle to ensure emissionsare at acceptable levels, helping to



maintain a clean environment. Themalfunction indicator lamp comeson when the vehicle is placed inON/RUN, as a check to show it isworking. If it does not, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer. SeeIgnition Positions on page 9‑17 formore information.

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on while the engine isrunning, this indicates that the OBDII system has detected a problemand diagnosis and service might berequired.

Malfunctions often are indicated bythe system before any problem isapparent. Being aware of the lightcan prevent more serious damageto the vehicle. This system also

assists the service technician incorrectly diagnosing anymalfunction.

Notice: If the vehicle iscontinually driven with this lighton, the emission controls mightnot work as well, the vehicle fueleconomy might not be as good,and the engine might not run assmoothly. This could lead tocostly repairs that might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Notice: Modifications made to theengine, transmission, exhaust,intake, or fuel system of thevehicle or the replacement of theoriginal tires with other thanthose of the same TirePerformance Criteria (TPC) canaffect the vehicle's emissioncontrols and can cause this lightto come on. Modifications tothese systems could lead tocostly repairs not covered by thevehicle warranty. This could alsoresult in a failure to pass arequired Emission Inspection/

Maintenance test. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10‑3.

This light comes on during amalfunction in one of two ways:

Light Flashing: A misfire conditionhas been detected. A misfireincreases vehicle emissions andcould damage the emission controlsystem on the vehicle. Diagnosisand service might be required.

To prevent more serious damage tothe vehicle:. Reduce vehicle speed.. Avoid hard accelerations.. Avoid steep uphill grades.

If the light continues to flash, find asafe place to stop and park thevehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait atleast 10 seconds, and restart theengine. If the light is still flashing,follow the previous steps and seeyour dealer for service as soon aspossible.



Light On Steady: An emissioncontrol system malfunction hasbeen detected on the vehicle.Diagnosis and service might berequired.

The following may correct anemission control systemmalfunction:. Check that the fuel cap is fully

installed. See Filling the Tank onpage 9‑52. The diagnosticsystem can determine if the fuelcap has been left off orimproperly installed. A loose ormissing fuel cap allows fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere.A few driving trips with the capproperly installed should turn thelight off.

. Check that good quality fuel isused. Poor fuel quality causesthe engine not to run asefficiently as designed and maycause stalling after start-up,stalling when the vehicle ischanged into gear, misfiring,hesitation on acceleration,

or stumbling on acceleration.These conditions might go awayonce the engine is warmed up.

If one or more of these conditionsoccurs, change the fuel brand used.It may require at least one full tankof the proper fuel to turn the light off.

See Recommended Fuel onpage 9‑49.

If none of the above have made thelight turn off, your dealer can checkthe vehicle. The dealer has theproper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix anymechanical or electrical problemsthat might have developed.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance Programs

Depending on where you live, yourvehicle may be required toparticipate in an emission controlsystem inspection and maintenanceprogram. For the inspection, theemission system test equipment willlikely connect to the vehicle's DataLink Connector (DLC).

The DLC is under the instrumentpanel to the left of the steeringwheel. See your dealer if assistanceis needed.

The vehicle may not passinspection if:. The malfunction indicator lamp is

on with the engine running, or ifthe light does not come on whenthe ignition is turned to ON/RUNwhile the engine is off.

. The OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics) system determinesthat critical emission controlsystems have not beencompletely diagnosed. Thevehicle would be considered notready for inspection. This canhappen if the 12-volt battery hasrecently been replaced or rundown. The diagnostic system is



designed to evaluate criticalemission control systems duringnormal driving. This can takeseveral days of routine driving.If this has been done and thevehicle still does not pass theinspection for lack of OBD IIsystem readiness, your dealercan prepare the vehicle forinspection.

Brake System WarningLightThe vehicle brake system consistsof two hydraulic circuits. If onecircuit is not working, the remainingcircuit can still work to stop thevehicle. For normal brakingperformance, both circuits need tobe working

If the warning light comes on, thereis a brake problem. Have the brakesystem inspected right away.

Metric English

If the vehicle has antilock brakes,this light should come on when thekey is turned to START. If it doesnot come on, have it fixed so it willbe ready to warn if there is aproblem.

When the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light also comes onwhen the parking brake is set. Thelight stays on if the parking brakedoes not fully release. If it stays onafter the parking brake is fullyreleased, it means the vehicle has abrake problem.

If, while driving, the light comes onand a brake message comes on theDriver Information Center (DIC), pulloff the road and stop carefully. Thepedal could be harder to push or thepedal can go closer to the floor.

It could take longer to stop. If thelight is still on, have the vehicletowed for service. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Lighton page 5‑21 and Towing theVehicle on page 10‑88.

{ WARNING

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on.Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to acrash. If the light is still on afterthe vehicle has been pulled offthe road and carefully stopped,have the vehicle towed forservice.

The brake message remains on untilthe MENU button is pressed. Thebrake light remains until the problemis fixed. See Brake SystemMessages on page 5‑34 for moreinformation.



Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

This light comes on briefly when theengine is started.

If the light does not come on, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn ifthere is a problem.

If the ABS light stays on, turn theignition off.

If the light comes on while driving,stop as soon as it is safely possibleand turn off the vehicle. Then startthe engine again to reset thesystem. If the ABS light stays on,or comes on again while driving, thevehicle needs service. A chime mayalso sound when the light comes onsteady.

If the ABS light is the only light on,the vehicle has regular brakes, butthe antilock brakes are notfunctioning.

If both the ABS and the brakesystem warning light are on, thevehicle's antilock brakes are notfunctioning and there is a problemwith the regular brakes. See yourdealer for service.

See Brake System Warning Light onpage 5‑20 and Brake SystemMessages on page 5‑34.

Traction Off Light

This light should come on briefly asthe engine is started. If it does notcome on, have the vehicle servicedby your dealer.

This light comes on when theTraction Control System (TCS) hasbeen turned off by pressing andreleasing the TCS/StabiliTrakbutton.

This light also comes on and thesystem turns off if there is a problemwith the TCS.

If the light comes on and stays onfor an extended period of time whilethe system is turned on, the vehicleneeds service.

See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9‑37 and StabiliTrak®

System on page 9‑38.



Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light

The StabiliTrak system or theTraction Control System (TCS)indicator/warning light comes onbriefly while starting the engine.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If thesystem is working normally, theindicator light will then go off.

The indicator/warning light flasheswhile the StabiliTrak or TCS systemis working to control the vehicle ona low traction surface.

If the TCS indicator/warning lightcomes on and stays on whiledriving, the vehicle needs service.

See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9‑37 and StabiliTrak®

System on page 9‑38 for moreinformation.

Traction Control System(TCS) OFF/StabiliTrak®

OFF Light

This light should come on briefly asthe engine is started. If it does notcome on, have the vehicle servicedby your dealer.

This light comes on when theStabiliTrak system is turned off.If the TCS is off, wheel spin is notlimited. If the StabiliTrak system isoff, the system does not assist incontrolling the vehicle. Turn on theTCS and the StabiliTrak system andthe warning light turns off.

For SS models, when both TCS andStabiliTrak lights are on, the vehicleis in Competitive Mode. A warningalso appears in the DIC forStabiliTrak Competitive Mode. SeeRide Control System Messages onpage 5‑38.

For ZL1, when both TCS andStabiliTrak lights are on, the vehicleis in Performance TractionManagement or both TCS andStabiliTrak systems are disabled.

See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9‑37, StabiliTrak® Systemon page 9‑38 and CompetitiveDriving Mode on page 9‑39.



Tire Pressure Light

For vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), this lightcomes on briefly when the engine isstarted. It provides informationabout tire pressures and the TPMS.

When the Light Is On Steady

This indicates that one or more ofthe tires are significantlyunderinflated.

A Driver Information Center (DIC)tire pressure message may alsodisplay. See Tire Messages onpage 5‑41. Stop as soon aspossible, and inflate the tires to thepressure value shown on the Tireand Loading Information label. SeeTire Pressure on page 10‑56.

When the Light Flashes First andThen Is On Steady

If the light flashes for about a minuteand then stays on, there may be aproblem with the TPMS. If theproblem is not corrected, the lightwill come on at every ignition cycle.See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10‑59.

Engine Oil Pressure LightNotice: Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. Driving with the engineoil low can also damage theengine. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Check the oil level as soon aspossible. Add oil if required, butif the oil level is within theoperating range and the oilpressure light remains lit, havethe vehicle serviced. Alwaysfollow the maintenance schedulefor changing engine oil.

The oil pressure light should comeon briefly as the engine is started.If it does not come on, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.

If the light comes on and stays on, itmeans that oil is not flowing throughthe engine properly. The vehiclecould be low on oil and might havesome other system problem. Seeyour dealer.



Immobilizer Light

The immobilizer light should comeon briefly as the engine is started.If it does not come on, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.If the system is working normally,the indicator light turns off.

If the light stays on and the enginedoes not start, there could be aproblem with the immobilizersystem. See Immobilizer Operationon page 2‑11.

High-Beam On Light

This light comes on when thehigh-beam headlamps are in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger on page 6‑2.

Front Fog Lamp Light

The front fog lamp light comes onwhen the fog lamps are in use.

The light goes out when the foglamps are turned off. See Front FogLamps on page 6‑5.

Taillamp Indicator Light

This light comes on when thetaillamps are in use.

Cruise Control Light

The cruise control light is whitewhen the cruise control is on andready, and turns green when thecruise control is set and active.

The light goes out when the cruisecontrol is turned off. See CruiseControl on page 9‑44.



Information Displays

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The DIC displays information aboutyour vehicle. It also displayswarning messages if a systemproblem is detected. See VehicleMessages on page 5‑33. Allmessages appear in the DIC displayin the center of the instrumentcluster.

The vehicle may also have featuresthat can be customized through thecontrols on the radio. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑43.

DIC Operation and Displays

The DIC has different displayswhich can be accessed by using theDIC buttons on the turn signal leveron the left side of the steeringwheel. The DIC displays trip, fuel,vehicle system information, andwarning messages if a systemproblem is detected.

The bottom of the DIC displayshows what position the shift leveris in (Automatic Transmission Only),the odometer, and the direction thevehicle is driving.

DIC Buttons

1. SET/CLR: Use this button to setor clear the menu item when it isdisplayed.

2. w /x (Thumbwheel): Use thethumbwheel to scroll through theitems in each menu.

3. Menu: Press this button to get tothe Trip/Fuel Menu and theVehicle Information Menu. Somemodels may also have aPerformance Menu.

Trip/Fuel Menu Items

Press the MENU button on the turnsignal lever until Trip/FuelInformation Menu is displayed. Usethe thumbwheel to scroll through thefollowing menu items:. Digital Speedometer. Trip 1. Trip 2. Fuel Range. Average Fuel Economy. Average Vehicle Speed. Turn-by-Turn. Blank

Digital Speedometer

The speedometer shows how fastthe vehicle is moving in eitherkilometers per hour (km/h) or milesper hour (mph). The speedometercannot be reset.



Trip 1 and Trip 2

The Trip display shows the currentdistance traveled, in eitherkilometers (km) or miles (mi), sincethe last reset for the trip odometer.The trip odometer can be reset tozero by pressing the trip reset stemor the SET/CLR button while the tripodometer display is showing.

Fuel Range

The Fuel Range display shows theapproximate distance the vehiclecan be driven without refueling. Thefuel range estimate is based on anaverage of the vehicle's fueleconomy over recent driving historyand the amount of fuel remaining inthe fuel tank. Fuel range cannot bereset.

Average Fuel Economy

The Average Fuel Economy displayshows the approximate averageliters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km)or miles per gallon (mpg). Thisnumber is calculated based on thenumber of L/100 km (mpg) recorded

since the last time this menu itemwas reset. The fuel economy can bereset by pressing the SET/CLRbutton while the Average FuelEconomy display is showing.

Average Vehicle Speed

The Average Vehicle Speed displayshows the average speed of thevehicle in kilometers per hour (km/h)or miles per hour (mph). Thisaverage is calculated based on thevarious vehicle speeds recordedsince the last reset of this value.The average speed can be reset bypressing the SET/CLR button whilethe Average Vehicle Speed displayis showing.

Turn-by-Turn

This display is used for the OnStarTurn-by-Turn guidance. See OnStarOverview on page 14‑1.

Blank Display

This display shows no information.

Vehicle Information MenuItems

Press the MENU button on the turnsignal lever until Vehicle InformationMenu is displayed. Use thethumbwheel to scroll through thefollowing menu items:. Unit. Tire Pressure. Remaining Oil Life. Coolant Temp. Battery Voltage. Speed Warning

Unit

Move the thumbwheel up or down toswitch between US or Metric whenthe Unit display is active. PressSET/CLR to confirm the setting.This will change the displays on thecluster and DIC to either English(US) or metric measurements.



Tire Pressure

The display will show a vehicle withthe approximate pressures of allfour tires. Tire pressure is displayedin either kilopascal (kPa) or inpounds per square inch (psi). SeeTire Pressure Monitor System onpage 10‑58 and Tire PressureMonitor Operation on page 10‑59.

Remaining Oil Life

This display shows an estimate ofthe oil's remaining useful life.If REMAINING OIL LIFE 99% isdisplayed, that means 99% of thecurrent oil life remains.

When the remaining oil life is low,the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will appear on the display.See Engine Oil Messages onpage 5‑36. The oil should bechanged as soon as possible. SeeEngine Oil on page 10‑13. Inaddition to the engine oil life systemmonitoring the oil life, additionalmaintenance is recommended in the

Maintenance Schedule. SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11‑2.

Remember, the Oil Life display mustbe reset after each oil change. It willnot reset itself. Also, be careful notto reset the Oil Life displayaccidentally at any time other thanwhen the oil has just been changed.It cannot be reset accurately untilthe next oil change. To reset theengine oil life system press theSET/CLR button while the Oil Lifedisplay is active. See Engine OilLife System on page 10‑15.

Coolant Temperature

This display, available on somevehicles, shows the temperature ofthe engine cooling system fluid ineither degrees Celsius (°C) ordegrees Fahrenheit (°F).

Battery Voltage

This display, available on somevehicles, shows the current batteryvoltage. If the voltage is in thenormal range, the value will display.

For example, the display may readBattery Voltage 15.0 Volts. Thevehicle's charging system regulatesvoltage based on the state of thebattery. The battery voltage canfluctuate while viewing thisinformation on the DIC. This isnormal. See Charging System Lighton page 5‑17. If there is a problemwith the battery charging system,the DIC will display a message. SeeBattery Voltage and ChargingMessages on page 5‑33.

Speed Warning

Speed Warning allows the driver toset a speed that they do not want toexceed. To set the Speed Warning,press SET/CLR when SpeedWarning is displayed.



Performance Menu

Some vehicles may have aperformance menu. Press theMENU button on the turn signallever until Performance Menu isdisplayed. Use the thumbwheel toscroll through the following menuitems:. Lap Timer. Coolant Temperature and

Battery Voltage

Lap Timer

The Lap Timer display shows totaltime, lap times, top speed, averagespeed, and average time whenactive.

While in this display, press SET/CLR to activate the lap timerfunction. While timer is active, pressMENU to store the current lap timeand start timer for new lap. PressSET/CLR to pause or resume laptimer. Press and hold SET/CLR toclear and exit the lap timer function.

Coolant Temperature and BatteryVoltage

The coolant temperature displayshows the temperature of theengine cooling system fluid in eitherdegrees Celsius (°C) or degreesFahrenheit (°F).

The battery voltage display showsthe current battery voltage. Thevehicle's charging system regulatesvoltage based on the state of thebattery. The battery voltage canfluctuate while viewing thisinformation on the DIC. This isnormal. See Charging System Lighton page 5‑17. If there is a problemwith the battery charging system,the DIC will display a message. SeeBattery Voltage and ChargingMessages on page 5‑33.

Compass

The vehicle may have a compassdisplay in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See Compass onpage 5‑4.

Head-Up Display (HUD)

{ WARNING

If the HUD image is too bright ortoo high in your field of view, itmay take you more time to seethings you need to see when it isdark outside. Be sure to keep theHUD image dim and placed low inyour field of view.

For vehicles with the Head-UpDisplay (HUD), some informationconcerning the operation of thevehicle is projected onto thewindshield. This includes but is notlimited to the speedometer reading,rpm reading, transmission position,outside air temperature, compassheading, and a brief display of thecurrent radio station, including XMinformation or CD track. It will alsodisplay turn-by-turn information ifthe vehicle has OnStar® service.



The images are projected throughthe HUD lens on the driver side ofthe instrument panel.

Notice: If you try to use the HUDimage as a parking aid, you maymisjudge the distance anddamage your vehicle. Do not usethe HUD image as a parking aid.

The tap shift gear will also appearon the HUD if the vehicle has tapshift and it is active. The shift timinglights and a lateral acceleration(G-Force) indicator appear onZL1 models only.

The HUD information can bedisplayed in one of three languages:English, French, or Spanish. Thespeedometer reading and othernumerical values can be displayedin either English or metric units.

The language selection is changedthrough the radio and the units ofmeasurement selection is changedthrough the trip computer in theDriver Information Center (DIC).

See AM-FM Radio on page 7‑7 andDriver Information Center (DIC) onpage 5‑25.

HUD Display on the VehicleWindshield

The HUD information appears as animage focused out toward the frontof the vehicle.

When the ignition key is turned toON/RUN, the HUD will display anintroductory message for a shorttime, until the HUD is ready.

The following indicator lights comeon in the instrument cluster whenactivated and may also appear onthe HUD:. Turn Signal Indicators. High-Beam Indicator Symbol

The HUD temporarily displays ICEPOSSIBLE DRIVE WITH CAREwhen this message is on the DICtrip computer.

The HUD also temporarily displaysthe following messages on vehicleswith these systems, when they areactive:. Check Tire Pressure. Cruise Set To. Low Fuel. Speed Limited To. Traction Control Active. Stability Control Active

When the HUD is on, thespeedometer reading is continuallydisplayed. The current radio stationor CD track number may display for



a short period of time after the radioor CD track status changes. Thismay happen whenever radioinformation is changed. Thespeedometer size is reduced whenradio, CD information, or warningsare displayed on the HUD.

When the phone feature isactivated, the HUD will brieflydisplay phone information,if available.

The HUD control is to the right ofthe steering wheel.

To adjust the HUD image so thatitems are properly displayed:

1. Adjust the driver seat to acomfortable position.


3. Adjust the HUD controls.

Use the following settings to adjustthe HUD.

OFF: Turn the HUD dimming knobfully counterclockwise until the HUDdisplay turns off.

Brightness: Turn the dimming knobclockwise or counterclockwise tobrighten or dim the display.

« (Up): orª (Down): Press theup or down arrows to center theHUD image in your view. The HUDimage can only be adjusted up anddown, not side to side.

PAGE: Press to select the displayformats. Release the PAGE buttonwhen the format number with thedesired display is shown on the

HUD. If vehicle messages aredisplayed, pressing PAGE may clearthe message.

The four formats are as follows:

English

Metric

Format One: This display gives thespeedometer reading (in English ormetric units), turn signal indication,high-beam indication, transmissionpositions (for automatictransmission vehicles only), outsideair temperature, and compassheading.



English

Metric

Format Two: This display includesthe information in Format Onewithout the transmissioninformation, the outside airtemperature, and compass heading.

English

Metric

Format Three: This displayincludes the information in FormatOne along with a circulartachometer, but without outside airtemperature and compass heading.

English

Metric

Format Four: This display appearson ZL1 models only. It gives thespeedometer reading (in English ormetric units), transmission positions(for automatic transmission vehiclesonly), Shift Timing Light Positionand lateral acceleration (G)indicators. The radio, CD,navigation, and phone informationdo not appear in the format fourHUD display.



The shift timing lights at the top ofthe display will appear with increasein engine RPM. See AutomaticTransmission on page 9‑26 orManual Transmission on page 9‑32for more information.

All formats except format four, willshow turn-by-turn navigationinformation and provide detailsabout the next driving maneuver tobe made.

English

Metric

When you near your destination, theHUD will display a distance bar thatwill empty the closer you get to yourdestination. All navigationinformation is provided to the HUDby the OnStar® service, for vehicleswith this feature.

The HUD image displayed on thewindshield will automatically dimand brighten to compensate foroutside lighting. However, the HUDbrightness control can still beadjusted as needed.

The HUD image can temporarilylight up depending on the angle andposition of the sunlight on the HUDdisplay. This is normal and willchange when the angle of thesunlight on the HUD displaychanges.

Polarized sunglasses could makethe HUD image harder to see.

Care of the HUD

Clean the inside of the windshieldas needed to remove any dirt or filmthat could reduce the sharpness orclarity of the HUD image.

To clean the HUD lens, use a soft,clean cloth that has household glasscleaner sprayed on it. Wipe theHUD lens gently, then dry it. Do notspray cleaner directly on the lensbecause the cleaner could leak intothe unit.

If You Cannot See the HUDImage When the Ignition Is On. Is anything covering the

HUD lens?



. Is the HUD dimmer setting brightenough?

. Is the HUD image adjusted tothe proper height?

. Are you wearing polarizedsunglasses?

If the HUD Image Is Not Clear. Is the HUD image too bright?. Are the windshield and HUD

lens clean?

If the HUD image is not correct,contact your dealer.

Keep in mind that the windshield ispart of the HUD system.

Vehicle MessagesMessages displayed on the DICindicate the status of the vehicle orsome action that may be needed tocorrect a condition. Multiplemessages may display one after theother.

The messages that do not requireimmediate action can beacknowledged and cleared bypressing SET/CLR. The messagesthat require immediate action cannotbe cleared until that action isperformed. All messages should betaken seriously and clearing themessages does not correct theproblem.

The following are some of thevehicle messages that may bedisplayed depending on yourvehicle content.

Battery Voltage andCharging Messages

BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE

This message displays when thevehicle has detected that the batteryvoltage is dropping beyond areasonable point. The battery saversystem starts reducing features ofthe vehicle that may be noticed. Atthe point that features are disabled,this message displays. Turn offunnecessary accessories to allowthe battery to recharge.

LOW BATTERY

This message is displayed when thebattery voltage is low. See Batteryon page 10‑33.

SERVICE BATTERYCHARGING SYSTEM

This message is displayed whenthere is a fault in the batterycharging system. Take the vehicle toyour dealer for service.



Brake System Messages

BRAKE FLUID LOW

This message is displayed when thebrake fluid level is low; see BrakeFluid on page 10‑32.

HILL START ASSIST ACTIVE

This message is displayed when HillStart Assist (HSA) is preventing thevehicle from rolling while driving offon a grade. See Hill Start Assist(HSA) on page 9‑36.

RELEASE PARKING BRAKE

This message is displayed as areminder that the parking brake ison. Release it before you attempt todrive.

Compass Messages

CAL

This message is displayed when thecompass needs to be calibrated.See Compass on page 5‑4.

– –

Dashes will be displayed if thecompass needs service. See yourdealer for service.

Convertible TopMessages

BATTERY VOLTAGE TOO LOW– TOP DISABLED

This message displays when thebattery voltage is too low to operatethe convertible top.

EXTEND CARGO SHADE TOOPERATE

This message displays if the reartrunk partition is not extended andengaged.

CLOSE TRUNK TOOPERATE TOP

This message displays if the trunk isopen while you are trying to operatethe convertible top. Make sure thetrunk is closed before operating theconvertible top. See Convertible Topon page 2‑17.

COMPLETE TOP MOTION TOOPEN TRUNK

This message displays if attemptingto open the trunk before the top hasbeen fully opened or closed.

REDUCE VEHICLE SPEED TOOPERATE TOP

This message is displayed when thevehicle is moving too fast to safelyoperate the convertible top. Reducethe vehicle speed.

TEMPERATURE TOO LOW –TOP DISABLED

This message displays and a soundwill be heard when the powerconvertible top button is pressed



and the power convertible top pumpmotor temperature is below 0°C(32°F). Wait for the powerconvertible top pump motor to warmup before using the powerconvertible top.

TOP NOT SECURE

This message displays when thepower convertible top is closedwithout the convertible top frontlatch engaged or when the foldingtop is not fully stowed. Press andhold the convertible top button in theopen direction until a beep is heardor close the top and engage thelatch.

TOP SYSTEM OVERHEATED,PLEASE WAIT

This message displays and a soundwill be heard when the powerconvertible top button is pressedand the power convertible top pumpmotor is overheated. Wait for thepower convertible top pump motorto cool down before using the powerconvertible top.

UNLATCH TOP

This message displays and a soundwill be heard if you try to lower theconvertible top without firstreleasing the front latch. SeeConvertible Top on page 2‑17.

Cruise Control Messages

CRUISE SET TO XXX

This message displays when thecruise control is set and shows thespeed it was set to. See CruiseControl on page 9‑44.

Door Ajar Messages

DRIVER DOOR OPEN

This message will display when thedriver door is open. Close the doorcompletely.

HOOD OPEN

This message will display when thehood is open. Close the hoodcompletely.

PASSENGER DOOR OPEN

This message will display when thepassenger door is open. Close thedoor completely.

TRUNK OPEN

This message will display when thetrunk is open. Close the trunkcompletely.

Engine Cooling SystemMessages

A/C OFF DUE TO HIGHENGINE TEMP

This message displays when theengine coolant becomes hotter thanthe normal operating temperature.To avoid added strain on a hotengine, the air conditioningcompressor automatically turns off.When the coolant temperaturereturns to normal, the airconditioning compressor turns backon. You can continue to drive thevehicle.



If this message continues to appear,have the system repaired by yourdealer as soon as possible to avoiddamage to the engine.

COOLANT LEVEL LOW ADDCOOLANT

This message will display if thecoolant is low. See Engine Coolanton page 10‑23.

ENGINE OVERHEATED —IDLE ENGINE

This message displays when theengine coolant temperature is toohot. Stop and allow the vehicle toidle until it cools down.

ENGINE OVERHEATED —STOP ENGINE

This message displays and acontinuous chime sounds if theengine cooling system reachesunsafe temperatures for operation.Stop and turn off the vehicle assoon as it is safe to do so to avoid

severe damage. This messageclears when the engine has cooledto a safe operating temperature.

Engine Oil Messages

CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON

This message displays when theengine oil needs to be changed.When you change the engine oil, besure to reset the Oil Life System.See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑15, Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑25, EngineOil on page 10‑13, and MaintenanceSchedule on page 11‑2.

ENGINE OIL HOT, IDLEENGINE

This message displays when theengine oil temperature is too hot.Stop and allow the vehicle to idleuntil it cools down.

ENGINE OIL LOW — ADD OIL

On some vehicles, this messagedisplays when the engine oil levelmay be too low. Check the oil level

before filling to the recommendedlevel. If the oil is not low and thismessage remains on, take thevehicle to your dealer for service.See Engine Oil on page 10‑13.

OIL PRESSURE LOW — STOPENGINE

This message displays if low oilpressure levels occur. Stop thevehicle as soon as safely possibleand do not operate it until the causeof the low oil pressure has beencorrected. Check the oil as soon aspossible and have the vehicleserviced by your dealer.

Engine Power Messages

ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED

This message displays when thevehicle's engine power is reduced.Reduced engine power can affectthe vehicle's ability to accelerate.If this message is on, but there is noreduction in performance, proceedto your destination. Theperformance may be reduced the



next time the vehicle is driven. Thevehicle may be driven at a reducedspeed while this message is on, butmaximum acceleration and speedmay be reduced. Anytime thismessage stays on, the vehicleshould be taken to your dealer forservice as soon as possible.

Fuel System Messages

FUEL LEVEL LOW

This message displays when thevehicle is low on fuel. Refuel assoon as possible

TIGHTEN GAS CAP

This message displays when thefuel cap is not on tight. Tighten thefuel cap.

Key and Lock Messages

NUMBER OF KEYSPROGRAMMED

This message displays whenprogramming new keys to thevehicle.

REPLACE BATTERY INREMOTE KEY

This message displays when thebattery in the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter needs to bereplaced.

Lamp Messages

AUTOMATIC LIGHTCONTROL ON

This message is displayed when theautomatic light control has beenturned on. See Automatic HeadlampSystem on page 6‑3.

AUTOMATIC LIGHTCONTROL OFF

This message is displayed when theautomatic light control has beenturned off. See Automatic HeadlampSystem on page 6‑3.

LEFT FRONT TURNINDICATOR FAILURE

This message is displayed if theturn signal bulb needs to bereplaced. See Headlamps, FrontTurn Signal and Parking Lamps(Uplevel Vehicle) on page 10‑38 orHeadlamps, Front Turn Signal andParking Lamps (Base Vehicle) onpage 10‑37 and Replacement Bulbson page 10‑41.

LEFT REAR TURN INDICATORFAILURE

This message is displayed if theturn signal bulb needs to bereplaced. See Bulb Replacement onpage 10‑37.



RIGHT FRONT TURNINDICATOR FAILURE

This message is displayed if theturn signal bulb needs to bereplaced. See Headlamps, FrontTurn Signal and Parking Lamps(Uplevel Vehicle) on page 10‑38 orHeadlamps, Front Turn Signal andParking Lamps (Base Vehicle) onpage 10‑37 and Replacement Bulbson page 10‑41.

RIGHT REAR TURNINDICATOR FAILURE

This message is displayed if theturn signal bulb needs to bereplaced. See Bulb Replacement onpage 10‑37.

TURN SIGNAL ON

This message is displayed if theturn signal has been left on. Turn offthe turn signal.

Object Detection SystemMessages

PARK ASSIST OFF

This message displays when thepark assist system has been turnedoff or when there is a temporarycondition causing the system to bedisabled. See Ultrasonic ParkingAssist on page 9‑46.

SERVICE PARK ASSIST

This message displays if there is aproblem with the Ultrasonic RearParking Assist (URPA) system. Donot use this system to help youpark. See Ultrasonic Parking Assiston page 9‑46.

Ride Control SystemMessages

PERF TRACTION 1 – WETACTIVE HANDLING ONSUSPENSION MODE TOUR(ZL1 Only)

This message displays when thisPerformance Traction Managementmode is selected. The TCS andStabiliTrak OFF cluster lights willalso be on when this mode isselected. Once this message isacknowledged, PTM1 – WET ESC =ON displays on the bottom of thedigital speed page. Launch Controlis available when this mode isselected. In this mode, the TractionControl and Active Handling Systemare available but intended for useon wet race track conditions. Adjustyour driving accordingly. See“Performance Traction Management(PTM) (ZL1 Only)” and “LaunchControl (V8 with ManualTransmissions Only)” underCompetitive Driving Mode onpage 9‑39.



PERF TRACTION 2 – DRYACTIVE HANDLING ONSUSPENSION MODE TOUR(ZL1 Only)

This message displays when thisPerformance Traction Managementmode is selected. The TCS andStabiliTrak OFF cluster lights willalso be on when this mode isselected. Once this message isacknowledged, PTM2 – DRY ESC =ON displays on the bottom of thedigital speed page. Launch Controlis available when this mode isselected. In this mode, the TractionControl and Active Handling Systemare available but intended for useon dry race track conditions. Adjustyour driving accordingly. See“Performance Traction Management(PTM) (ZL1 Only)” and “LaunchControl (V8 with ManualTransmissions Only)” underCompetitive Driving Mode onpage 9‑39.

PERF TRACTION 3 – SPORT1ACTIVE HANDLING ONSUSPENSION MODE SPORT(ZL1 Only)

This message displays when thisPerformance Traction Managementmode is selected. The TCS andStabiliTrak OFF cluster lights willalso be on when this mode isselected. Once this message isacknowledged, PTM3 – SPORT1ESC = ON displays on the bottom ofthe digital speed page. LaunchControl is available when this modeis selected. In this mode, theTraction Control and ActiveHandling System are available butintended for use on dry race trackconditions. Adjust your drivingaccordingly. See “PerformanceTraction Management (PTM) (ZL1Only)” and “Launch Control (V8 withManual Transmissions Only)” underCompetitive Driving Mode onpage 9‑39.

PERF TRACTION 4 – SPORT2ACTIVE HANDLING OFFSUSPENSION MODE SPORT(ZL1 Only)

This message displays when thisPerformance Traction Managementmode is selected. The TCS andStabiliTrak OFF cluster lights willalso be on when this mode isselected. Once this message isacknowledged, PTM4 – SPORT2ESC = OFF displays on the bottomof the digital speed page. LaunchControl is available when this modeis selected. In this mode, theTraction Control is available butintended for use on dry race trackconditions. The Active HandlingSystem is disabled when this modeis selected. This mode will requiremore driver skill than modes 1–3.Adjust your driving accordingly. See“Performance Traction Management(PTM) (ZL1 Only)” and “LaunchControl (V8 with ManualTransmissions Only)” underCompetitive Driving Mode onpage 9‑39.



PERF TRACTION 5 – RACEACTIVE HANDLING OFFSUSPENSION MODE TRACK(ZL1 Only)

This message displays when thisPerformance Traction Managementmode is selected. The TCS andStabiliTrak OFF cluster lights willalso be on when this mode isselected. Once this message isacknowledged, PTM5 – RACE ESC= OFF displays on the bottom of thedigital speed page. Launch Controlis available when this mode isselected. In this mode, the TractionControl is available but intended foruse on dry race track conditions.The Active Handling System isdisabled when this mode isselected. This mode will requiremore driver skill than modes 1–4.Adjust your driving accordingly. See“Performance Traction Management(PTM) (ZL1 Only)” and “LaunchControl (V8 with ManualTransmissions Only)” underCompetitive Driving Mode onpage 9‑39.

SERVICE STABILITRAK

This message displays if there is aproblem with the StabiliTrak®

system. If this message appears, tryto reset the system. Stop; turn offthe engine and remove the key fromthe ignition; open and close thedriver door and wait for at leastone minute. During this time youshould notice the lights on thecluster turn off. After a minute haspassed, start the engine again.If this message still comes on, itmeans there is a problem. See yourdealer for service. The vehicle issafe to drive; however, you do nothave the benefit of StabiliTrak, soreduce your speed and driveaccordingly.

SERVICE SUSPENSIONSYSTEM (ZL1 Only)

This message displays when theSelective Ride Control system hasdetected a malfunction and thevehicle speed will be limited. Thesystem must be serviced. See yourdealer. See Selective Ride Control

on page 9‑43 and “SPEED LIMITEDTO XXX (ZL1 Only)” under VehicleSpeed Messages on page 5‑42.

SERVICE TRACTIONCONTROL

This message displays when thereis a problem with the TractionControl System (TCS). When thismessage is displayed, the systemwill not limit wheel spin. Adjust yourdriving accordingly. See your dealerfor service.

STABILITRAK COMPETITIVEMODE (LS3 and L99 Only)

This message displays whenCompetitive Mode is selected. See“Competitive Driving Mode (NonZL1)” under Competitive DrivingMode on page 9‑39.

TRACTION CONTROL OFF

This message displays when thetraction control system has beendisabled. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 9‑37.



Airbag System Messages

SERVICE AIRBAG

This message displays if there is aproblem with the airbag system.Take the vehicle to your dealer forservice.

Security Messages

THEFT ATTEMPTED

This message displays if the vehicledetects a tamper condition.

Service Vehicle Messages

SERVICE AC SYSTEM

This message is displayed if there isa problem with the air conditioningsystem. Take the vehicle to yourdealer for service.

SERVICE POWER STEERING

This message is displayed if there isa problem with the power steeringsystem and a chime may sound.Take the vehicle to your dealer forservice.

SERVICE VEHICLE SOON

This message is displayed if there isa problem with the vehicle. Take thevehicle to your dealer for service.

Tire Messages

CHECK XXX TIRE PRESSUREor TIRE PRESSURE LOW ADDAIR TO TIRE

This message displays if the vehicledetects low pressure in one or moretires.

This message also displays LEFTFRONT, RIGHT FRONT, LEFTREAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicatethe location of the low tire.

The low tire pressure warning lightwill also come on. See TirePressure Light on page 5‑23.

If a tire pressure message appearson the DIC, stop as soon as youcan. Inflate the tires by adding airuntil the tire pressure is equal to thevalues shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. See Tireson page 10‑49, Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑12, and Tire Pressure onpage 10‑56.

The DIC also shows the tirepressure values. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑25.

SERVICE TIRE MONITORSYSTEM

This message displays if there is aproblem with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS). See TirePressure Monitor Operation onpage 10‑59.

TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE

This message displays when thesystem is learning new tires. SeeTire Pressure Monitor Operation onpage 10‑59.



TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEMRESET

This message displays whenresetting the TPMS. See TirePressure Monitor Operation onpage 10‑59.

Transmission Messages

1 – 4 SHIFT

This message displays when youcan only shift from 1 (First) to4 (Fourth) instead of 1 (First) to2 (Second). See ManualTransmission on page 9‑32.

PRESS CLUTCH TO START

This message displays whenattempting to start a vehicle with amanual transmission withoutpressing on the clutch pedal.

SERVICE TRANSMISSION

This message displays if there is aproblem with the transmission. Seeyour dealer.

SHIFT DENIED

This message displays whenattempting to use the automatictransmission manual mode to shiftto too low of a gear. See ManualMode on page 9‑29.

SHIFT TO PARK

This message displays when thetransmission needs to be shifted toP (Park). This may appear whenattempting to remove the key fromthe ignition if the vehicle is not inP (Park).

TRANSMISSION HOT – IDLEENGINE

This message displays and a chimesounds if the transmission fluid inthe vehicle gets hot. Driving with thetransmission fluid temperature highcan cause damage to the vehicle.Stop the vehicle and let it idle toallow the transmission to cool. Thismessage clears when the fluidtemperature reaches a safe level.

Vehicle ReminderMessages

ICE POSSIBLE DRIVEWITH CARE

This message is displayed when iceconditions are possible.

TURN WIPER CONTROL TOINTERMITTENT FIRST

This message is displayed whenattempting to adjust the intermittentwiper speed without intermittentselected on the wiper control. SeeWindshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑3.

Vehicle Speed Messages

DRIVER SELECTED SPEEDLIMIT EXCEEDED

This message is displayed when thevehicle speed is greater than the setspeed. See “Speed Warning” underDriver Information Center (DIC) onpage 5‑25.



SPEED LIMITED TO XXX(ZL1 Only)

This message displays when amalfunction is present in theSelective Ride Control system. Thevehicle speed will be limited to avalue determined by the vehiclewhen the shock absorber systemhas failed and the shocks are intheir full soft mode. Have the vehicleserviced by your dealer as soon aspossible.

Window Messages

OPEN, THEN CLOSE DRIVER/PASSENGER WINDOW

This message is displayed when thewindow needs to be reprogrammed.If the vehicle's battery has beenrecharged or disconnected, you willneed to reprogram each frontwindow for the express-up feature towork. See Power Windows onpage 2‑14.

VehiclePersonalizationThe audio system controls are usedto access the personalizationmenus for customizing vehiclefeatures.

CONFIG (Configuration): Press toaccess the ConfigurationSettings Menu.

MENU/SELECT Knob: Press thecenter of this knob to enter themenus and select menu items. Turnthe knob to scroll through themenus.

/ BACK: Press to exit or movebackward in a menu.

Entering the PersonalizationMenus

1. Press the CONFIG button toaccess the ConfigurationSettings menu.

2. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob tohighlight Vehicle Settings.

3. Press the center of the MENU/SELECT knob to select theVehicle Settings menu.

The following list of menu items willbe available:. Climate and Air Quality. Comfort and Convenience. Collision/Detection Systems. Language. Lighting. Power Door Locks. Remote Lock/Unlock. Return to Factory Settings

Turn the MENU/SELECT knob tohighlight the menu. Press the knobto select it. Each of the menus isdetailed in the following information.

Climate and Air Quality

Select the Climate and Air Qualitymenu and the following will bedisplayed:. Remote Start Heated Seats



Remote Start Heated Seats

When on, this feature will turn theheated seats on when using remotestart on cold days.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen Remote Start Heated Seats ishighlighted. Turn the knob to selectOn or Off. Press the knob to confirmand go back to the last menu.

Comfort and Convenience

Select the Comfort andConvenience menu and thefollowing will be displayed:. Chime Volume

Chime Volume

This allows the selection of thechime volume level.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen Chime Volume is highlighted.Turn the knob to select Normal orHigh. Press the knob to confirm andgo back to the last menu.

Collision/Detection Systems

Select the Collision/DetectionSystems menu and the following willbe displayed:. Park Assist

Park Assist

This allows the Ultrasonic ParkingAssist feature to be turned on or off.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen Park Assist is highlighted.Turn the knob to select On or Off.Press the knob to confirm and goback to the last menu.

Language

Select the Language menu and thefollowing will be displayed:. UK English. Spanish. French. German. Italian. Swedish

. Dutch

. Polish

. Danish

. Portuguese (Europe)

. Norwegian

. Finnish

. Turkish

. Arabic

. Russian

. Portuguese (Brazil)

Turn the MENU/SELECT knob toselect the language. Press the knobto confirm and go back to thelast menu.

Lighting

Select the Lighting menu and thefollowing will be displayed:. Exit Lighting. Vehicle Locator Lights



Exit Lighting

This allows the selection of howlong the exterior lamps stay onwhen leaving the vehicle when it isdark outside.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen Exit Lighting is highlighted.Turn the knob to select Off,30 Seconds, 1 Minute, or 2 Minutes.Press the knob to confirm and goback to the last menu.

Vehicle Locator Lights

This allows the vehicle locator lightsto be turned on or off.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen Vehicle Locator Lights ishighlighted. Turn the knob to selectOn or Off. Press the knob to confirmand go back to the last menu.

Power Door Locks

Select Power Door Locks and thefollowing will be displayed:. Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out. Auto Door Unlock. Delayed Door Lock

Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out

When on, this feature will keep thedriver door from locking when thedoor is open. If Off is selected, theDelayed Door Lock menu will beavailable.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen Auto Door Unlock ishighlighted. Turn the knob to selectOn or Off. Press the knob to confirmand go back to the last menu.

Auto Door Unlock

This allows selection of which of thedoors will automatically unlock whenthe vehicle is shifted into P (Park)(automatic transmission) or whenthe key is removed from the ignition(manual transmission).

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen Auto Door Unlock ishighlighted. Turn the knob to selectAll Doors, Driver Door, or Off. Pressthe knob to confirm and go back tothe last menu.

Delayed Door Lock

When on, this feature will delay thelocking of the doors. To override thedelay, press the power door lock onthe instrument panel.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen Delayed Door Lock ishighlighted. Turn the knob to selectOn or Off. Press the knob to confirmand go back to the last menu.

Remote Lock/Unlock

Select Remote Lock/Unlock and thefollowing may be displayed:. Unlock Feedback (Lights). Locking Feedback. Door Unlock Options



Unlock Feedback (Lights)

When on, the exterior lamps willflash when unlocking the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen Unlock Feedback (Lights) ishighlighted. Turn the knob to selectFlash Lights or Off. Press the knobto confirm and go back to thelast menu.

Locking Feedback

This allows selection of what type offeedback is given when unlockingthe vehicle with the RKE transmitter.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen Locking Feedback ishighlighted. Turn the knob to selectLights and Horn, Lights Only, HornOnly, or Off. Press the knob toconfirm and go back to thelast menu.

Door Unlock Options

This allows selection of which doorswill unlock when pressing the unlockbutton on the RKE transmitter.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen Door Unlock Options ishighlighted. Turn the knob to selectAll Doors or Driver Door Only. Pressthe knob to confirm and go back tothe last menu.

Return to Factory Settings

Select Return to Factory Settings toreturn all of the vehiclepersonalization to the defaultsettings. Turn the knob to select Yesor No. Press the knob to confirmand go back to the last menu.

Universal RemoteSystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑21 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Universal Remote SystemProgramming

If the vehicle has this feature, youwill see these buttons with oneindicator light below them in theoverhead console.

This system provides a way toreplace up to three remote controltransmitters used to activate



devices such as garage dooropeners, security systems, andhome automation devices.

Do not use the Universal Remotesystem with any garage door openerthat does not have the stop andreverse feature. This includes anygarage door opener modelmanufactured before April 1,1982.

Read the instructions completelybefore attempting to program theUniversal Remote system. Becauseof the steps involved, it may behelpful to have another personavailable to assist with programmingthe Universal Remote system.

Keep the original hand-heldtransmitter for use in other vehiclesas well as for future UniversalRemote system programming. It isalso recommended that upon thesale of the vehicle, the programmedUniversal Remote system buttonsbe erased for security purposes.See “Erasing Universal RemoteSystem Buttons” later in thissection.

When programming a garage door,park outside of the garage. Parkdirectly in line with and facing thegarage door opener motor-head orgate motor-head. Be sure thatpeople and objects are clear of thegarage door or gate beingprogrammed.

It is recommended that a newbattery be installed in the hand-heldtransmitter for quicker and moreaccurate transmission of theradio-frequency signal.

Programming the UniversalRemote System

For questions or help programmingthe Universal Remote system, call1-800-355-3515 or go towww.homelink.com.

Programming a garage door openerinvolves time-sensitive actions, soread the entire procedure beforestarting. Otherwise, the device willtime out and the procedure will haveto be repeated.

To program up to three devices:

1. Hold the end of the hand-heldtransmitter about 3 to 8 cm (1 to3 in) away from the UniversalRemote system buttons whilekeeping the indicator light inview. The hand-held transmitterwas supplied by themanufacturer of the garage dooropener receiver(motor-head unit).

2. At the same time, press andhold both the hand-heldtransmitter button and one of thethree Universal Remote systembuttons to be used to operatethe garage door. Do not releasethe Universal Remote systembutton or the hand-heldtransmitter button until theindicator light changes from aslowly to a rapidly flashing light.You now may release bothbuttons.

Some entry gates and garagedoor openers may requiresubstitution of Step 2 with the



procedure noted in “GateOperator and CanadianProgramming” later in thissection.

3. Press and hold for five secondsthe newly trained UniversalRemote system button (thebutton selected in Step 2) whileobserving the indicator light andgarage door activation.. If the indicator light stays on

continuously or the garagedoor starts to move whenthe Universal Remotesystem button is pressedand released, then theprogramming is complete.There is no need tocontinue programmingSteps 4–6.

. If the Universal Remotesystem indicator light blinksrapidly for two seconds,then turns to a constantlight and the garage doordoes not move, continuewith programmingSteps 4–6.

It may be helpful to haveanother person assist withthe remaining Steps 4–6.

“Learn” or “Smart” Button

4. After Steps 1–3 have beencompleted, locate the “Learn” or“Smart” button inside the garageon the garage door openerreceiver (motor-head unit). Thename and color of the buttonmay vary by manufacturer.

5. Firmly press and release the“Learn” or “Smart” button. Afterpressing this button, you willhave 30 seconds to completeStep 6.

6. Immediately return to thevehicle. Firmly press and holdfor two seconds the UniversalRemote system button, selectedin Step 2 to control the garagedoor, and then release it. If thegarage door does not move orthe lamp on the garage dooropener receiver (motor-headunit) does not flash, press andhold the same button a secondtime for two seconds, thenrelease it. Again, if the doordoes not move or the garagedoor lamp does not flash, pressand hold the same button a thirdtime for two seconds, thenrelease.

The Universal Remote systemshould now activate thegarage door.



To program the remaining twoUniversal Remote system buttons,begin with Step 1 of “Programmingthe Universal Remote System.”

Gate Operator and CanadianProgramming

If you have questions or need helpprogramming the Universal Remotesystem, call 1-800-355-3515 or goto www.homelink.com.

Canadian radio-frequency lawsrequire transmitter signals to timeout or quit after several seconds oftransmission. This may not be longenough for the Universal Remotesystem to pick up the signal duringprogramming. Similarly, some U.S.gate operators are manufactured totime out in the same manner.

If you live in Canada, or you arehaving difficulty programming a gateoperator or garage door opener byusing the “Programming theUniversal Remote System”procedures, regardless of whereyou live, replace Step 2 under“Programming the Universal RemoteSystem” with the following:

Continue to press and hold theUniversal Remote system buttonwhile you press and release everytwo seconds (cycle) the hand-heldtransmitter button until thefrequency signal has beensuccessfully accepted by theUniversal Remote system. TheUniversal Remote system indicatorlight will flash slowly at first and thenrapidly. Proceed with Step 3 under“Programming the Universal RemoteSystem” to complete.

Universal Remote SystemOperation

Using the Universal RemoteSystem

Press and hold the appropriateUniversal Remote system button forat least half of a second. Theindicator light will come on while thesignal is being transmitted.

Erasing Universal RemoteSystem Buttons

All programmed buttons should beerased when the vehicle is sold orthe lease ends.

To erase all programmed buttons onthe Universal Remote systemdevice:

1. Press and hold down the twooutside buttons until theindicator light begins to flash.This should take about10 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.



Reprogramming a SingleUniversal Remote SystemButton

To reprogram any of the threeUniversal Remote system buttons:

1. Press and hold the desiredUniversal Remote systembutton. Do not release thebutton.

2. The indicator light will begin toflash after 20 seconds. Withoutreleasing the button, proceedwith Step 1 under “Programmingthe Universal Remote System.”

If you have questions or need helpprogramming the Universal Remotesystem, call 1-800-355-3515 or goto www.homelink.com. You mayalso call the customer assistancephone number under CustomerAssistance Offices (U.S. andCanada) on page 13‑5 or CustomerAssistance Offices (Mexico) onpage 13‑5.


Lighting 6-1

Lighting

Exterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Automatic HeadlampSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-4Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Interior LightingInstrument Panel IlluminationControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Lighting FeaturesEntry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Theater Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Battery Load Management . . . . 6-6Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-7

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamp Controls

The exterior lamp control is on theinstrument panel, on the outboardside of the steering wheel.

There are four positions:

P (Off): Briefly turn to this positionto turn the automatic light control offor on again. When released, thecontrol returns to the AUTOposition.

AUTO (Automatic): Turns theheadlamps on automatically atnormal brightness, together with thefollowing:. Parking Lamps. Taillamps. Sidemarker Lamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights

AUTO also controls the DaytimeRunning Lamps (DRL). SeeDaytime Running Lamps (DRL) onpage 6‑2.

; (Parking Lamps): Turns theparking lamps on together with thefollowing:. Taillamps. Sidemarker Lamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights


6-2 Lighting

A warning chime sounds if the driverdoor is opened when the ignitionswitch is off and the parking lampsare on.

5 (Headlamps): Turns theheadlamps on together with thelamps listed below.. Parking Lamps. Taillamps. Sidemarker Lamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights

A warning chime sounds if the driverdoor is opened when the ignitionswitch is off and the headlampsare on.

# (Front Fog Lamps): Turns thefog lamps on or off. The fog lampscome on together with the following:. Parking Lamps. Taillamps. Sidemarker Lamps. License Plate Lamps

. Instrument Panel Lights

See Front Fog Lamps on page 6‑5.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam ChangerPush the turn signal lever awayfrom you and release to turn thehigh beams on. To return to lowbeams, push the lever again or pullit toward you and release.

This indicator light turns on in theinstrument cluster when thehigh-beam headlamps are on.

Flash-to-PassThe flash-to-pass feature works withthe low beams or Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) on or off.

To flash the high beams, pull theturn signal lever all the way towardyou, then release it.

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) canmake it easier for others to see thefront of your vehicle during the day.Fully functional Daytime RunningLamps are required on all vehiclesfirst sold in Canada.

A light sensor on top of theinstrument panel makes the DRLwork, so be sure it is not covered.

The DRL system will make thelow-beam headlamps come on at areduced brightness or for vehicleswith High Intensity Discharge (HID)headlamps, the dedicated DRLlights will come on when thefollowing conditions are met:. The ignition is in the ON/RUN

position.


Lighting 6-3

. The exterior lamps control is inAUTO, or has been brieflyturned toP to turn theautomatic light control on again.

. The engine is running.

When the DRL are on, theheadlamps, taillamps, sidemarkerlamps, instrument panel lights, andother lamps will not be on.

The headlamps automaticallychange from DRL to the regularheadlamps depending on thedarkness of the surroundings. Theother lamps that come on with theheadlamps will also come on.

When it is bright enough outside,the headlamps will go off and theDRL will come on.

To turn the DRL off or on again, turnthe exterior lamps control to thePposition and then release. Forvehicles first sold in Canada, theDRL cannot be turned off.

The regular headlamp systemshould be turned on when needed.

Automatic HeadlampSystemWhen it is dark enough outside andthe headlamp switch is in AUTO,the automatic headlamp system willturn on the headlamps at the normalbrightness along with other lampssuch as the taillamps, sidemarkerlamps, parking lamps, license platelamps, and the instrument panellights. The radio lights will alsobe dim.

To turn off the automatic headlampsystem, turn the exterior lampsswitch to theP position and thenrelease. For vehicles first sold inCanada, the transmission must bein the P (Park) position, before theautomatic headlamp system can beturned off.

The vehicle has a light sensor onthe top of the instrument panel. Donot cover this sensor or the systemwill come on whenever the ignitionis on.

The system may also turn on theheadlamps when driving through aparking garage, heavy overcastweather, or a tunnel. This is normal.

There is a delay in the transitionbetween the daytime and nighttimeoperation of the Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) and the automaticheadlamp system so that drivingunder bridges or bright overheadstreet lights does not affect thesystem. The DRL and automaticheadlamp system will only be


6-4 Lighting

affected when the light sensor seesa change in lighting lasting longerthan the delay.

If the vehicle is started in a darkgarage, the automatic headlampsystem comes on immediately. If itis light outside when the vehicleleaves the garage, there will be aslight delay before the automaticheadlamp system changes to theDRL. During that delay, theinstrument cluster may not be asbright as usual. Make sure theinstrument panel brightness controlis in the full bright position. SeeInstrument Panel IlluminationControl on page 6‑5.

Lights On with Wipers

If the windshield wipers areactivated in daylight with the engineon, and the exterior lamp control isin AUTO, the headlamps, parkinglamps, and other exterior lampscome on. The transition time for thelamps coming on varies based onwiper speed. When the wipers are

not operating, these lamps turn off.Move the exterior lamp control toPor; to disable this feature.

Hazard Warning Flashers

| (Hazard Warning Flasher):Press this button to make the frontand rear turn signal lamps flash onand off. This warns others that youare having trouble. Press again toturn the flashers off.

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

Move the lever all the way up ordown to signal a turn.

An arrow on the instrument clusterflashes in the direction of the turn orlane change.

Raise or lower the lever until thearrow starts to flash to signal a lanechange. Hold it there until the lanechange is completed. If the lever isbriefly pressed and released, theturn signal flashes three times.

The lever returns to its startingposition whenever it is released.


Lighting 6-5

If after signaling a turn or lanechange the arrow flashes rapidly ordoes not come on, a signal bulbmay be burned out.

Have any burned out bulbsreplaced. If a bulb is not burned out,check the fuse. See ElectricalSystem Overload on page 10‑41.

Front Fog Lamps

For vehicles with front fog lamps,the button is on the exterior lampcontrol, on the outboard side of thesteering wheel.

The ignition must be turned to ON/RUN to turn on the fog lamps.

# (Front Fog Lamps): Press toturn the fog lamps on or off. Anindicator light on the instrumentcluster comes on when the foglamps are on.

The fog lamps come on togetherwith the parking and sidemarkerlamps.

If the high-beam headlamps areturned on, the fog lamps will turn off.If the high-beam headlamps areturned off, the fog lamps will turnback on again.

For vehicles with High IntensityDischarge (HID) headlamps, theDaytime Running Lamps (DRL)replace the fog lamps.

Some localities have laws thatrequire the headlamps to be onalong with the fog lamps.

Interior Lighting

Instrument PanelIllumination Control

This feature controls the brightnessof the instrument panel lights.

D (Instrument PanelBrightness): Move thethumbwheel up or down and hold, tobrighten or dim the instrument panellights.


6-6 Lighting

Dome Lamps

The dome lamp buttons areoverhead near the rearview mirror.

To change the settings, press thefollowing:

( (Off): Turns the lamp off, evenwhen a door is open.

H (Door): Turns the lamp onautomatically when a door isopened.

' (On): Turns the lamp on.

Lighting Features

Entry LightingThe lamps inside the vehicle comeon when any door is opened. Theystay on for about 20 seconds. Whenall of the doors have been closed orthe ignition is turned to ON/RUN,they gradually fade out. They alsocome on when K is pressed on theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)system transmitter.

The lamps inside the vehicle stay onfor about 20 seconds after the key isremoved from the ignition to providelight as you exit.

Theater DimmingThis feature allows for a three to fivesecond fade out of the courtesylamps instead of having them turnoff immediately.

Battery LoadManagementThe vehicle has Electric PowerManagement (EPM) that estimatesthe battery's temperature and stateof charge. It then adjusts the voltagefor best performance and extendedlife of the battery.

When the battery's state of chargeis low, the voltage is raised slightlyto quickly bring the charge back up.When the state of charge is high,the voltage is lowered slightly toprevent overcharging. If the vehiclehas a voltmeter gauge or a voltagedisplay on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), you may see thevoltage move up or down. This isnormal. If there is a problem, analert will be displayed.

The battery can be discharged atidle if the electrical loads are veryhigh. This is true for all vehicles.This is because the generator(alternator) may not be spinning fast


Lighting 6-7

enough at idle to produce all of thepower needed for very highelectrical loads.

A high electrical load occurs whenseveral of the following are on, suchas: headlamps, high beams, foglamps, rear window defogger,climate control fan at high speed,heated seats, engine cooling fans,trailer loads, and loads plugged intoaccessory power outlets.

EPM works to prevent excessivedischarge of the battery. It does thisby balancing the generator's outputand the vehicle's electrical needs.It can increase engine idle speed togenerate more power wheneverneeded. It can temporarily reducethe power demands of someaccessories.

Normally, these actions occur insteps or levels, without beingnoticeable. In rare cases at thehighest levels of corrective action,this action may be noticeable to thedriver. If so, a DIC message mightbe displayed, and it isrecommended that the driver reducethe electrical loads as much aspossible. See Battery Voltage andCharging Messages on page 5‑33.

Battery Power ProtectionThis feature shuts off the domelamp if it is left on for more than10 minutes when the ignition is inLOCK/OFF. This helps to preventthe battery from running down.


6-8 Lighting

2 NOTES


Infotainment System 7-1

InfotainmentSystem

IntroductionInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

RadioAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11Backglass Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-12Diversity Antenna System . . . 7-13Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . 7-13

Audio PlayersCD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15

PhoneBluetooth (Overview) . . . . . . . . 7-20Bluetooth (InfotainmentControls) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22

Bluetooth (VoiceRecognition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25

Introduction

InfotainmentRead the following pages tobecome familiar with theinfotainment system features.

{ WARNING

Taking your eyes off the road forextended periods could cause acrash resulting in injury or deathto you or others. Do not giveextended attention to infotainmenttasks while driving.

This system provides access tomany audio and non-audio listings.

To minimize taking your eyes off theroad while driving, do the followingwhile the vehicle is parked:. Become familiar with the

operation and controls of theaudio system.

. Set up the tone, speakeradjustments, and preset radiostations.

See Defensive Driving on page 9‑3.

Notice: Contact your dealerbefore adding any equipment.

Adding audio or communicationequipment could interfere withthe operation of the engine, radio,or other systems, and coulddamage them. Follow federalrules covering mobile radio andtelephone equipment.

The vehicle has RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP,the infotainment system can playeven after the ignition is turned off.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9‑21.

The vehicle may have a base radiothat is included in this manual. Seethe separate infotainment manualfor information on the connectiveradio and navigation system, audioplayers, phone, and voicerecognition. There is also


7-2 Infotainment System

information on settings anddownloadable applications (ifequipped).

Theft-Deterrent FeatureThe theft-deterrent feature works bylearning a portion of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) to theinfotainment system. Theinfotainment system does notoperate if it is stolen or moved to adifferent vehicle.

Overview

1. VOL/ O. Press: Turns the system on

or off.. Turn: Adjusts the volume.

2. INFO. Radio: Shows available

information about thecurrent station.

. CD/MP3: Shows availableinformation about thecurrent track.



3. Buttons 1−6. Radio: Saves and selects

favorite stations.

4. FAV. Radio: Opens the

favorites list.

5. MENU/SELECT. Press: Opens the menus

and selects menu items.. Turn: Highlights menu items

or sets values while in amenu. Manually selectsradio stations whilelistening to the radio.

6. RADIO/BAND. Changes the band while

listening to the radio.. Selects the radio when

listening to a different audiosource.

7. X (CD Eject)

. Removes the CD fromthe slot.

8. CD/AUX. Selects between the CD

player or a connectedexternal audio source.

9. PHONE. Opens the phone

main menu.. Mutes the audio system.

10. SEEK7. Radio: Seeks the previous

station.. CD: Selects the previous

track or rewinds within atrack.

11. CD Slot. Insert a CD.

12. SEEK6. Radio: Seeks the next

station.. CD: Selects the next track

or fast forwards within atrack.

13. CONFIG. Opens the Configuration

Settings menu.

14. TONE. Opens the Tone

Settings menu.

15. BACK /. Menu: Moves one

level back.. Character Input: Deletes

the last character.



Operation

Controls

The infotainment system is operatedby using the pushbuttons,multifunction knobs, and menus thatare shown on the display, andsteering wheel controls, if equipped.

Turning the System On or Off

VOL/ O (Volume/Power): Press toturn the system on and off.

Automatic Off

If the infotainment system has beenturned on after the ignition is turnedoff, the system turns offautomatically after 10 minutes.

Volume Control

VOL/ O (Volume/Power): Turn toadjust the volume.

PHONE: For vehicles withOnStar®, press and hold PHONE tomute the infotainment system. Pressand hold PHONE again, or turnVOL/O to cancel mute.

For vehicles without OnStar, pressPHONE to mute the infotainmentsystem. Press PHONE again,or turn VOL/O to cancel mute.

Menu System

Controls

The MENU/SELECT knob and theBACK / button are used tonavigate the menu system.

MENU/SELECT: Press to:. Enter the menu system.. Select or activate the highlighted

menu option.. Confirm a set value.. Switch a system setting on

or off.

Turn to:. Highlight a menu option.. Select a value.

BACK / : Press to:

. Exit a menu.

. Return from a submenu screento the previous menu screen.

. Delete the last character in asequence.

Selecting a Menu Option

1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob tomove the highlighted bar.

2. Press the MENU/SELECT knobto select the highlighted option.

Submenus



An arrow on the right-hand edge ofthe menu indicates that it has asubmenu with other options.

Activating a Setting

1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob tohighlight the setting.

2. Press the MENU/SELECT knobto activate the setting.

Setting a Value

1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob tochange the current value of thesetting.

2. Press the MENU/SELECT knobto confirm the setting.

Turning a Function On or Off

1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob tohighlight the function.

2. Press the MENU/SELECT knobto turn the function on or off.

Entering a Character Sequence

1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob tohighlight the character.

2. Press the MENU/SELECT knobto select the character.

Press the BACK / button to deletethe last character or press and holdBACK / to delete the entirecharacter sequence.

Audio Settings

The audio settings can be set foreach radio band and each audioplayer source.

To adjust the audio setting, pressthe TONE button and select theaudio setting. Press the / BACKbutton to go back to the ToneSettings menu.

To quickly reset an audio settingvalue to 0:

1. Highlight the option.

2. Press and hold the MENU/SELECT knob until the valuechanges to 0.



Adjusting the Treble, Midrange,and Bass

1. Select Treble, Midrange,or Bass.

2. Select the value.

Adjusting the Fader and Balance

1. Select Fader or Balance.

2. Select the value.

Adjusting the EQ (Equalizer)

For vehicles that have an equalizer:

1. Select EQ.

2. Select the setting.

System Settings

Configuring the Number ofFavorite Pages

To configure the number of availablefavorite pages:


2. Select Radio Settings.

3. Select Radio Favorites.

4. Select the number of availablefavorite pages.

5. Press the BACK / button to goback to the SystemConfiguration menu.

Auto Volume

The auto volume featureautomatically adjusts the radiovolume to compensate for road andwind noise as the vehicle speeds upor slows down, so that the volumelevel is consistent.

The level of volume compensationcan be selected, or the auto volumefeature can be turned off.





3. Select Auto Volume.



Maximum Startup Volume

The maximum volume played whenthe radio is first turned on canbe set.



3. Select Maximum StartupVolume.



Radio

AM-FM Radio

Control Buttons

The buttons used to control theradio are:

RADIO/BAND: Press to turn theradio on and choose between AM,FM, and SiriusXM®, if equipped.

SEEK7 or SEEK6 : Press tosearch for stations.

FAV: Press to open thefavorites list.

1−6: Press to select presetstations.

MENU/SELECT: Turn to manuallysearch for stations.

RDS (Radio Data System)

The radio may have RDS. The RDSfeature is available for use only onFM stations that broadcast RDSinformation. This feature only workswhen the information from the radio

station is available. In rare cases, aradio station could broadcastincorrect information that causes theradio features to work improperly.If this happens, contact the radiostation.

While the radio is tuned to anFM-RDS station, the station nameor call letters display.

Radio Menus

Radio menus are available for AM,FM, and SiriusXM, if equipped.

Press the MENU/SELECT knob toopen the main radio menu for thatfrequency.

Selecting a Band

Press the RADIO/BAND button tochoose AM, FM, or SiriusXM,if equipped. The last station thatwas playing starts playing again.



Selecting a Station

Seek Tuning

Briefly press SEEK7 or SEEK6to automatically search for the nextavailable station. If a station is notfound, the radio switches to a moresensitive search level. If a stationstill is not found, the frequency thatwas last active begins to play.

Press and hold SEEK7 or SEEK6 until the station on the display isreached, then release the button.

Manual Tuning

Turn the MENU/SELECT knob toselect the frequency on the display.

Favorites List

1. Press the MENU/SELECT knob.

2. Select Favorites List.

3. Select the station.

Station Lists


2. Select AM or FM Station List. Allreceivable stations in the currentreception area are displayed.If no station list has beencreated, an automatic stationsearch is done.


Updating Station and CategoryLists

If stations stored in the station listcan no longer be received:


2. Select Update AM or FM StationList, if the stations stored in thestation list are no longerreceived. A station search will becompleted and the first station inthe updated list will play.

To cancel the station search, pressthe MENU/SELECT knob.

Category Lists

Most stations that broadcast anRDS program type (PTY) codespecify the type of programmingtransmitted. Some stations changethe PTY code depending on thecontent. The system stores the RDSstations, sorted by program type, inthe FM category list.

To search for a programming typedetermined by station:

1. Select FM category list. A list ofall programming types availabledisplays.

2. Select the programming type.A list of stations that transmitprogramming of the selectedtype displays.


The category lists are updated whenthe corresponding station lists areupdated.



Storing and RetrievingFavorites

Stations from all bands can bestored in the favorite lists in anyorder.

Up to six stations can be stored ineach favorite page and the numberof available favorite pages canbe set.

Storing a Station as a Favorite

To store the station to a position inthe list, press the correspondingnumeric button 1−6 until the stationcan be heard again.

Retrieving Stations

Press the FAV button to open afavorite page or to switch to anotherfavorite page. Briefly press one ofthe 1−6 buttons to retrieve thestation.

Satellite RadioVehicles with an XM Satellite Radiotuner and a valid SiriusXM® SatelliteRadio subscription can receiveSiriusXM programming.


SiriusXM is a satellite radio servicebased in the 48 contiguous UnitedStates and 10 Canadian provinces.SiriusXM Satellite Radio has a widevariety of programming andcommercial-free music, coast tocoast, and in digital-quality sound.During your trial or when yousubscribe, you will get unlimitedaccess to SiriusXM Radio Online forwhen you are not in the vehicle.A service fee is required to receivethe SiriusXM service. If SiriusXMservice needs to be reactivated, theradio will display "No SubscriptionPlease Renew" on channel XM1.For more information, contactSiriusXM at www.siriusxm.com or

1-866-635-2349 (U.S.), andwww.xmradio.ca or 1-877-209-0079(Canada).

Control Buttons

The buttons used to control theSiriusXM radio are:

RADIO/BAND: Press to turn theradio on and choose between AM,FM, and SiriusXM.

SEEK7 or SEEK6 : Press tosearch for stations.

FAV: Press to open thefavorites list.

1−6: Press to select presetstations.

MENU/SELECT: Turn to search forstations.

Selecting the SiriusXM Band

Press the RADIO/BAND button tochoose between the AM, FM, andSiriusXM bands. The last stationplayed in that band begins to playwhen that band is selected.



SiriusXM Categories

SiriusXM stations are organized incategories.

Removing or Adding Categories


2. Select XM Categories.

3. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob tohighlight the category.

4. Press the MENU/SELECT knobto remove or add the category.

Selecting an SiriusXM Station

SiriusXM stations can be selectedby using SEEK7 or SEEK6, theMENU/SELECT knob, or the menusystem.

To select an XM station using SEEK7 or SEEK6, do one of thefollowing:

. Press and release SEEK7 or

SEEK6 to go to the previous ornext station.

. Press and hold SEEK7 or

SEEK6 to scroll through theprevious or next stations untilthe station is reached.

To select an XM station using theMENU/SELECT knob:

1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob tohighlight an XM station.

2. Press the MENU/SELECT knobto select the station, or leave thestation highlighted.

To select a station using the menu:


2. Select XM Stations List.


Selecting a Station by Category


2. Select XM Category List. A list ofall programming types availabledisplays.

3. Select the programming type.


Storing and RetrievingFavorites

Stations from all bands can bestored in any order in the favoritepages.

Up to six stations can be stored ineach favorite page and the numberof available favorite pages canbe set.

Storing a Station as a Favorite

To store the station to a position inthe list, press and hold thecorresponding 1−6 button until thestation can be heard again.

Retrieving Stations

Press the FAV button to open afavorite page or to switch to anotherfavorite page. Briefly press one ofthe 1−6 buttons to retrieve thestation.



SiriusXM Messages

XL (Explicit LanguageChannels): These channels, or anyothers, can be blocked by request,by calling 1-866-635-2349 (U.S.)and 1-877-209-0079 (Canada).

XM Updating: The encryption codeis being updated; no action isrequired.

Loading XM: The audio system isacquiring and processing audio andtext data; no action is needed.

Channel Off Air: This channel isnot currently in service.

Channel Unauth: This channel isblocked or cannot be received withthe XM subscription package.

Channel Unavail: This previouslyassigned channel is no longerassigned.

No Artist Info: No artistinformation is available.

No Title Info: No song titleinformation is available.

No CAT Info: No categoryinformation is available.

No Information: No text orinformational messages areavailable.

No Subscription Please Renew:SiriusXM subscription needs to bereactivated. Contact SiriusXM atwww.siriusxm.com or1-866-635-2349 (U.S.), andwww.xmradio.ca or 1-877-209-0079(Canada).

No XM Signal: The vehicle may bein a location that where the XMsignal is being blocked. When thevehicle is moved, the signal shouldreturn.

CAT Not Found: There are nochannels available for the selectedcategory.

XM Theftlocked: The XM receiverin the vehicle may have been inanother vehicle. XM receiverscannot be swapped between

vehicles. If this message is receivedafter having the vehicle serviced,check with your dealer.

XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0,this message alternates with the XMRadio eight-digit radio ID label. Thislabel is needed to activate theservice.

Unknown: If this message isreceived when tuned to channel 0,there could be a receiver fault.Consult with your dealer.

Check XM Receiver: If thismessage does not clear within ashort period of time, the receivercould have a fault. Consult with yourdealer.

XM Not Available: If this messagedoes not clear within a short periodof time, the receiver could have afault. Consult with your dealer.

Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and staticcan occur during normal radioreception if items such as phone



chargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronicdevices are plugged into theaccessory power outlet. If there isinterference or static, unplug theitem from the accessory poweroutlet.

FM

FM signals only reach about 16 to65 km (10 to 40 mi). Although theradio has a built-in electronic circuitthat automatically works to reduceinterference, some static can occur,especially around tall buildings orhills, causing the sound to fade inand out.

AM

The range for most AM stations isgreater than for FM, especially atnight. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interfere witheach other. Static can also occurwhen things like storms and powerlines interfere with radio reception.When this happens, try reducing thetreble on the radio.


SiriusXM Satellite Radio Serviceprovides digital radio reception. Tallbuildings or hills can interfere withsatellite radio signals, causing thesound to fade in and out. Inaddition, traveling or standing underheavy foliage, bridges, garages,or tunnels may cause loss of theSiriusXM signal for a period of time.

Cell Phone Usage

Cell phone usage, such as makingor receiving phone calls, charging,or just having the phone on maycause static interference in theradio. Unplug the phone or turn it offif this happens.

Backglass AntennaThe AM-FM antenna is integratedwith the rear window defogger in therear window. Do not scratch theinside surface or damage the linesin the glass. If the inside surface isdamaged, it could interfere with

radio reception. For proper radioreception, the antenna connectorneeds to be properly attached to thepost on the glass.

If attaching a cell phone antenna tothe glass, attach it between the gridlines.

Notice: Using a razor blade orsharp object to clear the insiderear window can damage the rearwindow antenna and/or the rearwindow defogger. Repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not clear the insiderear window with sharp objects.

Notice: Do not apply aftermarketglass tinting with metallic film.The metallic film in some tintingmaterials will interfere with ordistort the incoming radioreception. Any damage caused tothe backglass antenna due tometallic tinting materials will notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty.



Diversity Antenna SystemFor vehicles with convertible tops,the AM-FM antenna is a hiddenself-tuning system, and is in the rearspoiler. It optimizes the AM and FMsignals relative to the vehicle'sposition and radio station source.No maintenance or adjustments areneeded. Do not place loads on thespoiler. If the spoiler is replaced, besure it is replaced with the correctGM parts for the best AM and FMreception.

Satellite Radio AntennaFor vehicles with XM Satellite RadioService, the antenna is located onthe roof or on the trunk lid of thevehicle. Keep the antenna clear ofobstructions for clear radioreception.

Audio Players

CD PlayerThe CD player can play audio CDsand MP3 CDs.

The CD player will not play 8 cm(3 in) CDs.

Care of CDs

Sound quality can be reduced dueto disc quality, recording method,quality of the music recorded, andhow the disc has been handled.Handle discs carefully and storethem in their original cases or otherprotective cases away from directsunlight and dust. If the bottomsurface of a disc is damaged, thedisc may not play properly or at all.Do not touch the bottom surface ofa disc while handling it; this coulddamage the surface. Pick up discsby grasping the outer edges or theedge of the hole and the outer edge.

If the bottom surface of a disc isdirty, take a soft lint-free cloth,or dampen a clean soft cloth in a

mild neutral detergent solutionmixed with water, and clean it. Wipethe disc from the center to theouter edge.

Care of the CD Player

Do not add a label to a disc, as itcould get caught in the CD player.If a label is needed, label the top ofthe recorded disc with amarking pen.

Do not use disc lens cleanersbecause they could contaminate thelens of the disc optics and damagethe CD player.

Notice: If a label is added to aCD, more than one CD is insertedinto the slot at a time, or anattempt is made to play scratchedor damaged CDs, the CD playercould be damaged. While usingthe CD player, use only CDs ingood condition without any label,load one CD at a time, and keepthe CD player and the loading slotfree of foreign materials, liquids,and debris.



Control Buttons

The buttons used to control the CDplayer are:

CD/AUX: Press to choose betweenthe CD and AUX player.

SEEK7 or SEEK6 : Press toselect tracks or to fast forward orrewind within a track.

MENU/SELECT: Turn to selecttracks.

INFO: Press to display additionalinformation about the CD that maybe available.

X (Eject): Press to removethe CD.

Inserting a CD

With the printed side facing up,insert a disc into the CD slot until itis drawn in.

Removing a CD

PressX.

The disc is pushed out of theCD slot.

If the disc is not removed after it isejected, it is pulled back in after afew seconds.

Playing a CD or MP3 CD

Press the CD/AUX button if there isa disc in the player; it beginsplaying.

Information about the disc andcurrent track is shown on thedisplay depending on the datastored.

Selecting a CD Track

Using the control buttons:

Press SEEK7 or SEEK6 toselect the previous or next track.

Turn the MENU/SELECT knobcounterclockwise or clockwise toselect the previous or next track.

Using the CD Menu:


2. Select Tracks list.

3. Select the track.

Playing Tracks in Random Order

Press the MENU/SELECT knob andthen set Shuffle Songs to On.

Fast Forward and Rewind

Press and hold SEEK7 or SEEK6 to fast forward or rewind withinthe current track.

Selecting an MP3 Track

Using the control buttons:

Press SEEK7 or SEEK6 toselect the previous or next track.

Turn the MENU/SELECT knobcounterclockwise or clockwise toselect the previous or next track.

Using the CD Menu:


2. Select Playlists/Folders.

3. Select the playlist or folder.




Searching for MP3 Tracks

It is normal for the search feature totake some time to display theinformation after reading the discdue to the amount of informationstored on the disc. The infotainmentsystem automatically switches toFM while the disc is being read.

Tracks can be searched by:. Playlists. Artists. Albums. Song Titles. Genres. Folder View

To search for tracks:


2. Select Search.

3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,Song Titles, Genres,or Folder View.


Auxiliary DevicesThe AUX Input allows portabledevices to connect to the vehicleusing the 3.5 mm (1/8 in) input jack,the USB port, if equipped,or Bluetooth® wireless technology,if equipped.

Portable devices are controlled byusing the menu system described inOperation on page 7‑4.

The AUX input is in the centerconsole.

3.5mm Jack

Connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable tothe auxiliary input jack to use aportable audio player.

Playback of an audio device that isconnected to the 3.5 mm jack canonly be controlled using the controlson the device.

Adjusting the Volume

Turn the VOL/ O knob to adjust thevolume of the infotainment systemafter the volume level has been seton the portable audio device.

USB Port

For vehicles with a USB port, thefollowing devices may be connectedand controlled by the infotainmentsystem.. iPods. PlaysForSure Devices (PFD). USB Drives. Zunes



Connecting and Controllingan iPod®

Not all iPods can be controlled bythe infotainment system.

Connecting an iPod

Connect the iPod to the USB portusing the cable that came with thedevice.

Searching for a Track

Tracks can be searched for by:. Playlists. Artists. Albums. Song Titles. Podcasts. Genres. Audiobooks. Composers



2. Select Search.

3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,Song Titles, Podcasts, Genres,Audiobooks, or Composers.


Shuffle

Press the MENU/SELECT knob andset Shuffle Songs (Random) to Onor Off, then press the BACK /button to return to the main screen.

On: Plays tracks in the currentfolder in random order.

Off: Plays tracks in the currentfolder in sequential order.

Repeat

Press the MENU/SELECT knob andset Repeat to On or Off, then pressthe BACK / button to return to themain screen.

On: Repeats the current track.

Off: Starts playback from thebeginning of the current track afterthe last track finishes.

Connecting and Controlling aPlaysForSure Device (PFD)or Zune™

Connecting a PFD or Zune

Connect the PFD or Zune to theUSB port using the cable that camewith the device.


Tracks can be searched for by:. Playlists. Artists. Albums. Song Titles. Podcasts. Genres



2. Select Search.

3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,Song Titles, Podcasts,or Genres




Shuffle Functionality

Press the MENU/SELECT knob andset Shuffle Songs (Random) to Onor Off.

On: Plays current tracks in randomorder.

Off: Plays current tracks insequential order.

Repeat Functionality

Press the MENU/SELECT knob andset Repeat to On or Off.

Repeat On: Repeats the currenttrack.

Repeat Off: Starts playback fromthe beginning of the current trackafter the last track finishes.

Connecting and Controlling aUSB Drive

The infotainment system can onlyplay back .mp3 and .wma files froma USB drive.

Only the first 10,000 songs arerecognized on the device.

When a device is not supported, themessage “No supported data found.You can safely disconnect thedevice” appears.

Connecting a USB Drive

Connect the USB drive to the USBport using the cable that came withthe device.


It is normal for the search feature totake some time to display theinformation after reading the discdue to the amount of informationstored on the disc.

Files that do not have any metadata stored in the ID3 tag display asUnknown.

Tracks can be searched for by:. Playlists*. Artists. Albums. Song Titles

. Genres

. Folder View

*This only displays if a playlist isfound on the device.



2. Select Search.

3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,Song Titles, Genres,or Folder View.


Shuffle Functionality

Press the MENU/SELECT knob andset Shuffle Songs (Random) to Onor Off.

On: Plays current tracks in randomorder.

Off: Plays current tracks insequential order.

Repeat Functionality

Press the MENU/SELECT knob andset Repeat to On or Off.



Repeat On: Repeats the currenttrack.

Repeat Off: Starts playback fromthe beginning of the current trackafter the last track finishes.

Connecting a Bluetooth®

Device

Before a Bluetooth device can beconnected to the infotainmentsystem, it must first be paired to thesystem. Not all Bluetooth devicescan be paired to the infotainmentsystem. Before pairing the Bluetoothdevice, become familiar with its userguide for Bluetooth functions. Thesystem only connects to Bluetoothdevices that support A2DP(Advanced Audio DistributionProfile) version 1.2.

Pairing Information:. Up to five devices can be paired

to the system.. The pairing process is disabled

when the vehicle is moving.

. The infotainment systemautomatically links with the firstavailable paired device in theorder the device was paired.

. Only one paired device can beconnected to the infotainmentsystem at a time.

. Pairing should only need to becompleted once, unless changesto the pairing information havebeen made or the device isdeleted.

Bluetooth Setup Menu

The Bluetooth Setup menu can beaccessed with or without a deviceattached to the USB port.

To select the Bluetooth Setup menuwhen a device is attached to theUSB port and active:

1. Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhile in the iPod, Zune, PFD,or USB device main menu.

2. Select Bluetooth Music Setup.

To select the Bluetooth Music Setupmenu when a device is not attachedto the USB port, or when a device isattached to the USB port but notactive:

1. Press the CD/AUX button untilAUX is the active source.



To select the Bluetooth Music Setupmenu when a Bluetooth device isconnected and active:



Pairing a Device

1. Select Connect To New Devicefrom the Bluetooth MusicSetup menu.

2. The system asks a series ofYes/No questions to determinewhat type of device is beingpaired.



3. After the system determineswhat type of Bluetooth device isbeing paired, the Bluetoothdevice will need to be put intodiscovery mode.

4. Some devices may require apersonal identification number(PIN) in order to complete thepairing process. Locate thedevice named “GMusicConnect”in the list on the Bluetoothdevice and follow theinstructions on the device toenter the four-digit PIN providedby the infotainment system.

Connecting to a Device

Once a device is paired to theinfotainment system, it can beconnected to the infotainmentsystem.

To connect a paired device when noother device is connected to theinfotainment system:

1. Select the Select Device optionfrom the Bluetooth MusicSetup menu.

2. Select the new device.

To connect a paired device whenanother device is connected to theinfotainment system:

1. Select the Select Device optionfrom the Bluetooth MusicSetup menu.

2. Select the new device.

3. The active device isdisconnected from the systemand the new device isconnected.

Removing a Device

1. Select Remove Device from theBluetooth Music Setup menu.

2. Select the device.

3. The device is removed from thesystem.

Before connecting to the removeddevice again, it will need to pairedto the infotainment system.

Changing the PIN

To change the default PIN:

1. Select Change Default PIN fromthe Bluetooth MusicSetup menu.

2. Select a pre-defined PIN,or select Other to create a PIN.

To create a PIN:

1. Select the length of the PIN.

2. Enter the character sequence.

Messages

The following messages mayappear on the infotainment screen.

Poor Bluetooth Signal Quality:This message displays when theBluetooth signal strength is low.

This Feature is Unavailable WhileVehicle is Moving: This messagedisplays when an action is notallowed while the vehicle is moving.



Controlling a Bluetooth®

Device

Bluetooth devices that supportAVRCP (Audio/Video RemoteControl Profile) version 1.4 may beable to be controlled by theinfotainment system.

Press and release SEEK7 or

SEEK6 to skip tracks. Press and

hold SEEK7 or SEEK6 to fastforward or fast reverse within atrack.

Other Information

The Bluetooth® word mark andlogos are owned by the Bluetooth®

SIG, Inc. and any use of such marksby General Motors is under license.Other trademarks and trade namesare those of their respective owners.

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑21 for FederalCommunications Commission andIndustry Canada information.

Phone

Bluetooth (Overview)For vehicles equipped withBluetooth capability, the system caninteract with many cell phones,allowing:. Placement and receipt of calls in

a hands-free mode.. Sharing of the cell phone’s

address book or contact list withthe vehicle.

To minimize driver distraction,before driving, and with the vehicleparked:. Become familiar with the

features of the cell phone.Organize the phone book andcontact lists clearly and deleteduplicate or rarely used entries.If possible, program speed dialor other shortcuts.

. Review the controls andoperation of the infotainmentsystem.

. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle.The system may not work withall cell phones. See “Pairing” inthis section.

. If the cell phone has voicedialing capability, learn to usethat feature to access theaddress book or contact list. See“Voice Pass-Thru” in thissection.

. See “Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers” in this section.

{ WARNING

When using a cell phone, it canbe distracting to look too long ortoo often at the screen of thephone or the infotainment(navigation) system. Taking youreyes off the road too long or toooften could cause a crashresulting in injury or death. Focusyour attention on driving.



Vehicles with a Bluetooth systemcan use a Bluetooth-capable cellphone with a Hands-Free Profile tomake and receive phone calls. Theinfotainment system and voicerecognition are used to control thesystem. The system can be usedwhile in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY. The range of theBluetooth system can be up to 9.1 m(30 ft). Not all phones support allfunctions and not all phones workwith the Bluetooth system. Seewww.gm.com/bluetooth for moreinformation about compatiblephones.

Bluetooth Controls

Use the buttons on the infotainmentsystem and the steering wheel tooperate the Bluetooth system.


b / g (Push to Talk): Press toanswer incoming calls, confirmsystem information, and start voicerecognition.

$ /i (Mute/End Call): Press toend a call, reject a call, or cancel anoperation.

Infotainment System Controls

If equipped, the infotainment systemallows certain controls to beselected on the infotainment display.

For information about how tonavigate the menu system using theinfotainment controls, see Operationon page 7‑4.

PHONE: Press to enter the Phonemain menu.

Voice Recognition

The voice recognition system usescommands to control the systemand dial phone numbers.

Noise: The system may notrecognize voice commands if thereis too much background noise.

When to Speak: A tone sounds toindicate that the system is ready fora voice command. Wait for the toneand then speak.

How to Speak: Speak clearly in acalm and natural voice.

Audio System

When using the Bluetooth system,sound comes through the vehicle'sfront audio system speakers andoverrides the audio system. Use theVOL/ O knob during a call tochange the volume level. Theadjusted volume level remains inmemory for later calls. The systemmaintains a minimum volume level.

Other Information

The Bluetooth® word mark andlogos are owned by the Bluetooth®

SIG, Inc. and any use of such marksby General Motors is under license.Other trademarks and trade namesare those of their respective owners.

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑21 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.



Bluetooth (InfotainmentControls)For information about how tonavigate the menu system using theinfotainment controls, see Operationon page 7‑4.

Pairing

A Bluetooth-enabled cell phonemust be paired to the Bluetoothsystem and then connected to thevehicle before it can be used. Seeyour cell phone manufacturer's userguide for Bluetooth functions beforepairing the cell phone. If a Bluetoothphone is not connected, calls will bemade using OnStar Hands-FreeCalling, if available. See OnStarOverview on page 14‑1.

Pairing Information. A Bluetooth phone with MP3

capability cannot be paired tothe vehicle as a phone and anMP3 player at the same time.

. Up to five cell phones can bepaired to the Bluetooth system.

. The pairing process is disabledwhen the vehicle is moving.

. Pairing only needs to becompleted once, unless thepairing information on the cellphone changes or the cell phoneis deleted from the system.

. Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the Bluetoothsystem at a time.

. If multiple paired cell phones arewithin range of the system, thesystem connects to the firstavailable paired cell phone in theorder that they were first pairedto the system. To link to adifferent paired phone, see“Linking to a Different Phone”later in this section.

Pairing a Phone


2. Select Phone Settings orBluetooth Settings.

3. Select Bluetooth.

4. Select Pair Device (Phone).A four-digit PersonalIdentification Number (PIN)appears on the display. The PINis used in Step 6.

5. Start the pairing process on thecell phone to be paired to thevehicle. See the cell phonemanufacturer's user guide forinformation on this process.

6. Locate the device named “YourVehicle” in the list on the cellphone. Follow the instructionson the cell phone to enter thePIN provided in Step 4. After thePIN is successfully entered, thesystem prompts you to provide aname for the paired cell phone.This name will be used toindicate which phones arepaired and connected to thevehicle. The system respondswith “<Phone name> has beensuccessfully paired” after thepairing process is complete.

7. Repeat Steps 1−6 to pairadditional phones.



Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones




4. Select Device List.

Deleting a Paired Phone





5. Select the phone to delete andfollow the on screen prompts.

Linking to a Different Phone

To link to a different phone, the newphone must be in the vehicle andavailable to be connected to theBluetooth system before theprocess is started.





5. Select the new phone to link toand follow the on screenprompts.

If delete is selected, thehighlighted phone will bedeleted.

Making a Call UsingPhone Book

For cell phones that support thephone book feature, the Bluetoothsystem can use the contacts storedon your cell phone to make calls.See your cell phone manufacturer‘suser guide or contact your wirelessprovider to find out if this feature issupported by your phone.

When a cell phone supports thephone book feature, the PhoneBook and Call Lists menus areautomatically available.

The Phone Book menu allows youto access the phone book stored inthe cell phone to make a call.

The Call Lists menu allows you toaccess the phone numbers from theIncoming Calls, Outgoing Calls, andMissed Calls menus on your cellphone to make a call.

To make a call using the PhoneBook menu:

1. Press the PHONE button onceor twice.

2. Select Phone Book.

3. Search through the list byselecting the letter group thephone book entry begins with,or press the MENU/SELECTknob to scroll through the entirelist of names/numbers in thephone book.

4. Select the name or number youwant to call.



To make a call using the CallLists menu:


2. Select Call Lists.

3. Select the Incoming Calls,Outgoing Calls, or MissedCalls list.

4. Select the name or number youwant to call.

Making a Call

To make a call:


2. Enter the character sequence.See “Entering a CharacterSequence” in Operation onpage 7‑4.

3. Select Call to start dialing thenumber.

Accepting or Declining a Call

When an incoming call is received,the infotainment system mutes anda ring tone is heard in the vehicle.

Accepting a Call

Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to“Answer” and press the MENU/SELECT knob to accept the call.

Declining a Call

Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to“Decline” and press the MENU/SELECT knob to decline the call.

Call Waiting

Call waiting must be supported onthe Bluetooth phone and enabled bythe wireless service carrier to work.

Accepting a Call

Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to“Answer” and press the MENU/SELECT knob to accept the call.

Declining a Call

Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to“Decline” and press the MENU/SELECT knob to decline the call.

Switching Between Calls (CallWaiting Calls Only)

To switch between calls:

1. Turn or press the MENU/SELECT knob.

2. Select Switch Call fromthe menu.

Conference Calling

Conference calling and three-waycalling must be supported on theBluetooth phone and enabled by thewireless service carrier to work.

To start a conference while in acurrent call:

1. Turn or press the MENU/SELECT knob.

2. Select Enter Number.



3. Enter the character sequencethen select Call. See “Entering aCharacter Sequence” inOperation on page 7‑4.

4. After the call has been placed,turn or press the MENU/SELECT knob and chooseMerge Calls.

5. To add more callers to theconference call, repeat Steps 1−4. The number of callers thatcan be added is limited by yourwireless service carrier.

Ending a Call

Turn or press the MENU/SELECTknob and select Hang Up.

Muting a Call

To Mute a Call

Turn or press the MENU/SELECTknob and select Mute Call.

To Cancel Mute

Turn or press the MENU/SELECTknob and select Mute Call.

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency(DTMF) Tones

The in-vehicle Bluetooth system cansend numbers during a call. This isused when calling a menu-drivenphone system.

1. Turn or press the MENU/SELECT knob and select EnterNumber.

2. Enter the character sequence.See “Entering a CharacterSequence” in Operation onpage 7‑4.

Bluetooth (VoiceRecognition)

Using Voice Recognition

To use voice recognition, press theb / g button on the steering wheel.Use the commands below for thevarious voice features. Foradditional information, say “Help”while you are in a voicerecognition menu.

Pairing

A Bluetooth-enabled cell phonemust be paired to the Bluetoothsystem and then connected to thevehicle before it can be used. Seeyour cell phone manufacturer's userguide for Bluetooth functions beforepairing the cell phone. If a Bluetoothphone is not connected, calls will bemade using OnStar Hands-FreeCalling, if available. See OnStarOverview on page 14‑1.

Pairing Information. A Bluetooth phone with MP3

capability cannot be paired tothe vehicle as a phone and anMP3 player at the same time.

. Up to five cell phones can bepaired to the Bluetooth system.

. The pairing process is disabledwhen the vehicle is moving.

. Pairing only needs to becompleted once, unless thepairing information on the cellphone changes or the cell phoneis deleted from the system.



. Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the Bluetoothsystem at a time.

. If multiple paired cell phones arewithin range of the system, thesystem connects to the firstavailable paired cell phone in theorder that they were first pairedto the system. To link to adifferent paired phone, see“Linking to a Different Phone”later in this section.

Pairing a Phone

1. Press b / g. The systemresponds “Ready,” followed bya tone.

2. Say “Bluetooth.” This commandcan be skipped.

3. Say “Pair.” The system respondswith instructions and a four-digitPersonal Identification Number(PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5.

4. Start the pairing process on thecell phone that you want to pair.For help with this process, seeyour cell phone manufacturer'suser guide.

5. Locate the device named “YourVehicle” in the list on the cellphone. Follow the instructionson the cell phone to enter thePIN provided in Step 3. After thePIN is successfully entered, thesystem prompts you to provide aname for the paired cell phone.This name will be used toindicate which phones arepaired and connected to thevehicle. The system respondswith “<Phone name> has beensuccessfully paired” after thepairing process is complete.

6. Repeat Steps 1−5 to pairadditional phones.

Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones

The system can list all cell phonespaired to it. If a paired cell phone isalso connected to the vehicle, thesystem responds with “is connected”after that phone name.


2. Say “Bluetooth.”

3. Say “List.”

Deleting a Paired Phone

If the phone name you want todelete is unknown, see “Listing AllPaired and Connected Phones.”



3. Say “Delete.” The system asksfor which phone to delete.

4. Say the name of the phone youwant to delete.



Connecting to a Different Phone

To connect to a different cell phone,the Bluetooth system looks for thenext available cell phone in theorder in which all the available cellphones were paired. Depending onwhich cell phone you want toconnect to, you may have to usethis command several times.



3. Say “Change phone.”. If another cell phone is

found, the response will be“<Phone name> is nowconnected.”

. If another cell phone is notfound, the original phoneremains connected.

Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers

The system can store up to 30phone numbers as name tags in theHands-Free Directory that is sharedbetween the Bluetooth and OnStarsystems.

The following commands are usedto delete and store phone numbers.

Store: This command will store aphone number, or a group ofnumbers as a name tag.

Digit Store: This command allowsa phone number to be stored as aname tag by entering the digits oneat a time.

Delete: This command is used todelete individual name tags.

Delete All Name Tags: Thiscommand deletes all stored nametags in the Hands-Free CallingDirectory and the DestinationsDirectory.

Using the “Store” Command


2. Say “Store.”

3. Say the phone number or groupof numbers you want to store allat once with no pauses, thenfollow the directions given by thesystem to save a name tag forthis number.

Using the “Digit Store” Command

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear the lastnumber.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time.


2. Say “Digit Store.”



3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to store. Aftereach digit is entered, the systemrepeats back the digit it heardfollowed by a tone. After the lastdigit has been entered, say“Store,” and then follow thedirections given by the system tosave a name tag for this number.

Using the “Delete” Command


2. Say “Delete.”

3. Say the name tag you want todelete.

Using the “Delete All Name Tags”Command

This command deletes all storedname tags in the Hands-FreeCalling Directory and theDestinations Directory.

To delete all name tags:


2. Say “Delete all name tags.”

Listing Stored Numbers

The list command will list all thestored numbers and name tags.

Using the “List” Command


2. Say “Directory.”

3. Say “Hands-Free Calling.”

4. Say “List.”

Making a Call

Calls can be made using thefollowing commands.

Dial or Call: The dial or callcommand can be usedinterchangeably to dial a phonenumber or a stored name tag.

Digit Dial: This command allows aphone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.

Re-dial: This command is used todial the last number used on the cellphone.

Using the “Dial” or “Call”Command


2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing or say the name tag.

Once connected, the person calledwill be heard through the audiospeakers.

Calling 911 Emergency


2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”

3. Say “911”.



4. Say "Dial". System responds:"OK, dialing 911".

Using the “Digit Dial” Command

The digit dial command allows aphone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.After each digit is entered, thesystem repeats back the digit itheard followed by a tone.

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear the lastnumber.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time.


2. Say “Digit Dial.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to dial. After eachdigit is entered, the systemrepeats back the digit it heard

followed by a tone. After the lastdigit has been entered,say “Dial.”


Using the “Re-dial” Command


2. After the tone, say “Re-dial.” Thesystem dials the last numbercalled from the connected cellphone.


Receiving a Call

When an incoming call is received,the audio system mutes and a ringtone is heard in the vehicle.

. Press b / g to answer the call.

. Press $ /i to ignore a call.

Call Waiting

Call waiting must be supported onthe cell phone and enabled by thewireless service carrier.

. Press b / g to answer anincoming call when another callis active. The original call isplaced on hold.

. Press b / g again to return tothe original call.

. To ignore the incoming call, noaction is required.

. Press $ /i to disconnect thecurrent call and switch to the callon hold.

Three-Way Calling

Three-way calling must besupported on the cell phone andenabled by the wireless servicecarrier.

1. While on a call, press b / g.2. Say “Three-way call.”



3. Use the dial or call command todial the number of the third partyto be called.

4. Once the call is connected,press b / g to link all callerstogether.

Ending a Call

Press $ /i to end a call.

Muting a Call

During a call, all sounds from insidethe vehicle can be muted so that theperson on the other end of the callcannot hear them.

To mute a call, press b / g , andthen say “Mute Call.”

To cancel mute, press b / g , andthen say “Un-mute Call.”

Transferring a Call

Audio can be transferred betweenthe Bluetooth system and the cellphone.

The cell phone must be paired andconnected with the Bluetoothsystem before a call can betransferred. The connection processcan take up to two minutes after theignition is turned to ON/RUN.

To Transfer Audio from theBluetooth System to a Cell Phone

During a call with the audio in thevehicle:

1. Press b / g.2. Say “Transfer Call.”

To Transfer Audio to the BluetoothSystem from a Cell Phone

During a call with the audio on thecell phone, press b / g. The audiotransfers to the vehicle. If the audiodoes not transfer to the vehicle, usethe audio transfer feature on the cellphone. See your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide for moreinformation.

Voice Pass-Thru

Voice pass-thru allows access to thevoice recognition commands on thecell phone. See your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide to see ifthe cell phone supports this feature.

To access contacts stored in the cellphone:


2. Say “Bluetooth.” This commandcan be skipped.

3. Say “Voice.” The systemresponds “OK, accessing<phone name>.”

The cell phone's normal promptmessages will go through their cycleaccording to the phone's operatinginstructions.



Dual Tone Multi-Frequency(DTMF) Tones

The Bluetooth system can sendnumbers and the numbers stored asname tags during a call. You canuse this feature when calling amenu-driven phone system.Account numbers can also bestored for use.

Sending a Number or Name TagDuring a Call


2. Say “Dial.”

3. Say the number or name tagto send.

Clearing the System

Unless information is deleted out ofthe in-vehicle Bluetooth system, itwill be retained indefinitely. Thisincludes all saved name tags in thephone book and phone pairinginformation. See the previoussections on “Deleting a PairedPhone” and “Deleting Name Tags.”



2 NOTES


Climate Controls 8-1

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemsClimate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1

Air VentsAir Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

MaintenancePassenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

Climate Control Systems

The heating, cooling, defrosting, and ventilation for the vehicle can becontrolled with this system.

1. Fan Control

2. Heated Seats (If Equipped)

3. Temperature Control

4. Air Delivery Mode Controls

5. Air Conditioning

6. Defrost

7. Rear Window Defogger

8. Recirculation

A (Fan Control): Turn to increaseor decrease the fan speed. Turn theknob to O to turn the fan off.

Temperature Control: Turn toincrease or decrease thetemperature inside the vehicle.Maximum cooling occurs when thetemperature knob is turned to MAX


8-2 Climate Controls

# and the air conditioning systemis turned on and air is recirculatedinside the vehicle.

Air Delivery Mode Control: Tochange the current mode, press oneof the following:

F (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

* (Bi-Level): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets and thefloor outlets.

7 (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets.

W (Defog): Clears the windows offog or moisture. Air is directed to thewindshield and floor outlets.

0 (Defrost): Clears thewindshield of fog or frost morequickly. Air is directed to thewindshield and side window outlets.

For best results, clear all snow andice from the windshield beforedefrosting.

Do not drive the vehicle until allwindows are clear.

Air Conditioning

# (Air Conditioning): Press toturn the air conditioning on or off. Anindicator light turns on. If the fan isturned off or the outsidetemperature falls below freezing, theair conditioning will not work.

The air conditioning mightautomatically come on when0 isselected.

) (Recirculation): Press to turnon the recirculation. An indicatorlight comes on. Air is recirculatedinside the vehicle. It helps to quicklycool the air inside the vehicle orprevent outside air and odors fromentering.

Operation in the recirculation modewhile the air conditioner is offincreases humidity and may causethe windows to fog.

Recirculation is not available in thedefrost or defog modes.

To improve fuel efficiency and tocool the vehicle faster, recirculationmay be automatically selected inwarm weather. The recirculationlight will not come on. Press the )to select recirculation; press it againto select outside air.

Rear Window Defogger

1 (Rear Defogger): Press to turnthe rear window defogger on or off.The rear window defogger turns offautomatically after about12 minutes. It can also be turned offby turning the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF.If turned on again it runs for aboutsix minutes before turning off. Athigher vehicle speeds, the reardefogger can stay on continuously.


Climate Controls 8-3

Do not drive the vehicle until allwindows are clear.

Notice: Do not use a razor bladeor sharp object to clear the insiderear window. Do not adhereanything to the defogger gridlines in the rear glass. Theseactions may damage the reardefogger. Repairs would not becovered by your warranty.

L / M (Heated Seats, IfEquipped): Press to turn on or off.See Heated Front Seats onpage 3‑6.

Air VentsUse the air outlets in the center andon the side of the instrument panelto direct the airflow. Use thethumbwheels near the center airoutlets to direct airflow to the left orright.

Operation Tips. In defog or defrost mode, warm

air flows from some air outlets.To improve side windowdefogging or defrosting, directside air outlets toward the sidewindows.

. Clear away any ice, snow,or leaves from air inlets at thebase of the windshield that couldblock the flow of air into thevehicle.

. Keep the path under the frontseats clear of objects to helpcirculate the air inside of thevehicle more effectively.

. Use of non-GM approved hooddeflectors can adversely affectthe performance of the system.Check with your dealer beforeadding equipment to the outsideof the vehicle.


8-4 Climate Controls

Maintenance

Passenger CompartmentAir FilterThe passenger compartment airfilter removes most of the pollen anddust from the air that enters thevehicle. The filter will need to bereplaced periodically. SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11‑2.

Using the climate control systemwithout an air filter installed is notrecommended. Water or otherdebris could enter the system andresult in leaks or noises. Alwaysinstall a new filter when removingthe old filter.

For more information on filterreplacement, see your dealer.


Driving and Operating 9-1

Driving andOperating

Driving InformationDistracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Racing or Other CompetitiveDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-8Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-9Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-11Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-16Front Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-19Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21

Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-23Parking (ManualTransmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24

Parking over ThingsThat Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24

Active Fuel Management® . . . 9-24

Engine ExhaustEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26

Automatic TransmissionAutomatic Transmission . . . . . 9-26Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29

Manual TransmissionManual Transmission . . . . . . . . 9-32

BrakesAntilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34

Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . 9-36

Ride Control SystemsTraction ControlSystem (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37

StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 9-38Competitive Driving Mode . . . 9-39Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . 9-42Selective Ride Control . . . . . . . 9-43

Cruise ControlCruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44

Object Detection SystemsUltrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 9-46Rear VisionCamera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47

FuelFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-49Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . 9-50California FuelRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50

Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-51Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53


9-2 Driving and Operating

TowingGeneral TowingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54

Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54

Trailer Towing(Except ZL1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57

Trailer Towing (ZL1) . . . . . . . . . 9-58Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58

Conversions and Add-OnsAdd-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59

Driving Information

Distracted DrivingDistraction comes in many formsand can take your focus from thetask of driving. Exercise goodjudgment and do not let otheractivities divert your attention awayfrom the road. Many localgovernments have enacted lawsregarding driver distraction. Becomefamiliar with the local laws inyour area.

To avoid distracted driving, alwayskeep your eyes on the road, handson the wheel, and mind on the drive.. Do not use a phone in

demanding driving situations.Use a hands-free method toplace or receive necessaryphone calls.

. Watch the road. Do not read,take notes, or look upinformation on phones or otherelectronic devices.

. Designate a front seatpassenger to handle potentialdistractions.

. Become familiar with vehiclefeatures before driving, such asprogramming favorite radiostations and adjusting climatecontrol and seat settings.Program all trip information intoany navigation device prior todriving.

. Wait until the vehicle is parkedto retrieve items that have fallento the floor.

. Stop or park the vehicle to tendto children.

. Keep pets in an appropriatecarrier or restraint.

. Avoid stressful conversationswhile driving, whether with apassenger or on a cell phone.



{ WARNING

Taking your eyes off the road toolong or too often could cause acrash resulting in injury or death.Focus your attention on driving.

Refer to the infotainment section formore information on using thatsystem, including pairing and usinga cell phone.

If equipped, refer to the navigationmanual for information on thatsystem, including pairing and usinga cell phone.

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” The firststep in driving defensively is to wearthe safety belt. See Safety Belts onpage 3‑8.. Assume that other road users

(pedestrians, bicyclists, andother drivers) are going to be

careless and make mistakes.Anticipate what they might doand be ready.

. Allow enough following distancebetween you and the driver infront of you.

. Focus on the task of driving.

Drunk DrivingDeath and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.

{ WARNING

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected by evena small amount of alcohol. Youcan have a serious — or evenfatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Do not drink and drive or ride witha driver who has been drinking.Ride home in a cab; or if you arewith a group, designate a driverwho will not drink.

Control of a VehicleBraking, steering, and acceleratingare important factors in helping tocontrol a vehicle while driving.

BrakingBraking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Deciding topush the brake pedal is perceptiontime. Actually doing it isreaction time.

Average driver reaction time isabout three-quarters of a second. Inthat time, a vehicle moving at100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m(66 ft), which could be a lot ofdistance in an emergency.



Helpful braking tips to keep in mindinclude:. Keep enough distance between

you and the vehicle in frontof you.

. Avoid needless heavy braking.

. Keep pace with traffic.

If the engine ever stops while thevehicle is being driven, brakenormally but do not pump thebrakes. Doing so could make thepedal harder to push down. If theengine stops, there will be somepower brake assist but it will beused when the brake is applied.Once the power assist is used up, itcan take longer to stop and thebrake pedal will be harder to push.

Steering

Electric Power Steering

If the vehicle has electric powersteering, it does not have powersteering fluid. Regular maintenanceis not required.

If power steering assist is lost dueto a system malfunction, the vehiclecan be steered, but may requireincreased effort. See your dealer ifthere is a problem.

If the steering wheel is turned until itreaches the end of its travel, and isheld against that position for anextended period of time, powersteering assist may be reduced.

Normal use of the power steeringassist should return when thesystem cools down.

See specific vehicle steeringmessages under Vehicle Messageson page 5‑33.

Hydraulic Power Steering

If the vehicle has hydraulic powersteering, it may requiremaintenance. See Power SteeringFluid (L99, LS3 and ZL1) onpage 10‑30 or Power Steering Fluid(LFX) on page 10‑29.

If power steering assist is lostbecause the engine stops orbecause of a system malfunction,the vehicle can be steered but mayrequired increased effort.

See your dealer if there is aproblem.

Curve Tips. Take curves at a reasonable

speed.. Reduce speed before entering a

curve.. Maintain a reasonable steady

speed through the curve.. Wait until the vehicle is out of

the curve before acceleratinggently into the straightaway.



Steering in Emergencies. There are some situations when

steering around a problem maybe more effective than braking.

. Holding both sides of thesteering wheel allows you to turn180 degrees without removinga hand.

. The Antilock Brake System(ABS) allows steering whilebraking.

Off-Road Recovery

The vehicle's right wheels can dropoff the edge of a road onto theshoulder while driving. Followthese tips:

1. Ease off the accelerator andthen, if there is nothing in theway, steer the vehicle so that itstraddles the edge of thepavement.

2. Turn the steering wheel aboutone-eighth of a turn, until theright front tire contacts thepavement edge.

3. Turn the steering wheel to gostraight down the roadway.

Loss of Control

Skidding

There are three types of skids thatcorrespond to the vehicle's threecontrol systems:. Braking Skid — wheels are not

rolling.. Steering or Cornering Skid —

too much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip andlose cornering force.

. Acceleration Skid — too muchthrottle causes the drivingwheels to spin.

Defensive drivers avoid most skidsby taking reasonable care suited toexisting conditions, and by notoverdriving those conditions. Butskids are always possible.



If the vehicle starts to slide, followthese suggestions:. Ease your foot off the

accelerator pedal and steer theway you want the vehicle to go.The vehicle may straighten out.Be ready for a second skid if itoccurs.

. Slow down and adjust yourdriving according to weatherconditions. Stopping distancecan be longer and vehiclecontrol can be affected whentraction is reduced by water,snow, ice, gravel, or othermaterial on the road. Learn torecognize warning clues — suchas enough water, ice, or packedsnow on the road to make amirrored surface — and slowdown when you have any doubt.

. Try to avoid sudden steering,acceleration, or braking,including reducing vehicle speedby shifting to a lower gear. Anysudden changes could causethe tires to slide.

Remember: Antilock brakes helpavoid only the braking skid.

Racing or OtherCompetitive DrivingRacing or competitive driving mayaffect the vehicle warranty. See thewarranty book before using thevehicle for racing or othercompetitive driving.

Notice: If you use the vehicle forracing or other competitivedriving, the engine may use moreoil than it would with normal use.Low oil levels can damage theengine. For information on how toadd oil, see Engine Oil onpage 10‑13.

Be sure to check the oil leveloften during racing or othercompetitive driving and keep thelevel at or near the upper markthat shows the proper operatingrange on the engine oil dipstick.

For racing or competitive driving, itis recommended that the brake fluidbe replaced with a high performancebrake fluid that has a dry boilingpoint greater than 279°C (534°F).After conversion to the highperformance brake fluid, follow thebrake fluid servicerecommendations outlined by thefluid manufacturer. Do not usesilicone or DOT-5 brake fluids.

ZL1 and 1LE: For racing andcompetitive driving, the vehicle loadshould be limited to the driver onlyand no cargo. The tires should beinflated to at least 180 kPa (26 psi).

If the vehicle is used for racing orother competitive driving, the rearaxle fluid temperatures may behigher than would occur in normaldriving. GM recommends that therear axle fluid be drained andrefilled with new fluid after every24 hours of racing or competitivedriving. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 11‑12.



For extended track use, GMrecommends installing a reardifferential cooler to protect the rearaxle. This excludes the ZL1 as ithas a rear differential cooler asstandard equipment.

For track use only, it isrecommended that the oil control kitbe installed to prevent excessive oilconsumption. This kit is availablethrough your dealer.

Notice: Extended track operationwithout this kit installed mayresult in a low oil level and couldresult in engine damage.

To prepare the Camaro ZL1 or SSbrake system for track events andracing, the high performance brakeburnish described below should becompleted.

Brake Burnishing

New brake pads must be burnishedbefore racing or other competitivedriving.

Notice: These procedures arespecific to the ZL1 or Camaro SSbrake package. This procedureshould not be run on otherCamaro models as damage mayresult.

Notice: The new vehicle break‐inperiod should be completedbefore performing the brakeburnish procedure or damagemay occur to the powertrain/engine. See New Vehicle Break-Inon page 9‑16.

When performed as instructed,these procedures will not damagethe brakes. During the burnishingprocedure, the brake pads willsmoke and produce an odor. Thebraking force and pedal travel mayincrease. After the procedure iscomplete, the brake pads mayappear white at the rotor contact.

Run this procedure in a safemanner and in compliance with alllocal and state ordinances/laws

regarding motor vehicle operation.Run this procedure only on drypavement.

Racing/Track Brake BurnishProcedure

Notice: Brake pedal fade willoccur during this track burnishprocedure and can cause brakepedal travel and force to increase.This could extend stoppingdistance until the brakes are fullyburnished.

1. Apply the brakes 25 timesstarting 100 km/h (60 mph) to50 km/h (30 mph) whiledecelerating at 0.4 g. This is amedium brake application. Drivefor at least 1 km (0.6 mi)between applying the brakes.This first step may be skipped ifthere are more than 320 km(200 miles) on the brake pads.

2. Repeatedly apply the brakesfrom 100 km/h (60 mph) to25 km/h (15 mph) whiledecelerating at 0.8 g. This is ahard brake application, without



activating the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS). Drive for at least1 km (0.6 mi) between stops.Repeat until the brake pedaltravel starts to increase.Depending on conditions, thisshould take no longer than 25brake applications.

3. Cool down: Drive at 100 km/h(60 mph) for approximately15 km (10 mi) without usingbrakes.

4. Apply the brakes 25 times from100 km/h (60 mph) to 50 km/h(30 mph) while decelerating at0.4 g. This is a medium brakeapplication. Drive for at least1 km (0.6 mi) betweenapplications.

Driving on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reducevehicle traction and affect yourability to stop and accelerate.Always drive slower in these types

of driving conditions and avoiddriving through large puddles anddeep‐standing or flowing water.

{ WARNING

Wet brakes can cause crashes.They might not work as well in aquick stop and could causepulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a largepuddle of water or a car/vehiclewash, lightly apply the brakepedal until the brakes worknormally.

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause thevehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Watercan build up under the vehicle'stires so they actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the road iswet enough and you are going fastenough. When the vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or nocontact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is toslow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather Tips

Besides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:. Allow extra following distance.. Pass with caution.. Keep windshield wiping

equipment in good shape.. Keep the windshield washer fluid

reservoir filled.. Have good tires with proper

tread depth. See Tires onpage 10‑49.



. Turn off cruise control.

Highway HypnosisAlways be alert and pay attention toyour surroundings while driving.If you become tired or sleepy, find asafe place to park the vehicleand rest.

Other driving tips include:. Keep the vehicle well ventilated.. Keep the interior

temperature cool.. Keep your eyes moving — scan

the road ahead and to the sides.. Check the rearview mirror and

vehicle instruments often.

Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than drivingon flat or rolling terrain. Tips fordriving in these conditions include:. Keep the vehicle serviced and in

good shape.

. Check all fluid levels and brakes,tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

. Shift to a lower gear when goingdown steep or long hills.

{ WARNING

If you do not shift down, thebrakes could get so hot that theywould not work well. You wouldthen have poor braking or evennone going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let the engineassist the brakes on a steepdownhill slope.

{ WARNING

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)or with the ignition off isdangerous. The brakes will haveto do all the work of slowing downand they could get so hot that

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

they would not work well. Youwould then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill.Steering may also be affectedwhen ignition is off. You couldcrash. Always have the enginerunning and the vehicle in gearwhen going downhill.

. Stay in your own lane. Do notswing wide or cut across thecenter of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in yourown lane.

. Be alert on top of hills;something could be in your lane(stalled car, accident).

. Pay attention to special roadsigns (falling rocks area, windingroads, long grades, passing orno-passing zones) and takeappropriate action.



Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or Ice

Drive carefully when there is snowor ice between the tires and theroad, creating less traction or grip.Wet ice can occur at about 0°C(32°F) when freezing rain begins tofall, resulting in even less traction.Avoid driving on wet ice or infreezing rain until roads can betreated with salt or sand.

Drive with caution, whatever thecondition. Accelerate gently sotraction is not lost. Accelerating tooquickly causes the wheels to spinand makes the surface under thetires slick, so there is even lesstraction.

Try not to break the fragile traction.If you accelerate too fast, the drivewheels will spin and polish thesurface under the tires even more.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS)improves vehicle stability duringhard stops on slippery roads, butapply the brakes sooner than whenon dry pavement. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) on page 9‑34.

Allow greater following distance onany slippery road and watch forslippery spots. Icy patches canoccur on otherwise clear roads inshaded areas. The surface of acurve or an overpass can remain icywhen the surrounding roads areclear. Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking whileon ice.

Turn off cruise control on slipperysurfaces.

Blizzard Conditions

Being stuck in snow can be aserious situation. Stay with thevehicle unless there is help nearby.If possible, use RoadsideAssistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program (Mexico) onpage 13‑7 or Roadside AssistanceProgram (U.S. and Canada) onpage 13‑11. To get help and keepeveryone in the vehicle safe:. Turn on the hazard warning

flashers.. Tie a red cloth to an outside

mirror.

{ WARNING

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This maycause exhaust gases to getinside. Engine exhaust containscarbon monoxide (CO) which

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

cannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:. Clear away snow from aroundthe base of your vehicle,especially any that is blockingthe exhaust pipe.

. Check again from time totime to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

. Open a window about 5 cm(2 in) on the side of thevehicle that is away from thewind to bring in fresh air.


. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatcirculates the air inside thevehicle and set the fan speed

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

to the highest setting. See“Climate Control Systems” inthe Index.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑25.

To save fuel, run the engine for onlyshort periods as needed to warmthe vehicle and then shut the engineoff and close the window most ofthe way to save heat. Repeat thisuntil help arrives but only when youfeel really uncomfortable from thecold. Moving about to keep warmalso helps.

If it takes some time for help toarrive, now and then when you runthe engine, push the acceleratorpedal slightly so the engine runsfaster than the idle speed. Thiskeeps the battery charged to restartthe vehicle and to signal for helpwith the headlamps. Do this as littleas possible to save fuel.

If the Vehicle Is StuckSlowly and cautiously spin thewheels to free the vehicle whenstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.

If stuck too severely for the tractionsystem to free the vehicle, turn thetraction system off and use therocking method. See TractionControl System (TCS) onpage 9‑37.

{ WARNING

If the vehicle's tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and youor others could be injured. Thevehicle can overheat, causing anengine compartment fire or otherdamage. Spin the wheels as littleas possible and avoid goingabove 56 km/h (35 mph).



Rocking the Vehicle to Getit Out

Turn the steering wheel left andright to clear the area around thefront wheels. Turn off any tractionsystem. Shift back and forthbetween R (Reverse) and a lowforward gear, spinning the wheelsas little as possible. To preventtransmission wear, wait until thewheels stop spinning before shiftinggears. Release the acceleratorpedal while shifting, and presslightly on the accelerator pedalwhen the transmission is in gear.Slowly spinning the wheels in theforward and reverse directionscauses a rocking motion that couldfree the vehicle. If that does not getthe vehicle out after a few tries, itmight need to be towed out. If thevehicle does need to be towed out,see Towing the Vehicle onpage 10‑88.

Vehicle Load LimitsIt is very important to know howmuch weight the vehicle cancarry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight andincludes the weight of alloccupants, cargo and allnonfactory-installed options.Two labels on the vehicle showhow much weight it mayproperly carry, the Tire andLoading Information label andthe Certification label.

{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way the

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

vehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.

Tire and Loading InformationLabel

Label Example

A vehicle-specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to the vehicle's center



pillar (B-pillar). With the driverdoor open, the label is attachednear the door lock post. The Tireand Loading Information labelshows the number of occupantseating positions (1), and themaximum vehicle capacityweight (2) in kilograms andpounds.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label also shows thetire size of the originalequipment tires (3) and therecommended cold tire inflationpressures (4). For moreinformation on tires and inflationsee Tires on page 10‑49 andTire Pressure on page 10‑56.

There is also important loadinginformation on the Certificationlabel. It tells you the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)and the Gross Axle Weight

Rating (GAWR) for the front andrear axle. See “CertificationLabel” later in this section.

Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit

1. Locate the statement “Thecombined weight ofoccupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs” on your vehicle'splacard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kg orXXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equalsthe available amount of cargoand luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX”amount equals 1400 lbs and

there will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle,the amount of available cargoand luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150)= 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towinga trailer, the load from yourtrailer will be transferred toyour vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine how thisreduces the available cargoand luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.

See Trailer Towing (Except ZL1)on page 9‑57 or Trailer Towing(ZL1) on page 9‑58 for important



information on towing a trailer,towing safety rules, andtrailering tips.

Example 1

1. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 1 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs).

2. Subtract Occupant Weight @68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg(300 lbs).

3. Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 317 kg(700 lbs).

Example 2


2. Subtract Occupant Weight @68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 340 kg(750 lbs).

3. Available Cargo Weight =113 kg (250 lbs).

Example 3


2. Subtract Occupant Weight @91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs).

3. Available Cargo Weight =0 kg (0 lbs).

Refer to the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information label forspecific information about thevehicle's capacity weight and



seating positions. The combinedweight of the driver, passengers,and cargo should never exceedthe vehicle's capacity weight.

Certification Label

Label Example

A vehicle-specific Certificationlabel is attached to the vehicle'scenter pillar (B-pillar). With thedriver door open, the label isattached near the door lockpost. The label tells the grossweight capacity of the vehicle,called the Gross Vehicle Weight

Rating (GVWR). The GVWRincludes the weight of thevehicle, all occupants, fuel, andcargo. Never exceed the GVWRfor the vehicle, or the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR) foreither the front or rear axle.

And, if there is a heavy load, itshould be spread out. See“Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit” earlier in thissection.

{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This could

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

cause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.

If you put things inside thevehicle— like suitcases, tools,packages, or anythingelse— they will go as fast as thevehicle goes. If you have to stopor turn quickly, or if there is acrash, they will keep going.

{ WARNING

Things inside the vehicle canstrike and injure people in asudden stop or turn, or in acrash.

. Put things in the cargoarea of the vehicle. In thecargo area, put them as

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

far forward as possible.Try to spread the weightevenly.

. Never stack heavierthings, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are abovethe tops of the seats.

. Do not leave anunsecured child restraintin the vehicle.

. Secure loose items in thevehicle.

. Do not leave a seat foldeddown unless needed.

Starting andOperating

New Vehicle Break-InNotice: Follow theserecommended guidelines duringthe first 2 414 km (1,500 mi) ofdriving this vehicle. Parts have abreak-in period and performancewill be better in the long run.. For the first2 414 km (1,500 mi):

. Avoid full throttle starts andabrupt stops.

. Do not exceed 4000engine rpm.

. Avoid driving at any oneconstant speed, fast or slow.

. Do not drive above129 km/h (80 mph).

. Avoid downshifting to brakeor slow the vehicle when theengine speed will exceed4,000 rpm.

. Do not let the engine labor.Never lug the engine in highgear at low speeds. With amanual transmission, shift tothe next lower gear. This ruleapplies at all times, not justduring the break-in period.

. Do not participate in racingevents, sport drivingschools, or similar activitiesduring this break-in period.

. Check engine oil with everyrefueling and add ifnecessary. Oil and fuelconsumption may be higherthan normal during the first2 414 km (1,500 mi).

. To break in new tires, drive atmoderate speeds and avoidhard cornering for the first322 km (200 mi). New tires donot have maximum tractionand may tend to slip.

. New brake linings also needa break-in period. Avoidmaking hard stops during



the first 322 km (200 mi). Thisis recommended every timebrake linings are replaced.

. Should the vehicle be usedfor racing or competitivedriving (after break-in), therear axle lubricant must bereplaced before hand.

See Racing or Other CompetitiveDriving on page 9‑6.

Front FasciaThe vehicle is equipped with a frontfascia which has minimal groundclearance.

Use care when approaching curbs,bumps or objects on road surfacesand avoid them when possible.

Ignition Positions

The ignition switch has four differentpositions.

Notice: Using a tool to force thekey to turn in the ignition couldcause damage to the switch orbreak the key. Use the correctkey, make sure it is all the way in,and turn it only with your hand.If the key cannot be turned byhand, see your dealer.

The key must be fully extended tostart the vehicle.

To shift out of P (Park), turn theignition to ON/RUN and apply thebrake pedal.

1 (STOPPING THE ENGINE/LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle is stopped,turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF to turn the engine off. RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) will remainactive. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 9‑21.

This is the only position from whichthe key can be removed. This locksthe steering wheel, ignition, andautomatic transmission.

On vehicles with an automatictransmission, the shift lever must bein P (Park) to turn the ignition switchto the LOCK/OFF position.

Do not turn the engine off when thevehicle is moving. This will cause aloss of power assist in the brakeand steering systems and disablethe airbags.

The ignition switch can bind in theLOCK/OFF position with the wheelsturned off center. If this happens,



move the steering wheel from rightto left while turning the key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If this does not work,then the vehicle needs service.

If the vehicle must be shut off in anemergency:

1. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.

2. Shift the vehicle to neutral. Thiscan be done while the vehicle ismoving. After shifting to neutral,continue to firmly apply thebrakes and steer the vehicle to asafe location.

3. Come to a complete stop. Shiftto P (Park) with an automatictransmission, or Neutral with amanual transmission. Turn theignition to LOCK/OFF.

4. Set the parking brake. SeeParking Brake on page 9‑35.

{ WARNING

Turning off the vehicle whilemoving may cause loss of powerassist in the brake and steeringsystems and disable the airbags.While driving, only shut thevehicle off in an emergency.

If the vehicle cannot be pulled over,and must be shut off while driving,turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.

2 (ACC/ACCESSORY): Thisposition provides power to some ofthe electrical accessories. It unlocksthe steering wheel and ignition. Tomove the key from ACC/ACCESSORY to LOCK/OFF, pushin the key and then turn it toLOCK/OFF.

3 (ON/RUN): The ignition switchstays in this position when theengine is running. This position canbe used to operate the electricalaccessories, including the

ventilation fan and 12-volt poweroutlet, as well as to display somewarning and indicator lights. Thisposition can also be used forservice and diagnostics, and toverify the proper operation of themalfunction indicator lamp as maybe required for emission inspectionpurposes. The transmission is alsounlocked in this position onautomatic transmission vehicles.

The battery could be drained if thekey is left in the ACC/ACCESSORYor ON/RUN position with the engineoff. The vehicle might not start if thebattery is allowed to drain for anextended period of time.

4 (START): This position starts theengine. When the engine starts,release the key. The ignition switchwill return to ON/RUN for normaldriving.

A warning tone sounds when thedriver door is opened if the ignitionis still in ACC/ACCESSORY and the



key is in the ignition. If the ignitionbecomes difficult to turn, see Keyson page 2‑1.

Key Lock Release

Vehicles with an automatictransmission are equipped with anelectronic key lock release system.The key lock release is designed toprevent ignition key removal unlessthe shift lever is in P (Park).

The key lock release is alwaysfunctional except in the case of anuncharged or low voltage (less than9-volt) battery. If the vehicle has an

uncharged battery or a battery withlow voltage, try charging or jumpstarting the battery. See JumpStarting on page 10‑85.

If charging or jump starting thebattery does not work, locate thehole below the ignition lock. Insert aflat bladed tool or another key fromthe key chain into the opening.When the lever can be felt, actuatethe lever toward the driver andremove the key from the ignition.

Starting the EnginePlace the transmission in theproper gear.

Automatic Transmission

Move the shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). The engine will not startin any other position. To restart thevehicle when it is already moving,use N (Neutral) only.

Notice: Do not try to shift toP (Park) if the vehicle is moving.If you do, you could damage thetransmission. Shift to P (Park)only when the vehicle is stopped.

Manual Transmission

The shift lever should be in Neutraland the parking brake engaged.Hold the clutch pedal down to thefloor and start the engine. Thevehicle will not start if the clutchpedal is not all the way down.

Starting Procedure

1. With your foot off the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition key toSTART. When the engine starts,let go of the key. The idle speedwill go down as the enginewarms. Do not race the engineimmediately after starting it.Allow the oil to warm up andlubricate all moving parts.

The vehicle has aComputer-Controlled CrankingSystem. This feature assists instarting the engine and protects



components. If the ignition key isturned to the START position,and then released when theengine begins cranking, theengine will continue cranking fora few seconds or until thevehicle starts. If the engine doesnot start and the key is held inSTART for many seconds,cranking stops after 15 secondsto prevent cranking motordamage. To prevent geardamage, this system alsoprevents cranking if the engineis already running. Enginecranking can be stopped byturning the ignition switch toACC/ACCESSORY orLOCK/OFF.

Notice: Cranking the engine forlong periods of time, by returningthe key to the START positionimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damagethe cranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not start afterfive to 10 seconds, especially invery cold weather (below −18°Cor 0°F), it could be flooded withtoo much gasoline. Push theaccelerator pedal all the way tothe floor and hold it there as youhold the key in START for amaximum of 15 seconds. Wait atleast 15 seconds between eachtry, to allow the cranking motorto cool. When the engine starts,let go of the key and accelerator.If the vehicle starts briefly butthen stops again, repeat theprocedure. This clears the extragasoline from the engine. Do notrace the engine immediatelyafter starting it. Operate theengine and transmission gentlyuntil the oil warms up andlubricates all moving parts.

Notice: If you add electrical partsor accessories, you could changethe way the engine operates. Anyresulting damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.See Add-On Electrical Equipmenton page 9‑59.

Engine HeaterThe engine coolant heater,if available, can help in cold weatherconditions at or below −18°C (0°F)for easier starting and better fueleconomy during engine warm-up.Plug in the coolant heater at leastfour hours before starting thevehicle. An internal thermostat inthe plug-end of the cord will preventengine coolant heater operation attemperatures above −18°C (0°F).



Using the Engine CoolantHeater

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap theelectrical cord.

The electrical cord is on thepassenger side of the enginecompartment, next to the enginecompartment fuse block forV6 models.

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded110-volt AC outlet.

{ WARNING

Plugging the cord into anungrounded outlet could cause anelectrical shock. Also, the wrongkind of extension cord couldoverheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plugthe cord into a properly groundedthree-prong 110-volt AC outlet.If the cord will not reach, use aheavy-duty three-prong extensioncord rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, besure to unplug and store thecord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engine parts.If you do not it could bedamaged.

The length of time the heater shouldremain plugged in depends onseveral factors. Ask a dealer in thearea where you will be parking thevehicle for the best advice on this.

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)These vehicle accessories may beused for up to 10 minutes after theengine is turned off:. Audio System. Power Windows. Sunroof (if equipped)

The power windows and sunroof willcontinue to work for up to10 minutes or until any door isopened. The radio will work whenthe key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY. Once the key isturned from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF,the radio will continue to work for10 minutes, or until the driver door isopened or the key is removed fromthe ignition.



Shifting Into ParkUse this procedure to shift intoP (Park):

1. Hold the brake pedal down andset the parking brake.

See Parking Brake on page 9‑35for more information.

2. Hold the button on the shift leverand push the lever toward thefront of the vehicle into P (Park).

3. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.

4. Remove the key.

Leaving the Vehicle with theEngine Running

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.It could overheat and catch fire.

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehiclecan move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park onpage 9‑22. If you are towing atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9‑54.

If you have to leave the vehicle withthe engine running, the vehicle mustbe in P (Park) and the parkingbrake set.

Release the button and check thatthe shift lever cannot be moved outof P (Park).

Torque Lock

Torque lock is when the weight ofthe vehicle puts too much force onthe parking pawl in thetransmission. This happens whenparking on a hill and shifting thetransmission into P (Park) is notdone properly and then it is difficultto shift out of P (Park). To preventtorque lock, set the parking brakeand then shift into P (Park). To findout how, see “Shifting Into Park”listed previously.

If torque lock does occur, thevehicle may need to be pusheduphill by another vehicle to relievethe parking pawl pressure, so youcan shift out of P (Park).



Shifting out of ParkThis vehicle is equipped with anelectronic shift lock control system.The shift lock release isdesigned to:. Prevent ignition key removal

unless the shift lever is inP (Park) with the shift leverbutton fully released.

. Prevent movement of the shiftlever out of P (Park), unless theignition is in ON/RUN and thebrake pedal is applied.

The shift lock release is alwaysfunctional except in the case of anuncharged or low voltage (less than9-volt) battery.

If the vehicle has an unchargedbattery or a battery with low voltage,try charging or jump starting thebattery. See Jump Starting onpage 10‑85.

To shift out of P (Park):

1. Apply the brake pedal.

2. Turn the key to the ON/RUNposition.

3. Release the parking brake. SeeParking Brake on page 9‑35.

4. Press the shift lever button.

5. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If still unable to shift out of P (Park):

1. Fully release the shift leverbutton.

2. Hold the brake pedal down andpress the shift lever buttonagain.

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If the shift lever still cannot bemoved from P (Park), see “ShiftLock Manual Release” following.

Shift Lock Manual Release

The transmission has an electricpark lock called a shift lock manualrelease. The key must be in the ON/RUN position, and the brake pedalpressed so the shift lever can be

moved from the P (Park) position.If the battery has lost power, theshift lever cannot be moved fromP (Park) unless the shift lock manualrelease is disengaged manually.

To access the shift lock manualrelease:

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Pull the passenger side consoletrim away from the front half ofthe console to expose the shiftlever mechanism.



3. Remove the retainer and theshift lock manual release cover.

4. Push and hold the manualrelease lever toward the rear ofthe vehicle.

5. Press the select button andmove the shift lever to theN (Neutral) position.

6. Release the lever.

7. After the vehicle has beenmoved, align the shift lockmanual release cover plate andinstall the retainer so theautomatic transmission canoperate properly.

8. Place the console trim panel inthe original position, aligning thefasteners on the trim panel withthe slots in the console. Press inthe side trim until it clicks inplace.

The shift lever locks if it is movedback to the P (Park) position.

Parking (ManualTransmission)If the vehicle has a manualtransmission, before getting out ofthe vehicle, move the shift lever intoR (Reverse), and firmly apply theparking brake. Once the shift leverhas been placed into R (Reverse)with the clutch pedal pressed in,turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF,remove the key, and release theclutch.

If parking on a hill, or if the vehicleis pulling a trailer, see DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tips onpage 9‑54.

Parking over ThingsThat Burn

{ WARNING

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under thevehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass,or other things that can burn.

Active Fuel Management®

Vehicles with V8 engines and anautomatic transmission, except ZL1,have Active Fuel Management®.This system allows the engine tooperate on either all or half of itscylinders, depending on the drivingconditions.



When less power is required, suchas cruising at a constant vehiclespeed, the system will operate inthe half cylinder mode, allowing thevehicle to achieve better fueleconomy. When greater powerdemands are required, such asaccelerating from a stop, passing,or merging onto a freeway, thesystem will maintain full-cylinderoperation.

Engine Exhaust

{ WARNING

Engine exhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:. The vehicle idles in areaswith poor ventilation (parkinggarages, tunnels, deep snowthat may block underbodyairflow or tail pipes).

. The exhaust smells orsounds strange or different.

. The exhaust system leaksdue to corrosion or damage.

. The vehicle exhaust systemhas been modified, damaged,or improperly repaired.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or aftermarketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected orif it is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

. Drive it only with the windowscompletely down.

. Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosedarea such as a garage or abuilding that has no fresh airventilation.



Running the VehicleWhile ParkedIt is better not to park with theengine running.

If the vehicle is left with the enginerunning, follow the proper steps tobe sure the vehicle will not move.See Shifting Into Park on page 9‑22and Engine Exhaust on page 9‑25.If the vehicle has a manualtransmission, see Parking (ManualTransmission) on page 9‑24.

If parking on a hill and pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9‑54.

AutomaticTransmissionThe Driver Information Center (DIC)displays the current gear selected inthe lower left corner. When SportMode is active, an S is displayed.If Manual Mode or Electronic RangeSelect (ERS) Mode are active, an Mand the current gear selected (TapShift) or the maximum gear allowed(ERS Mode) are displayed next tothe M.

P (Park): This position locks therear wheels. It is the best position touse when starting the enginebecause the vehicle cannot moveeasily.

{ WARNING

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehiclecan move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park onpage 9‑22 and DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tipson page 9‑54.



Make sure the shift lever is fully inP (Park) before starting the engine.The vehicle has an automatictransmission shift lock controlsystem. The regular brake must befully applied first and then the shiftlever button pressed before shiftingfrom P (Park) when the ignition keyis in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift outof P (Park), ease pressure on theshift lever, then push the shift leverall the way into P (Park) as youmaintain brake application. Thenpress the shift lever button andmove the shift lever into anothergear. See Shifting out of Park onpage 9‑23.

R (Reverse): Use this gear toback up.

Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)while the vehicle is movingforward could damage thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Shift to R (Reverse) onlyafter the vehicle is stopped.

To rock the vehicle back and forth toget out of snow, ice, or sand withoutdamaging the transmission, see Ifthe Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9‑11.

N (Neutral): In this position, theengine does not connect with thewheels. To restart the engine whenthe vehicle is already moving, useN (Neutral) only. Also, useN (Neutral) when the vehicle isbeing towed.

{ WARNING

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shiftinto a drive gear while the engineis running at high speed.

Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) orN (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed maydamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Be sure theengine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.

D (Drive): This position is fornormal driving. It provides the bestfuel economy. When the ZL1 is inD (Drive), the first shift after start willbe from 1 (First) gear. Followingstarts will begin in 2 (Second) gear.

If more power is needed forpassing, and the vehicle is:. Going less than 56 km/h

(35 mph), push the acceleratorpedal about halfway down.

. Going about 56 km/h (35 mph) ormore, push the accelerator allthe way down.



Powertrain Braking (V6 andV8 Engines Except ZL1)

When driving on steep descentswith the shift lever in D (Drive) orM (Manual Mode) where frequentbraking is required, the transmissionwill shift down a gear to help holdvehicle speed and reduce brakewear. If the driver continues to pressthe brake, the transmission willdownshift until 3 (Third) gear isreached.

If the brake is released for sometime, the transmission will upshift agear. If the road levels out and theaccelerator pedal is pressed, thetransmission will upshift until theappropriate gear is reached.

Notice: If the vehicle seems toaccelerate slowly or not shiftgears when you go faster, andyou continue to drive the vehiclethat way, you could damage thetransmission. Have the vehicleserviced right away.

M (Manual Mode): This positionallows the driver to select gearsappropriate for current drivingconditions.

With the shift lever in M (ManualMode) position, vehicles with axlecode GW8 will enter ERS Mode.See Manual Mode on page 9‑29.

With the shift lever in M (ManualMode) position, and without usingthe Tap Shift controls on thesteering wheel, vehicles with anyaxle other than GW8 will be in SportMode. Sport Mode provides firmer,quicker shifting. The transmissionwill shift automatically until the TapShift controls are used. Tap Shiftactivates driver manual gearselection. See Manual Mode onpage 9‑29.

V6 Models without Axle GW8, V8Models Except ZL1

While driving in Sport Mode, if TapShift has not been activated, thetransmission determines when thevehicle is being driven in acompetitive manner. The

transmission may remain in a gearlonger than it would in the normaldriving mode based on throttle inputand vehicle lateral acceleration.If there is a rapid reduction inthrottle from a heavy throttleposition, the transmission willmaintain the current gear up to nearredline rpm. While braking, thetransmission will automaticallydownshift to the next lower gearkeeping engine speed aboveapproximately 3000 rpm. If thevehicle is then driven for a shorttime at a steady speed, and withouthigh cornering loads, thetransmission will up-shift one gearat a time, until 6 (Sixth) gear. Aftershifting to 6 (Sixth) gear, or comingto a complete stop, the transmissionwill return to normal Sport Modeshifting.

ZL1

While driving in Sport Mode, if TapShift has not been activated, thetransmission determines when thevehicle is being driven in acompetitive manner, in a straight



line or while turning. Thetransmission may remain in a gearlonger than it would in the normaldriving mode based on throttle inputand vehicle lateral acceleration.If there is a rapid reduction inthrottle from a heavy throttleposition, the transmission willmaintain the current gear up toapproximately 4600 rpm. Whilebraking, the transmission willautomatically downshift to the nextlower gear keeping engine speedbelow approximately 3000 rpm.If the vehicle is then driven for ashort time at a steady speed, andwithout high cornering loads, thetransmission will up-shift one gearat a time, until 6 (Sixth) gear. Aftershifting to 6 (Sixth) gear, or comingto a complete stop, the transmissionwill return to normal sport modeshifting.

If the vehicle detects aggressivecornering, even without a heavyapplication of the throttle, thetransmission will downshift and hold

a lower gear to near redline rpm, toaid in vehicle handling balance andto improve corner exit speeds.

Manual Mode

Electronic Range Select(ERS) Mode

Vehicles with axle code GW8 havean ERS Mode. ERS Mode allowsyou to choose the top-gear limit ofthe transmission with fully automaticgear selection. This can help controlthe vehicle's speed while drivingdownhill or towing a trailer. Thevehicle has an electronic shiftposition indicator within theinstrument cluster. When using theERS mode a number will displaynext to the M, indicating the currentmaximum gear allowed. Vehicleswith this feature have indicators onthe steering wheel. The controls areon the back of the steering wheel.

To use this feature:

1. Move the shift lever toM (Manual Mode).

2. Press the plus/minus paddles onthe back of the steering wheel,to increase or decrease the gearrange available.

When you shift from D (Drive) toM (Manual Mode), the transmissionwill shift to a lower gear range. Thehighest gear available for this rangeis displayed next to the M in theDIC. The number displayed in theDIC is the highest gear that thetransmission will be allowed tooperate in. This means that allgears below that number areavailable. For example, when4 (Fourth) is shown next to the M,1 (First) through 4 (Fourth) gears areautomatically shifted by the vehicle.The transmission will not shift into5 (Fifth) until the + (Plus) paddle isused or you shift back into D (Drive).

While in M (Manual Mode), thetransmission will prevent shifting toa lower gear range if the enginespeed is too high. The DIC will stillindicate the lower gear rangeselected, but the transmission will



not initiate the downshift until thevehicle has met a minimum speedrequirement.

Tap Shift

Vehicles with any axle other thanGW8 have a Tap Shift Mode. TapShift allows the driver to manuallycontrol the automatic transmission.To use Tap Shift, the shift lever mustbe in M (Manual Mode). Vehicleswith this feature have indicators onthe steering wheel. The controls areon the back of the steering wheel.Tap the left control to downshift, and

the right control to upshift. The DICdisplay indicates the gear thevehicle is in.

While in M (Manual Mode), thetransmission will prevent shifting toa lower gear if the engine speed istoo high. If the tap down − (Minus)paddle is held while the vehicleslows down, the M in the DIC willflash, and the downshift will beallowed when vehicle speed is lowenough. Continuing to hold the tapdown − (Minus) paddle will notcause the transmission to continuedownshifting. Each downshift mustbe requested separately byreleasing and reapplying the tapdown − (Minus) paddle.

English

Metric

ZL1 vehicles equipped with aHead-Up Display (HUD) also haveshift timing lights across the top ofthe display. As you approach a shiftpoint, the rows of lights grow closertogether. The transmission shouldbe shifted before the lights cometogether in the middle of the display.If the lights begin flashing, you haveexceeded the shift point. Shiftimmediately.



See Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 5‑25 and Head-Up Display(HUD) on page 5‑28.

When in Tap Shift Mode, the drivercan exit Tap Shift by holding theright (upshift) control fortwo seconds. The transmission willreturn to automatic shifting.

The driver may choose to brieflyenter Tap Shift Mode while inD (Drive). Tapping either the upshiftor downshift control will place thetransmission in Tap Shift Mode. Thedriver may then exit Tap Shift Modeby holding the upshift control fortwo seconds. The system will returnto automatic shifting after10 seconds of cruising at a steadyspeed, or when the vehicle comesto a stop.

The driver may use this for sportdriving or when climbing ordescending hills, to stay in gearlonger, or to downshift for morepower or engine braking. Thetransmission will only allow you toshift into gears appropriate for thevehicle speed and enginerevolutions per minute (rpm). Thetransmission will not automaticallyshift to the next higher gear if theengine rpm is too high. If shifting isprevented for any reason, themessage SHIFT DENIED willappear in the DIC, indicating thatthe transmission has not shiftedgears. While in the Tap Shift Mode,the transmission will notautomatically downshift on hardacceleration.

When coasting to a stop in Tap ShiftMode, the V6 transmission willautomatically downshift to 1 (First)gear, and the V8 transmission willautomatically downshift to2 (Second) gear. A 1 (First) gearstart can be selected using the TapShift controls on V8 models. Whenaccelerating from a stop, thetransmissions will hold these gearsuntil the driver manually selectshigher gears using the Tap Shiftcontrols.

When accelerating the vehicle froma stop in snowy and icy conditions,you may want to shift into2 (Second) gear. A higher gear ratioallows you to gain more traction onslippery surfaces. ZL1 vehicles mayalso be shifted into 3 (Third) gear.



Manual TransmissionShift Pattern (V8 Engines)

Shift Pattern (V6 Engine)

These are the shift patterns for thesix-speed manual transmissions.

To operate the transmission:

1 (First): Press the clutch pedaland shift into 1 (First). Then slowlylet up on the clutch pedal as youpress the accelerator pedal.

You can shift into 1 (First) when youare going less than 64 km/h(40 mph). If you come to a completestop and it is hard to shift into1 (First), put the shift lever in Neutraland let up on the clutch. Press theclutch pedal back down. Then shiftinto 1 (First).

2 (Second): Press the clutch pedalas you let up on the acceleratorpedal and shift into 2 (Second).Then, slowly let up on the clutchpedal as you press the acceleratorpedal.

3 (Third), 4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth), and6 (Sixth): Shift into 3 (Third),4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth), and 6 (Sixth) thesame way you do for 2 (Second).Slowly let up on the clutch pedal asyou press the accelerator pedal.



To stop, let up on the acceleratorpedal and press the brake pedal.Just before the vehicle stops, pressthe clutch pedal and the brakepedal, and shift to Neutral.

Neutral: Use this position whenyou start or idle the engine. Theshift lever is in Neutral when it iscentered in the shift pattern, not inany gear.

R (Reverse): To back up, pressdown the clutch pedal and shift intoR (Reverse). On V8 models, applypressure to get the lever past5 (Fifth) and 6 (Sixth) intoR (Reverse). Let up on the clutchpedal slowly while pressing theaccelerator pedal.

One to Four Shift Message(V8 Only)

Driver Information Center

When this message comes on, youcan only shift from 1 (First) to4 (Fourth) instead of 1 (First) to2 (Second). The message will bedisplayed in the Driver InformationCenter.

You must complete the shift into4 (Fourth) to turn off this feature.This helps you get the best possiblefuel economy.

After shifting to 4 (Fourth), you maydownshift to a lower gear if youprefer.

Notice: Forcing the shift leverinto any gear except 4 (Fourth)when the 1— 4 SHIFT messagecomes on may damage thetransmission. Shift only from1 (First) to 4 (Fourth) when themessage comes on.

This message will come on when:. The engine coolant temperature

is higher than 76°C (169°F).. The vehicle is accelerating from

a stop and going 24 to 31 km/h(15 to 19 mph).

. The vehicle is at 21 percentthrottle or less.



English

Metric

ZL1 vehicles equipped with aHead-Up Display (HUD) also haveshift timing lights across the top ofthe display. As you approach a shiftpoint, the rows of lights grow closertogether. The transmission shouldbe shifted before the lights cometogether in the middle of the display.If the lights begin flashing, you haveexceeded the shift point. Shiftimmediately.

See Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 5‑25 and Head-Up Display(HUD) on page 5‑28.

Brakes

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)This vehicle has the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), an advancedelectronic braking system that helpsprevent a braking skid.

When the engine is started and thevehicle begins to drive away, ABSchecks itself. A momentary motor orclicking noise might be heard whilethis test is going on, and it mighteven be noticed that the brakepedal moves a little. This is normal.

If there is a problem with ABS, thiswarning light stays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Lighton page 5‑21.



If driving safely on a wet road and itbecomes necessary to slam on thebrakes and continue braking toavoid a sudden obstacle, acomputer senses that the wheelsare slowing down. If one of thewheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work thebrakes at each wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressureto each wheel, as required, fasterthan any driver could. This can helpthe driver steer around the obstaclewhile braking hard.

As the brakes are applied, thecomputer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controlsbraking pressure accordingly.

Remember: ABS does not changethe time needed to get a foot up tothe brake pedal or always decreasestopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you,there will not be enough time toapply the brakes if that vehicle

suddenly slows or stops. Alwaysleave enough room up ahead tostop, even with ABS.

Using ABS

Do not pump the brakes. Just holdthe brake pedal down firmly and letABS work. You might hear the ABSpump or motor operating and feelthe brake pedal pulsate, but this isnormal.

Braking in Emergencies

ABS allows the driver to steer andbrake at the same time. In manyemergencies, steering can helpmore than even the very bestbraking.

Parking Brake

To apply the parking brake, pull upon the parking brake handle. It isnot necessary to push in on therelease button while applying theparking brake. If the ignition is in theON/RUN position, the brake systemwarning light will come on. SeeBrake System Warning Light onpage 5‑20.

To release the parking brake:

1. Hold the brake pedal down.



2. Pull the parking brake handle upuntil you can press the releasebutton.

3. Hold the release button in asyou move the brake handle allthe way down.

Notice: Driving with the parkingbrake on can overheat the brakesystem and cause prematurewear or damage to brake systemparts. Make sure that the parkingbrake is fully released and thebrake warning light is off beforedriving.

Driving with the parking brakeapplied will cause a warning chimeto sound and the RELEASEPARKING BRAKE message toappear in the DIC. The message willremain on until:. The parking brake is released.. The vehicle comes to a stop.

If you are towing a trailer andparking on a hill, see DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tips onpage 9‑54.

Brake AssistThis vehicle has a brake assistfeature designed to assist the driverin stopping or decreasing vehiclespeed in emergency drivingconditions. This feature uses thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module to supplement thepower brake system underconditions where the driver hasquickly and forcefully applied thebrake pedal in an attempt to quicklystop or slow down the vehicle. Thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module increases brakepressure at each corner of thevehicle until the ABS activates.Minor brake pedal pulsation orpedal movement during this time isnormal and the driver shouldcontinue to apply the brake pedal asthe driving situation dictates. Thebrake assist feature willautomatically disengage when thebrake pedal is released or brakepedal pressure is quicklydecreased.

Hill Start Assist (HSA)Manual transmission vehicles havea Hill Start Assist (HSA) feature,which may be useful when thevehicle is stopped on a grade. Thisfeature is designed to prevent thevehicle from rolling, either forward orrearward, during vehicle drive off.HSA will be automatically activatedafter completely stopping thevehicle, with the clutch in, on agrade. During the transition fromreleasing the brake pedal toaccelerating to drive off on a grade,HSA holds the braking pressure toprevent rolling. The brakes willautomatically release when theaccelerator pedal is applied withinthe two-second window. HSA willnot activate if the vehicle is in adrive gear and facing downhill or ifthe vehicle is facing uphill and inR (Reverse).



Ride Control Systems

Traction ControlSystem (TCS)The vehicle has a Traction ControlSystem (TCS) that limits wheel spin.The system utilizes engine andbraking controls to control wheelspin during acceleration at alldriving speeds for maximum drivercontrol regardless of conditions.When the system senses impendingwheel slip during acceleration, itsignals the throttle control to reducedrive wheel torque. Under extremesituations, such as going frompavement to ice during acceleration,the system will selectively apply thebrakes to maintain control. Thesystem may be heard or felt while itis working, but this is normal.

The TCS/StabiliTrak warning lightflashes when the TCS is limitingwheel spin.

The TCS/StabiliTrak warning lightcomes on solid if there is a problemwith the traction control system. SeeTraction Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light on page 5‑22.If the light stays on, see your dealerfor service. When the TCS/StabiliTrak warning light is on, thesystem will not limit wheel spin.Adjust your driving accordingly.

TCS automatically comes onwhenever the vehicle is started. Tolimit wheel spin, especially inslippery road conditions, the systemshould always be left on, but it maybe necessary to turn the system offif the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud,or snow and rocking the vehicle isrequired. Also, turn TCS off while indeep snow or on loose gravel, toassist vehicle motion at lowerspeeds. See If the Vehicle Is Stuckon page 9‑11. See also WinterDriving on page 9‑10 for informationon using TCS when driving in snowyor icy conditions.

To turn the system off, press andrelease the TCS/StabiliTrak buttonon the console in front of the shiftlever.



The TCS warning light comes onwhen the TCS is off. Press andrelease the button again to turn thesystem back on. For information onturning StabiliTrak off and on, see“StabiliTrak System” following.

StabiliTrak® SystemThe vehicle has an electronicstability control system calledStabiliTrak. It is an advancedcomputer controlled system thatassists with directional control of thevehicle in difficult driving conditions.

StabiliTrak activates when thecomputer senses a discrepancybetween the intended path and thedirection the vehicle is actuallytraveling. StabiliTrak selectivelyapplies braking pressure at any one

of the vehicle's brakes to help steerthe vehicle in the direction whichyou are steering.

If cruise control is being used whenStabiliTrak activates, the cruisecontrol will automatically disengage.Press the cruise control button toreengage when road conditionsallow. See Cruise Control onpage 9‑44.

The Traction Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak button is on the consolein front of the shift lever.

When the system activates, theTCS/StabiliTrak warning lightflashes on the instrument cluster.You may also hear a noise or feelvibration in the brake pedal. This isnormal. Continue to steer thevehicle in the intended direction.

If there is a problem detected withStabiliTrak, a SERVICESTABILITRAK message displays onthe DIC and the StabiliTrak/TCSwarning light on the instrumentcluster comes on. When thismessage and warning light display,the system is not operational.



Driving should be adjustedaccordingly. See Ride ControlSystem Messages on page 5‑38and Traction Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light on page 5‑22.

StabiliTrak comes on automaticallywhenever the vehicle is started. Thesystem should be left on to helpassist with directional control of thevehicle. If StabiliTrak needs to beturned off, press and hold the TCS/StabiliTrak button until the TractionControl Off light and the StabiliTrakOff light come on in the instrumentcluster. TCS will also be turned off.

If the system has been turned off,press and release the TCS/StabiliTrak button to turn bothsystems back on.

Engine Drag Control (EDC)

EDC improves vehicle stability bysensing if there is a difference inspeed between the free rolling frontwheels and the rear drive wheelsthat often occurs when the drivertakes their foot off the acceleratorpedal on slippery surfaces (snow,ice, etc.). When this is detected,EDC sends more torque to the rearwheels to make sure all four wheelsare spinning at similar speeds,making the vehicle more stable.

Competitive Driving ModeCompetitive Driving Mode,Performance Traction Management(PTM), and Launch Control aresystems designed to allowincreased performance whileaccelerating and/or cornering. Thisis accomplished by regulating andoptimizing the engine, brakes, and

suspension performance. Thesemodes are for use at a closedcourse race track and are notintended for use on public roads.They will not compensate for adriver’s inexperience or lack offamiliarity with the race track.Drivers who prefer to allow thesystem to have more control of theengine, brake, and suspension areadvised to turn the normal TCS andStabiliTrak systems on.

Notice: Do not attempt to shiftwhen the drive wheels arespinning and do not havetraction. This may cause damageto the transmission. Damagecaused by misuse of the vehicleis not covered by the vehiclewarranty. See the warranty bookfor additional information.

Competitive Driving Mode (SSand ZL1 Convertible Only)

Competitive Driving Mode allows fullengine power while the StabiliTraksystem helps maintain directionalcontrol of the vehicle by selective



brake application. In this mode, TCSis off and Launch Control isavailable. Adjust your driving styleto account for the available enginepower. See “Launch Control (V8with Manual Transmissions Only)”later in this section.

These lights are on when thevehicle is in the CompetitiveDriving Mode.

This optional handling mode can beselected by pressing the TCS/StabiliTrak button on the consolequickly two times. The appropriatemessage displays in the DriverInformation Center (DIC). See RideControl System Messages onpage 5‑38.

When the TCS/StabiliTrak button ispressed again, the TCS andStabiliTrak systems are on. Theappropriate message displaysbriefly in the DIC.

Performance TractionManagement (PTM) (ZL1Coupe Only)

PTM integrates the TCS,StabiliTrak, and Selective RideControl systems to provideimproved and consistentperformance when cornering. Theamount of available engine power isbased on the mode selected, trackconditions, driver skill, and theradius of each corner.

These lights are on when thevehicle is in the PTM Mode.

This optional handling mode can beselected by pressing the TCS/StabiliTrak button on the consolequickly two times. The appropriatemessage displays in the DIC. SeeRide Control System Messages onpage 5‑38.

To experience the performancebenefit of this system, after enteringa curve and at the point where thedriver would normally start toincrease acceleration, theaccelerator pedal can be fully



pressed. The PTM system willmodify the level of engine power fora smooth and consistent corner exit.

To select a mode while in PTM,push the Selective Ride Control/PTM − TOUR or + SPORT buttonon the center console.

The PTM system contains fivemodes. These modes are selectedby pressing the Selective RideControl/PTM − TOUR or + SPORTbutton on the center console. Thedriver scrolls up or down throughmodes 1–5 by pressing the − TOURor + SPORT button.

The following is a DIC displaydescription and the recommendedusage of each mode.

PERF TRACTION 1 – WET /ACTIVE HANDLING ON. Intended for all driver skill levels.. Wet or damp conditions only —

not intended for use in heavyrain or standing water.

. StabiliTrak is on and enginepower is reduced based onconditions.

PERF TRACTION 2 – DRY /ACTIVE HANDLING ON. For use by less experienced

drivers or while learning a newtrack.

. Dry conditions only.

. StabiliTrak is on and enginepower is slightly reduced basedon conditions.

PERF TRACTION 3 – SPORT 1/ ACTIVE HANDLING ON. For use by drivers who are

familiar with the track.

. Requires more driving skill thanmode 2.

. Dry conditions only.

. StabiliTrak is on and moreengine power is available than inmode 2.

PERF TRACTION 4 – SPORT 2/ ACTIVE HANDLING OFF. For use by drivers who are

familiar with the track.. Requires more driving skill than

modes 2 or 3.. Dry conditions only.. StabiliTrak is off and available

engine power is the same asmode 3.

PERF TRACTION 5 – RACE /ACTIVE HANDLING OFF. For use by drivers who are

familiar with the track.. Requires more driving skill than

other modes.. Dry conditions only.



. StabiliTrak is off and enginepower is available for maximumcornering speed.

Use mode 5 for most consistentperformance during drag strip use.

When the TCS/StabiliTrak button ispressed again, the vehicle exitsPTM mode and the TCS andStabiliTrak systems are on.

Launch Control (V8 withManual Transmissions Only)

A Launch Control feature isavailable, within Competitive DrivingMode or PTM, on vehicles with amanual transmission to allow thedriver to achieve high levels ofvehicle acceleration in a straightline. Launch Control is a form oftraction control that manages tirespin while launching the vehicle.This feature is intended for useduring closed course race eventswhere consistent zero to sixtyand quarter mile times aredesirable.

Launch Control is only availablewhen the following criteria are met:. Competitive Driving Mode is

selected or any of the PTMmodes are selected.

. The vehicle is not moving.

. The steering wheel is pointingstraight.

. The clutch is pressed and thevehicle is in 1 (First) gear.

. The accelerator pedal is rapidlyapplied to wide open throttle.

The Launch Control feature willinitially limit engine speed as thedriver rapidly applies the acceleratorpedal to wide open throttle.A smooth, quick release of theclutch, while maintaining the fullypressed accelerator pedal, willmanage wheel slip. Complete shiftsare described in ManualTransmission on page 9‑32.

After the vehicle is launched, thesystem continues in CompetitiveDriving Mode or PTM.

Competitive Driving Mode, PTM,and Launch Control are systemsdesigned for a closed course racetrack and not intended for use onpublic roads. The systems are notintended to compensate for lack ofdriver experience or familiarity withthe race track.

ZL1 Coupe Only

Use mode 5 for the most consistentperformance during drag strip use.

Limited-Slip Rear AxleVehicles with a limited-slip rear axlecan give more traction on snow,mud, ice, sand, or gravel. Whentraction is low, this feature allowsthe drive wheel with the mosttraction to move the vehicle. Thelimited-slip rear axle also gives thedriver enhanced control whencornering hard or completing amaneuver, such as a lane change.



Selective Ride Control

ZL1 Only

The vehicle has a ride controlsystem called Magnetic SelectiveRide Control. The system providesthe following performance benefits:. Reduced Impact Harshness. Improved Road Isolation. Improved High-Speed Stability. Improved Handling Response. Better Control of Body Ride

Motions

The Selective Ride buttons are onthe center console. Press to selectthe suspension of your choice. Theindicator light will illuminate thecurrent suspension setting.

TOUR: Use for normal city andhighway driving. The TOUR buttonselects a suspension and ElectricPower Steering (EPS) calibrationthat provides a smooth, soft ride.

SPORT: Use where road conditionsor personal preference demandmore control. The SPORT buttonselects a suspension and EPScalibration that provides more “feel,”or response to the road conditions.

The setting can be changed at anytime. Based on road conditions,steering wheel angle, and thevehicle speed, the systemautomatically adjusts to provide thebest handling while providing asmooth ride. The Tour and Sportmodes will feel similar on a smoothroad. Select a new setting wheneverdriving conditions change.

The Selective Ride button indicatorlights will not illuminate when anyPTM mode is selected. When thismode is selected, pressing theSelective Ride button will changethe PTM mode and the suspensionsetting will be determinedautomatically. See CompetitiveDriving Mode on page 9‑39.

If a malfunction occurs with theSelective Ride Control system, theappropriate messages will bedisplayed in the DIC. See RideControl System Messages onpage 5‑38.



Cruise ControlWith cruise control, the vehicle canmaintain a speed of about 40 km/h(25 mph) or more without keepingyour foot on the accelerator. Cruisecontrol does not work at speedsbelow 40 km/h (25 mph).

{ WARNING

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely ata steady speed. So, do not usethe cruise control on windingroads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerouson slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Do not usecruise control on slippery roads.

5 (On/Off): Turns the cruisecontrol system on and off. A whiteindicator light comes on in theinstrument cluster.

\ (Cancel): Press to disengagecruise control without erasing theset speed from memory.

RES/+ (Resume/Accelerate):Move the thumbwheel up to makethe vehicle resume to a previouslyset speed or to accelerate to ahigher speed.

SET/− (Set/Coast): Move thethumbwheel down to set a speed orto make the vehicle decelerate.

Setting Cruise Control

If5 is on when not in use, it couldget bumped and go into cruise whennot desired. Keep the cruise controlswitch off when cruise is notbeing used.

1. Press5 to turn cruisecontrol on.

2. Get to the speed desired.

3. Press the thumbwheel towardSET/− and release it.

4. Take your foot off the acceleratorpedal.

When the cruise control has beenset to the desired speed, a greencruise control indicator appears onthe instrument cluster.

When the brakes are applied, thecruise control shuts off.



Resuming a Set Speed

If the cruise control is set at adesired speed and then the brakesare applied, the cruise control isdisengaged without erasing the setspeed from memory.

The indicator light on the instrumentcluster goes out when the cruise isno longer engaged. Once thevehicle speed reaches about40 km/h (25 mph) or more, press thethumbwheel up toward RES/+briefly on the steering wheel. Thevehicle returns to the previous setspeed and stays there.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated:. Press the thumbwheel up toward

RES/+ and hold it until thevehicle accelerates to thedesired speed, and thenrelease it.

. To increase the speed in smallamounts, press the thumbwheelup toward RES/+ briefly andthen release it. Each time this isdone, the vehicle goes about1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster.

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated:. Press the thumbwheel toward

SET/− and hold until the desiredlower speed is reached, thenrelease it.

. To slow down in small amounts,press the thumbwheel towardSET/− briefly. Each time this isdone, the vehicle goes about1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal toincrease the vehicle speed. Whenyou take your foot off the pedal, thevehicle will slow down to theprevious set cruise control speed.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well the cruise control workson hills depends upon the vehicle'sspeed, load, and the steepness ofthe hills. When going up steep hills,you might have to step on theaccelerator pedal to maintain thevehicle speed. When goingdownhill, you might have to brake orshift to a lower gear to maintain thevehicle speed. When the brakes areapplied the cruise control isdisengaged.



Ending Cruise Control

There are three ways to end thecruise control:. To disengage cruise control,

step lightly on the brake pedal orclutch. The indicator light on theinstrument cluster goes out.

. Press\ on the steering wheel.

. To turn off cruise control, press5 on the steering wheel.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed iserased from memory if 5 is pressedor if the vehicle is turned off.

Object DetectionSystems

Ultrasonic Parking AssistThe Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist(URPA) system assists the driverwith parking and avoiding objectswhile in R (Reverse). URPAoperates at speeds less than 8 km/h(5 mph). The sensors on the rearbumper detect objects up to 2.5 m(8 ft) behind the vehicle, and at least20 cm (8 in) off the ground.

{ WARNING

The URPA system does notdetect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, animals, or objectsbelow the bumper or that are tooclose or too far from the vehicle.It is not available at speedsgreater than 8 km/h (5 mph). Toprevent injury, death, or vehicledamage, even with URPA, always

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

check the area around the vehicleand check all mirrors beforebacking.

How the System Works

URPA comes on automatically whenthe shift lever is moved intoR (Reverse). A single tone soundsto indicate the system is working.

URPA operates only at speeds lessthan 8 km/h (5 mph).

An obstacle is indicated by audiblebeeps. The interval between thebeeps becomes shorter as thevehicle gets closer to the obstacle.When the distance is less than30 cm (12 in), the beeping is acontinuous tone for five seconds.

To be detected, objects must be atleast 20 cm (8 in) off the ground andbelow trunk level. Objects must alsobe within 2.5 m (8 ft) from the rear



bumper. The distance objects canbe detected may be less duringwarmer or humid weather.

Turning the System On and Off

The URPA system can be turned onand off using the infotainmentsystem controls. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑43.

When the system is off, PARKASSIST OFF displays on the DriverInformation Center (DIC). Themessage disappears after a shortperiod of time.

URPA defaults to the on settingeach time the vehicle is started.

When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly

The following messages may bedisplayed on the DIC:

SERVICE PARKING ASSIST: Ifthis message occurs, check thefollowing conditions:. The ultrasonic sensors are not

clean. Keep the vehicle's rearbumper free of mud, dirt, snow,

ice, and slush. For cleaninginstructions, see Exterior Careon page 10‑89.

. The park assist sensors arecovered by frost or ice. Frost orice can form around and behindthe sensors and may not alwaysbe seen; this can occur afterwashing the vehicle in coldweather. The message may notclear until the frost or ice hasmelted.

If the above conditions do not exist,take the vehicle to your dealer torepair the system.

PARK ASSIST OFF: If the URPAsystem does not activate due to atemporary condition, the messagedisplays on the DIC. This can occurunder the following conditions:. The driver has disabled the

system.

. An object was hanging out of thetrunk during the last drive cycle.Once the object is removed,URPA will return to normaloperation.

. The bumper is damaged. Takethe vehicle to your dealer torepair the system.

. Other conditions, such asvibrations from a jackhammer orthe compression of air brakes ona very large truck, are affectingsystem performance.

Rear VisionCamera (RVC)Read this entire section beforeusing the RVC system.

{ WARNING

The RVC system does not displaychildren, pedestrians, bicyclists,animals, or any other objectlocated outside the camera's field

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

of view, below the bumper,or under the vehicle. Perceiveddistances may be different fromactual distances. Do not back thevehicle using only the RVCscreen, during longer, higherspeed backing maneuvers,or where there could be crosstraffic. Failure to use proper carebefore backing may result ininjury, death, or vehicle damage.Always check behind and aroundthe vehicle before backing.

The rear vision camera system isdesigned to help the driver whenbacking up by displaying a view ofthe area behind the vehicle. Whenthe key is in ON/RUN and the drivershifts the vehicle into R (Reverse),the video image automaticallyappears on the infotainment screenin the center stack. Once the drivershifts out of R (Reverse), the videoimage automatically disappears.

Rear Vision Camera Location

The camera is above the licenseplate.

The area displayed by the camera islimited. It does not display objectsthat are close to either corner orunder the bumper and can varydepending on vehicle orientation orroad conditions. The distance of theimage that appears on the screen isdifferent from the actual distance.

The following illustration shows thefield of view that the cameraprovides.

1. View displayed by the camera.

1. View displayed by the camera.

2. Corner of the rear bumper.



When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly

The RVC system may not workproperly or display a clear image if:. It is dark.. The sun or the beam of

headlamps are shining directlyinto the camera lens.

. Ice, snow, mud, or anything elsebuilds up on the camera lens.Clean the lens, rinse it withwater, and wipe it with a softcloth.

. The back of the vehicle is in anaccident. The position andmounting angle of the cameracan change or the camera canbe affected. Be sure to have thecamera and its position andmounting angle checked at yourdealer.

FuelUse of the recommended fuel is animportant part of the propermaintenance of this vehicle. To helpkeep the engine clean and maintainoptimum vehicle performance, werecommend the use of gasolineadvertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline.

Look for the TOP TIER label on thefuel pump to ensure gasoline meetsenhanced detergency standardsdeveloped by auto companies. A listof marketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be found atwww.toptiergas.com. TOP TIERgasoline is only available in the U.S.and Canada.

The eighth digit of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) showsthe code letter or number thatidentifies the vehicle's engine. TheVIN is at the top left of theinstrument panel. See VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) onpage 12‑1.

Recommended FuelIf the vehicle has the 3.6L V6 engine(VIN Code 3), use regular unleadedgasoline with a posted octane ratingof 87 or higher. If the octane ratingis less than 87, an audible knocking



noise, commonly referred to asspark knock, might be heard whendriving. If this occurs, use agasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher as soon as possible. If heavyknocking is heard when usinggasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher, the engine needs service.

If the vehicle has the 6.2L V8 engine(VIN Code W) or the 6.2L V8 engine(VIN Code J), use premiumunleaded gasoline with a postedoctane rating of 91 or higher. Forbest performance, use premiumunleaded gasoline with a postedoctane rating of 93. You can alsouse regular unleaded gasoline ratedat 87 octane or higher, but thevehicle's acceleration could beslightly reduced, and a slight audibleknocking noise, commonly referredto as spark knock, might be heard.If the octane rating is less than 87, aheavy knocking noise might beheard when driving. If this occurs,use a gasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher as soon as possible.Otherwise, you could damage the

engine. If heavy knocking is heardwhen using gasoline rated at87 octane or higher, the engineneeds service.

Required Fuel (ZL1 Only)

If the vehicle has the 6.2L V8 engine(VIN Code P), use premiumunleaded gasoline with a postedoctane rating of 91 or higher. Forbest performance, use premiumunleaded gasoline with a postedoctane rating of 93. You can alsouse regular unleaded gasoline ratedat 87 octane or higher, but thevehicle's acceleration could beslightly reduced, and a slight audibleknocking noise, commonly referredto as spark knock, might be heard.If the octane rating is less than 87, aheavy knocking noise might beheard when driving. If this occurs,use a gasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher as soon as possible.Otherwise, you could damage theengine. If heavy knocking is heardwhen using gasoline rated at87 octane or higher, the engineneeds service.

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline should meetASTM specification D 4814. Somegasolines contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). We recommendagainst the use of gasolinescontaining MMT. See Fuel Additiveson page 9‑51.

California FuelRequirementsIf the vehicle is certified to meetCalifornia Emissions Standards, it isdesigned to operate on fuels thatmeet California specifications. Seethe underhood emission controllabel. If this fuel is not available instates adopting California EmissionsStandards, the vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meetingfederal specifications, but emissioncontrol system performance mightbe affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp could turn on and thevehicle might fail a smog‐check test.



See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑17. If this occurs, return toyour authorized dealer for diagnosis.If it is determined that the conditionis caused by the type of fuel used,repairs might not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Fuels in ForeignCountriesNever use leaded gasoline or anyother fuel not recommended in theprevious text on fuel. Costly repairscaused by use of improper fuelwould not be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask anauto club, or contact a major oilcompany that does business in thecountry where you will be driving.

Fuel AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolinesin the United States are nowrequired to contain additives thathelp prevent engine and fuel systemdeposits from forming, allowing the

emission control system to workproperly. In most cases, nothingshould have to be added to the fuel.However, some gasolines containonly the minimum amount ofadditive required to meet U.S.Environmental Protection Agencyregulations. To help keep fuelinjectors and intake valves cleanand avoid problems due to dirtyinjectors or valves, look for gasolinethat is advertised as TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline. Look for theTOP TIER label on the fuel pump toensure gasoline meets enhanceddetergency standards developed bythe auto companies. A list ofmarketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be found atwww.toptiergas.com.

For customers who do not use TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline regularly,one bottle of GM Fuel SystemTreatment PLUS, added to the fueltank at every engine oil change, canhelp clean deposits from fuelinjectors and intake valves. GM FuelSystem Treatment PLUS is the only

gasoline additive recommended byGeneral Motors. It is available atyour dealer.

Gasolines containing oxygenates,such as ethers and ethanol, andreformulated gasolines might beavailable in your area. Werecommend that you use thesegasolines, if they comply with thespecifications described earlier.However, E85 (85% ethanol) andother fuels containing more than15% ethanol must not be used invehicles that were not designed forthose fuels.

Notice: This vehicle was notdesigned for fuel that containsmethanol. Do not use fuelcontaining methanol. It cancorrode metal parts in the fuelsystem and also damage plasticand rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under thevehicle warranty.

Some gasolines that are notreformulated for low emissions cancontain an octane-enhancing



additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendantwhere you buy gasoline whether thefuel contains MMT. We recommendagainst the use of such gasolines.Fuels containing MMT can reducespark plug life and affect emissioncontrol system performance. Themalfunction indicator lamp mightturn on. If this occurs, return to yourdealer for service.

Filling the Tank

{ WARNING

Fuel vapors and fuel fires burnviolently and can cause injury ordeath.

. To help avoid injuries to youand others, read and followall the instructions on the fuelpump island.

. Turn off the engine whenrefueling.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Keep sparks, flames, andsmoking materials awayfrom fuel.

. Do not leave the fuel pumpunattended.

. Do not reenter the vehiclewhile pumping fuel.

. Keep children away from thefuel pump and never letchildren pump fuel.

. Fuel can spray out if the fuelcap is opened too quickly.This spray can happen if thetank is nearly full, and ismore likely in hot weather.Open the fuel cap slowly andwait for any hiss noise to stopthen unscrew the cap allthe way

The fuel cap is behind a hinged fueldoor on the passenger side of thevehicle. To open the fuel door, pushthe rearward center edge in andrelease and it will open.

To unlock the fuel cap on vehiclesequipped with the locking fuel cap,use the key that is part of theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter.

When reinstalling the cap, turn itclockwise until it clicks, otherwisethe malfunction indicator lamp mayturn on. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 5‑17.



Be careful not to spill fuel. Do nottop off or overfill the tank and wait afew seconds after you have finishedpumping before removing thenozzle. Clean fuel from paintedsurfaces as soon as possible. SeeExterior Care on page 10‑89.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn itclockwise until it clicks. Make surethe cap is fully installed. Thediagnostic system can determine ifthe fuel cap has been left off orimproperly installed. This wouldallow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 5‑17.

{ WARNING

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove thenozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel byshutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

Notice: If a new fuel cap isneeded, be sure to get the righttype of cap from your dealer. Thewrong type of fuel cap might notfit properly, might cause themalfunction indicator lamp tolight, and could damage the fueltank and emissions system. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑17.

Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ WARNING

Filling a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle can causefuel vapors that can ignite eitherby static electricity or othermeans. You or others could bebadly burned and the vehiclecould be damaged. Always:

. Use approved fuelcontainers.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Remove container fromvehicle, trunk, or pickup bedbefore filling.

. Place container on theground.

. Place the nozzle inside the fillopening of the containerbefore dispensing fuel, andkeep it in contact with the fillopening until filling iscomplete.

. Do not smoke whilepumping fuel.



Towing

General TowingInformationOnly use towing equipment that hasbeen designed for the vehicle.Contact your dealer or traileringdealer for assistance with preparingthe vehicle for towing a trailer. Readthe entire section before towing atrailer.

For towing a disabled vehicle, seeTowing the Vehicle on page 10‑88.For towing the vehicle behindanother vehicle such as a motorhome, see Recreational VehicleTowing on page 10‑88.

Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips

Driving with a Trailer

When towing a trailer:. Become familiar with the state

and local laws that applyspecifically to trailer towing.

. Do not tow a trailer during thefirst 800 km (500mi), to preventdamage to the engine, axle orother parts.

. Then, during the first 800 km(500 mi) trailer towing, do notdrive over 80 km/h (50 mph) anddo not make starts at full throttle.

. Vehicles with automatictransmissions can tow in D(Drive) but M (Manual Mode) isrecommended. See ManualMode on page 9‑29. Use a lowergear if the transmission shiftstoo often. For vehicles with amanual transmission, it is betternot to use the highest gear.

{ WARNING

When towing a trailer, exhaustgases may collect at the rear ofthe vehicle and enter if theliftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-mostwindow is open.

When towing a trailer:. Do not drive with the liftgate,trunk/hatch, or rear-mostwindow open.


. Also adjust the ClimateControl system to a settingthat brings in only outside air.See “Climate ControlSystems” in the Index.

For more information aboutCarbon Monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑25.



Towing a trailer requires a certainamount of experience. Thecombination you are driving islonger and not as responsive as thevehicle itself. Get acquainted withthe handling and braking of the rigbefore setting out for the open road.

Before starting, check all trailer hitchparts and attachments, safetychains, electrical connectors, lamps,tires and mirrors. If the trailer haselectric brakes, start thecombination moving and then applythe trailer brake controller by handto be sure the brakes work.

During the trip, check occasionallyto be sure that the load is secureand the lamps and any trailerbrakes still work.

Towing with a Stability ControlSystem

When towing, the sound of thestability control system might beheard. The system is reacting to thevehicle movement caused by the

trailer, which mainly occurs duringcornering. This is normal whentowing heavier trailers.

Following Distance

Stay at least twice as far behind thevehicle ahead as you would whendriving the vehicle without a trailer.This can help to avoid situationsthat require heavy braking andsudden turns.

Passing

More passing distance is neededwhen towing a trailer. Because therig is longer, it is necessary to gofarther beyond the passed vehiclebefore returning to the lane.

Backing Up

Hold the bottom of the steeringwheel with one hand. To move thetrailer to the left, move your hand tothe left. To move the trailer to theright, move your hand to the right.Always back up slowly and,if possible, have someoneguide you.

Making Turns

Notice: Making very sharp turnswhile trailering could cause thetrailer to come in contact with thevehicle. The vehicle could bedamaged. Avoid making verysharp turns while trailering.

When turning with a trailer, makewider turns than normal so thetrailer will not strike soft shoulders,curbs, road signs, trees or otherobjects. Use the turn signal well inadvance and avoid jerky or suddenmaneuvers.

Turn Signals When Towing aTrailer

The turn signal indicators on theinstrument cluster flash wheneversignaling a turn or lane change.Properly hooked up, the trailerlamps also flash, telling otherdrivers the vehicle is turning,changing lanes or stopping.

When towing a trailer, the arrows onthe instrument cluster flash for turnseven if the bulbs on the trailer are



burned out. Check occasionally tobe sure the trailer bulbs are stillworking.

Driving on Grades

Reduce speed and shift to a lowergear before starting down a long orsteep downgrade. If thetransmission is not shifted down, thebrakes might have to be used somuch that they would get hot and nolonger work well.

The vehicle can tow in D (Drive).Use a lower gear if the transmissionshifts too often.

When towing at high altitude onsteep uphill grades, engine coolantboils at a lower temperature than atnormal altitudes. If the engine isturned off immediately after towingat high altitude on steep uphillgrades, the vehicle could showsigns similar to engine overheating.To avoid this, let the engine runwhile parked, preferably on levelground, with the transmission inP (Park) for a few minutes before

turning the engine off. If theoverheat warning comes on, seeEngine Overheating on page 10‑28.

Parking on Hills

{ WARNING

Parking the vehicle on a hill withthe trailer attached can bedangerous. If something goeswrong, the rig could start to move.People can be injured, and boththe vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged. When possible, alwayspark the rig on a flat surface.

If parking the rig on a hill:

1. Press the brake pedal, but donot shift into P (Park) yet. Turnthe wheels into the curb if facingdownhill or into traffic if facinguphill.

2. Have someone place chocksunder the trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are inplace, release the brake pedaluntil the chocks absorb the load.

4. Reapply the brake pedal. Thenapply the parking brake and shiftinto P (Park) for vehicles with anautomatic transmission or intogear for vehicles with a manualtransmission.

5. Release the brake pedal.

Leaving After Parking on a Hill

1. Apply and hold the brake pedalwhile you:. Start the engine.. Shift into a gear.. Release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer isclear of the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick upand store the chocks.



Maintenance When TrailerTowing

The vehicle needs service moreoften when pulling a trailer. See theMaintenance Schedule onpage 11‑2. Things that areespecially important in traileroperation are automatictransmission fluid, engine oil, axlelubricant, belts, cooling system andbrake system. Inspect these beforeand during the trip.

Check periodically to see that allhitch nuts and bolts are tight.

Engine Cooling When TrailerTowing

The cooling system may temporarilyoverheat during severe operatingconditions. See Engine Overheatingon page 10‑28.

Trailer Towing(Except ZL1)Before pulling a trailer, there arethree important considerations thathave to do with weight:. The weight of the trailer.. The weight of the trailer tongue.. The total weight on your

vehicle's tires.

Weight of the Trailer

How heavy can a trailer safely be?

It should never weigh more than454 kg (1,000 lbs). But even thatcan be too heavy.

It depends on how the rig is used.For example, speed, altitude, roadgrades, outside temperature, andhow much the vehicle is used to pulla trailer are all important. It candepend on any special equipmenton the vehicle, and the amount oftongue weight the vehicle can carry.See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue”later in this section.

Maximum trailer weight is calculatedassuming only the driver is in thetow vehicle and it has all therequired trailering equipment. Theweight of additional optionalequipment, passengers, and cargoin the tow vehicle must besubtracted from the maximum trailerweight.

Ask your dealer for traileringinformation or advice, or write us atour Customer Assistance Offices.See Customer Assistance Offices(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑5 orCustomer Assistance Offices(Mexico) on page 13‑5.

Weight of the Trailer Tongue

The tongue load (1) of any trailer isan important weight to measurebecause it affects the total grossweight of the vehicle. The GrossVehicle Weight (GVW) includes thecurb weight of the vehicle, anycargo carried in it, and the peoplewho will be riding in the vehicle.If there are a lot of options,equipment, passengers, or cargo in



the vehicle, it will reduce the tongueweight the vehicle can carry, whichwill also reduce the trailer weight thevehicle can tow. If towing a trailer,the tongue load must be added tothe GVW because the vehicle willbe carrying that weight, too. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 9‑12.

The trailer tongue (1) should weigh10 to 15 percent of the total loadedtrailer weight (2).

After loading the trailer, weigh thetrailer and then the tongue,separately, to see if the weights are

proper. If they are not, adjustmentsmight be made by moving someitems around in the trailer.

Total Weight on Your Vehicle'sTires

Be sure the vehicle's tires areinflated to the upper limit for coldtires. These numbers can be foundon the Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑12. Make sure not to go overthe GVW limit for the vehicle,including the weight of the trailertongue.

Trailer Towing (ZL1)The vehicle is neither designed norintended to tow a trailer.

Towing Equipment

Hitches

Use the correct hitch equipment.See your dealer or a hitch dealer forassistance.. The rear bumper on the vehicle

is not intended for hitches. Donot attach rental hitches or otherbumper-type hitches to it. Useonly a frame-mounted hitch thatdoes not attach to the bumper.

. Will any holes be made in thebody of the vehicle when thetrailer hitch is installed? If so,seal the holes when the hitch isremoved. If the holes are notsealed, dirt, water, and deadlycarbon monoxide (CO) from theexhaust can get into the vehicle.See Engine Exhaust onpage 9‑25.



Safety Chains

Always attach chains between thevehicle and the trailer. Cross thesafety chains under the tongue ofthe trailer to help prevent the tonguefrom contacting the road if itbecomes separated from the hitch.Leave enough slack so the rig canturn. Never allow safety chains todrag on the ground.

Trailer Brakes

Does the trailer have its ownbrakes? Be sure to read and followthe instructions for the trailer brakesso they are installed, adjusted, andmaintained properly.

Because the vehicle has antilockbrakes, do not tap into the vehicle'sbrake system. If this is done, bothbrake systems will not work well,or at all.

Conversions andAdd-Ons

Add-On ElectricalEquipmentNotice: Some electricalequipment can damage thevehicle or cause components tonot work and would not becovered by the warranty. Alwayscheck with your dealer beforeadding electrical equipment.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle's 12-volt battery, even if thevehicle is not operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, seeServicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3‑27 and AddingEquipment to the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3‑28.



2 NOTES


Vehicle Care 10-1

Vehicle Care

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-3California Proposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

California PerchlorateMaterials Requirements . . . . 10-3

Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Vehicle ChecksDoing Your OwnService Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5Engine CompartmentOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6

Engine Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-15Automatic TransmissionFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16

Manual TransmissionFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16

Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17Engine Air Cleaner/Filter(Except ZL1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter(ZL1 Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19

Cooling System (Except ZL1Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20

Cooling System (ZL1Engine Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21

Cooling System(Intercooler) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22

Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-28Power SteeringFluid (LFX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

Power Steering Fluid (L99,LS3 and ZL1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-34Automatic Transmission ShiftLock Control FunctionCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34

Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-35

Wiper BladeReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35

Windshield Replacement . . . 10-36

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-36

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-37Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37High Intensity Discharge(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

Headlamps, Front TurnSignal and Parking Lamps(Base Vehicle) . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

Headlamps, Front TurnSignal and Parking Lamps(Uplevel Vehicle) . . . . . . . . . . 10-38

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39

Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39Taillamps, Turn Signal, andStoplamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40

License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-40Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-41


10-2 Vehicle Care

Electrical SystemElectrical SystemOverload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41

Fuses and CircuitBreakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42

Engine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42

Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45

Rear Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47

Wheels and TiresTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50Summer Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-51Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53Tire Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56Tire Pressure for High-SpeedOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57

Tire Pressure MonitorSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58

Tire Pressure MonitorOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59

Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65Different Size Tires andWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-69Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69

If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-70Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72

Storing the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78

Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-84

Jump StartingJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-85

TowingTowing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-88Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88

Appearance CareExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-92Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-95


Vehicle Care 10-3

General InformationFor service and parts needs, visityour dealer. You will receivegenuine GM parts and GM-trainedand supported service people.

Genuine GM parts have one ofthese marks:

California Proposition65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including thisone, contain and/or emit chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm. Engineexhaust, many parts and systems,many fluids, and some componentwear by-products contain and/oremit these chemicals.

California PerchlorateMaterials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbaginitiators, safety belt pretensioners,and lithium batteries contained inRemote Keyless Entry transmitters,may contain perchlorate materials.Special handling may be necessary.For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Accessories andModificationsAdding non‐dealer accessories ormaking modifications to the vehiclecan affect vehicle performance andsafety, including such things asairbags, braking, stability, ride andhandling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, andelectronic systems like antilockbrakes, traction control, and stabilitycontrol. These accessories ormodifications could even causemalfunction or damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from modifications or theinstallation or use of non‐GMcertified parts, including controlmodule or software modifications, isnot covered under the terms of thevehicle warranty and may affectremaining warranty coverage foraffected parts.


10-4 Vehicle Care

GM Accessories are designed tocomplement and function with othersystems on the vehicle. See yourdealer to accessorize the vehicleusing genuine GM Accessoriesinstalled by a dealer technician.

Also, see Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑28.

Vehicle Checks

Doing Your OwnService Work

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to work onyour vehicle if you do not havethe proper knowledge, servicemanual, tools, or parts. Alwaysfollow owner manual proceduresand consult the service manualfor your vehicle before doing anyservice work.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper servicemanual. It tells you much moreabout how to service the vehiclethan this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Informationon page 13‑17.

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do your ownservice work, see Servicing theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑27.

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date ofany service work performed. SeeMaintenance Records onpage 11‑16.

Notice: Even small amounts ofcontamination can cause damageto vehicle systems. Do not allowcontaminants to contact thefluids, reservoir caps,or dipsticks.


Vehicle Care 10-5

HoodTo open the hood:

1. Pull the release handle belowthe instrument panel to the left ofthe steering wheel.

2. Push the secondary hoodrelease to the right. The lever isnear the middle of the hood.

3. Lift the hood.

Before closing the hood, be sure allfiller caps are on properly. Then liftthe hood to relieve pressure. Pullthe hood down on the passengerside to close it firmly.


10-6 Vehicle Care

Engine Compartment Overview

3.6L V6 Engine


Vehicle Care 10-7

1. Underhood Electrical Center.See Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10‑42.

2. Engine Coolant Recovery Bottleand Cap. See Engine Coolanton page 10‑23.

3. Engine Cover on page 10‑12.

4. Engine Cooling Fans (Out ofView). See Cooling System(Except ZL1 Engine) onpage 10‑20 or Cooling System(ZL1 Engine Only) onpage 10‑21 or Cooling System(Intercooler) on page 10‑22.

5. Radiator Fill Cap (Out of View).See Engine Coolant onpage 10‑23.

6. Power Steering Reservoir andCap (Out of View). See PowerSteering Fluid (L99, LS3 andZL1) on page 10‑30 or PowerSteering Fluid (LFX) onpage 10‑29.

7. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See EngineOil on page 10‑13.

8. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out ofView). See Engine Oil onpage 10‑13.

9. Brake Master Cylinder andHydraulic Clutch Reservoir (ifequipped with manualtransmission). See Brakes onpage 10‑31 or Hydraulic Clutchon page 10‑17.

10. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.See Battery on page 10‑33.

11. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter(Except ZL1) on page 10‑17 orEngine Air Cleaner/Filter (ZL1Only) on page 10‑19.

12. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See Washer Fluidon page 10‑30.


10-8 Vehicle Care

6.2L V8 Engine (L99 Engine Shown, LS3 Similar)


Vehicle Care 10-9



3. Engine Oil Dipstick. See EngineOil on page 10‑13.

4. Engine Oil Fill Cap (Out ofView). See Engine Oil onpage 10‑13.



7. Radiator Fill Cap (Out of View).See Engine Coolant onpage 10‑23.

8. Power Steering Reservoir andCap (Under Engine Cover) (ifequipped). See Power SteeringFluid (L99, LS3 and ZL1) onpage 10‑30 or Power SteeringFluid (LFX) on page 10‑29.



11. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter(Except ZL1) on page 10‑17 orEngine Air Cleaner/Filter (ZL1Only) on page 10‑19.



10-10 Vehicle Care

6.2L V8 Engine (ZL1)


Vehicle Care 10-11



3. Engine Oil Dipstick. See EngineOil on page 10‑13.

4. Engine Oil Fill Cap (Out ofView). See Engine Oil onpage 10‑13.


6. Radiator Fill Cap. See EngineCoolant on page 10‑23.

7. Intercooler Fill Cap (Out ofView). See Cooling System(Except ZL1 Engine) onpage 10‑20 or Cooling System(ZL1 Engine Only) onpage 10‑21 or Cooling System(Intercooler) on page 10‑22.


9. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter (ExceptZL1) on page 10‑17 or EngineAir Cleaner/Filter (ZL1 Only) onpage 10‑19.





10-12 Vehicle Care

Engine Cover

3.6L V6 Engine Cover

1. Engine Cover

2. Engine Oil Fill Cap

To remove:

1. Remove the engine oilfill cap (2).

2. Lift the engine cover (1) todisengage one front attachmentpoint.

3. Pull the engine cover forward todisengage it from the tworear tabs.

4. Reverse Steps 1–3 to reinstallthe engine cover.

6.2L V8 Engine Cover (L99Engine Shown, LS3 Similar)


2. Engine Cover

To remove:


2. Lift the engine cover (2) todisengage the two frontattachment points.

3. Pull the engine cover forward todisengage it from the horizontalrear attachments.


6.2L V8 Engine Cover(ZL1 Only)


2. Engine Cover


Vehicle Care 10-13

To remove:


2. Lift the engine cover (2) todisengage from the fiveattachment points.

3. Pull the engine cover forward todisengage and remove.


Engine OilTo ensure proper engineperformance and long life, carefulattention must be paid to engine oil.Following these simple, butimportant steps will help protectyour investment:. Always use engine oil approved

to the proper specification and ofthe proper viscosity grade. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil”in this section.

. Check the engine oil levelregularly and maintain theproper oil level. See “CheckingEngine Oil” and “When to AddEngine Oil” in this section.

. Change the engine oil at theappropriate time. See Engine OilLife System on page 10‑15.

. Always dispose of engine oilproperly. See “What to Do withUsed Oil” in this section.

Checking Engine Oil

It is a good idea to check the engineoil level at each fuel fill. In order toget an accurate reading, the vehiclemust be on level ground. Theengine oil dipstick handle is a loop.See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for the location of theengine oil dipstick.

Obtaining an accurate oil levelreading is essential:

1. If the engine has been runningrecently, turn off the engine andallow several minutes for the oilto drain back into the oil pan.Checking the oil level too soonafter engine shutoff will notprovide an accurate oil levelreading.

{ WARNING

The engine oil dipstick handlemay be hot; it could burn you.Use a towel or glove to touch thedipstick handle.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean itwith a paper towel or cloth, thenpush it back in all the way.Remove it again, keeping the tipdown, and check the level.


10-14 Vehicle Care

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the cross-hatchedarea at the tip of the dipstick, add1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oiland then recheck the level. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil” inthis section for an explanation ofwhat kind of oil to use. For engineoil crankcase capacity, seeCapacities and Specifications onpage 12‑2.

Notice: Do not add too much oil.Oil levels above or below theacceptable operating rangeshown on the dipstick are harmfulto the engine. If you find that youhave an oil level above theoperating range, i.e., the enginehas so much oil that the oil levelgets above the cross-hatched

area that shows the properoperating range, the engine couldbe damaged. You should drainout the excess oil or limit drivingof the vehicle and seek a serviceprofessional to remove theexcess amount of oil.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for the location of theengine oil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange. Push the dipstick all the wayback in when through.

Selecting the Right Engine Oil

Selecting the right engine oildepends on both the proper oilspecification and viscosity grade.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12.

Specification

Use and ask for licensed engine oilswith the dexos1® approvedcertification mark. Engine oilsmeeting the requirements for thevehicle should have the dexos1

approved certification mark. Thiscertification mark indicates that theoil has been approved to the dexos1specification.

Notice: Failure to use therecommended engine oil orequivalent can result in enginedamage not covered by thevehicle warranty. Check with yourdealer or service provider onwhether the oil is approved to thedexos1 specification.

Viscosity Grade

SAE 5W-30 is the best viscositygrade for the vehicle. Do not useother viscosity grade oils such asSAE 10W-30, 10W-40, or 20W-50.


Vehicle Care 10-15

Cold Temperature Operation: In anarea of extreme cold, where thetemperature falls below −29°C(−20°F), an SAE 0W-30 oil may beused. An oil of this viscosity gradewill provide easier cold starting forthe engine at extremely lowtemperatures. When selecting an oilof the appropriate viscosity grade,always select an oil of the correctspecification. See “Specification”earlier in this section for moreinformation.

Engine Oil Additives/EngineOil Flushes

Do not add anything to the oil. Therecommended oils with the dexosspecification and displaying thedexos certification mark are all thatis needed for good performance andengine protection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could causeengine damage not covered by thevehicle warranty.

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy foryour skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean yourskin and nails with soap and water,or a good hand cleaner. Wash orproperly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See themanufacturer's warnings about theuse and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change yourown oil, be sure to drain all the oilfrom the filter before disposal. Neverdispose of oil by putting it in thetrash or pouring it on the ground,into sewers, or into streams orbodies of water. Recycle it by takingit to a place that collects used oil.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil

This vehicle has a computer systemthat indicates when to change theengine oil and filter. This is basedon a combination of factors whichinclude engine revolutions, enginetemperature, and miles driven.Based on driving conditions, themileage at which an oil change isindicated can vary considerably. Forthe oil life system to work properly,the system must be reset every timethe oil is changed.

When the system has calculatedthat oil life has been diminished, itindicates that an oil change isnecessary. A CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message comes on. SeeEngine Oil Messages on page 5‑36.Change the oil as soon as possiblewithin the next 1 000 km (600 mi).It is possible that, if driving underthe best conditions, the oil lifesystem might indicate that an oilchange is not necessary for up to ayear. The engine oil and filter must


10-16 Vehicle Care

be changed at least once a yearand, at this time, the system mustbe reset. Your dealer has trainedservice people who will perform thiswork and reset the system. It is alsoimportant to check the oil regularlyover the course of an oil draininterval and keep it at the properlevel.

If the system is ever resetaccidentally, the oil must bechanged at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)since the last oil change.Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine OilLife System

Reset the system whenever theengine oil is changed so that thesystem can calculate the nextengine oil change. To reset thesystem:


2. Fully press and release theaccelerator pedal three timeswithin five seconds.

The system is reset when theCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage goes off.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage comes back on when thevehicle is started, the engine oil lifesystem has not been reset. Repeatthe procedure.

Automatic TransmissionFluid

How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid

It is not necessary to check thetransmission fluid level.A transmission fluid leak is the onlyreason for fluid loss. If a leakoccurs, take the vehicle to yourdealer and have it repaired as soonas possible.

The vehicle is not equipped with atransmission fluid level dipstick.There is a special procedure forchecking and changing thetransmission fluid. Because thisprocedure is difficult, this should bedone at the dealer. Contact thedealer for additional information orthe procedure can be found in theservice manual. To purchase aservice manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Informationon page 13‑17.

Change the fluid and filter at theintervals listed in MaintenanceSchedule on page 11‑2, and be sureto use the fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12.

Manual TransmissionFluidIt is not necessary to check themanual transmission fluid level.A transmission fluid leak is the onlyreason for fluid loss. If a leakoccurs, take the vehicle to your


Vehicle Care 10-17

dealer and have it repaired as soonas possible. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 11‑12for the proper fluid to use.

Hydraulic ClutchFor vehicles with a manualtransmission, it is not necessary toregularly check brake/clutch fluidunless there is a leak suspected.Adding fluid will not correct a leak.A fluid loss in this system couldindicate a problem. Have thesystem inspected and repaired.

When to Check and Whatto Use

The brake/hydraulic clutch fluidreservoir cap has this symbol on it.The common hydraulic clutch andbrake master cylinder fluid reservoiris filled with DOT 3 brake fluid asindicated on the reservoir cap. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for reservoir location.

How to Check and Add Fluid

Visually check the brake/clutch fluidreservoir to make sure the fluid levelis at the MIN (minimum) line on theside of the reservoir. The brake/hydraulic clutch fluid system shouldbe closed and sealed.

Do not remove the cap to check thefluid level or to top‐off the fluid level.Remove the cap only whennecessary to add the proper fluiduntil the level reaches the MIN line.

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter(Except ZL1)See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for the location of theengine air cleaner/filter.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

Inspect the air cleaner/filter at thescheduled maintenance intervalsand replace it at the appropriateinterval. See Maintenance Scheduleon page 11‑2 for more information.If driving in dusty/dirty conditions,inspect the filter at each engine oilchange.


10-18 Vehicle Care

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

To inspect the air cleaner/filter,remove the filter from the vehicleand lightly shake the filter to releaseloose dust and dirt. If the filterremains covered with dirt, a newfilter is required.

To inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter:

1. Open the hood. See Hood onpage 10‑5.

2. Locate the air filter housing onthe front of the driver side of theengine compartment. SeeEngine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6.

3.6L V6 Engine Air Cleaner/FilterHousing Shown (6.2L V8 Engines

Similar)

3. Loosen the clamp at the duct ofthe air cleaner/filter housing.

4. Unlatch the retaining clips on theair cleaner/filter housing.

5. Lift the cover at the retaining cliplocation high enough to clear theretaining clips and pull the coveroutward to remove it from the aircleaner/filter housing hinges.

6. Pull straight up on the cover;while holding the cover, removethe air filter.

7. Inspect or replace the air filter.See Maintenance ReplacementParts on page 11‑14.

8. Reverse Steps 1–6 to reinstallthe cover.

{ WARNING

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you orothers to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air; it

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 10-19

WARNING (Continued)

helps to stop flames if the enginebackfires. Use caution whenworking on the engine and do notdrive with the air cleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter isoff, dirt can easily get into theengine, which could damage it.Always have the air cleaner/filterin place when you are driving.

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter(ZL1 Only)See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for the location of theengine air cleaner/filter.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

Inspect the air cleaner/filter at thescheduled maintenance intervalsand replace it at the appropriateinterval. See Maintenance Scheduleon page 11‑2 for more information.If driving in dusty/dirty conditions,inspect the filter at each engine oilchange.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

To inspect the air cleaner/filter,remove the filter from the vehicleand lightly shake the filter to releaseloose dust and dirt. If the filterremains covered with dirt, a newfilter is required.

To inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter:

1. Air Duct Clamp

2. Screws


2. Disconnect the outlet duct byloosening the screw on the airduct clamp.

3. Remove the two screwssecuring the cover on the aircleaner/filter housing.


10-20 Vehicle Care

4. Pull straight up on the cover;while holding the cover, removethe air filter.

5. Inspect or replace the air filter.See Maintenance ReplacementParts on page 11‑14.

6. Reverse Steps 2–5 to reinstallthe cover.

{ WARNING

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you orothers to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air; ithelps to stop flames if the enginebackfires. Use caution whenworking on the engine and do notdrive with the air cleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter isoff, dirt can easily get into theengine, which could damage it.Always have the air cleaner/filterin place when you are driving.

Cooling System (ExceptZL1 Engine)

3.6L V6 Engine

1. Engine Coolant Recovery Bottle

2. Electric Cooling Fans (Outof View)

3. Radiator Cap (Under EngineCover)

6.2L V8 Engines (L99 Shown, LS3Similar)



3. Radiator Cap (Out of View)

{ WARNING

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not running

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 10-21

WARNING (Continued)

and can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

If the coolant inside the enginecoolant recovery bottle is boiling, donot do anything else until it coolsdown. The vehicle should be parkedon a level surface.

The coolant level should bebetween the MIN and MAX lines.If it is not, the vehicle may have aleak at the radiator hoses, heaterhoses, radiator, water pump,or somewhere else in the coolingsystem.

{ WARNING

Heater and radiator hoses, andother engine parts, can be veryhot. Do not touch them. If you do,you can be burned.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Do not run the engine if there is aleak. If you run the engine, itcould lose all coolant. That couldcause an engine fire, and youcould be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

If there seems to be no leak, withthe engine on, check to see if theelectric engine cooling fans arerunning. If the engine isoverheating, the fans should berunning. If it is not, the vehicleneeds service. Turn off the engine.

Notice: Using coolant other thanDEX-COOL® can cause prematureengine, heater core, or radiatorcorrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant could require changingsooner, at 50 000 km (30,000mi)or 24months, whichever occursfirst. Any repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Always use DEX-COOL(silicate-free) coolant in thevehicle.

Cooling System (ZL1Engine Only)

6.2L V8 Engine



3. Radiator Cap


10-22 Vehicle Care

{ WARNING

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

If the coolant inside the enginecoolant recovery bottle is boiling, donot do anything else until it coolsdown. The vehicle should be parkedon a level surface.

The coolant level should bebetween the MIN and MAX lines.If it is not, the vehicle may have aleak at the radiator hoses, heaterhoses, radiator, water pump,or somewhere else in the coolingsystem.

{ WARNING

Heater and radiator hoses, andother engine parts, can be veryhot. Do not touch them. If you do,you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is aleak. If you run the engine, itcould lose all coolant. That couldcause an engine fire, and youcould be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

If there seems to be no leak, withthe engine on, check to see if theelectric engine cooling fans arerunning. If the engine isoverheating, the fans should berunning. If it is not, the vehicleneeds service. Turn off the engine.

Notice: Using coolant other thanDEX-COOL® can cause prematureengine, heater core, or radiatorcorrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant could require changingsooner, at 50 000 km (30,000mi)

or 24months, whichever occursfirst. Any repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always use DEX-COOL(silicate-free) coolant in thevehicle.

Cooling System(Intercooler)

Intercooler ZL1 Only

The 6.2L LSA superchargedV8 engine has an intercoolercooling system.

1. Intercooler Fill Cap


Vehicle Care 10-23

2. Intercooler Fill Neck

1. Open the hood and remove theengine cover. See Engine Coveron page 10‑12.

2. Turn the intercooler fill neck (2)to the vertical position.

3. Remove the intercoolerfill cap (1).

4. Check to see if coolant is visiblenear the top of the opening.

5. If coolant is not visible, seedealer for service.

6. Reverse Steps 1–3 to installintercooler fill cap and turn theintercooler fill neck.

The intercooler cooling system hasa special procedure for draining andadding coolant. Because thisprocedure is difficult, see the dealerfor service if the intercooler is lowon coolant. The procedure can alsobe found in the service manual. Topurchase a service manual, seeService Publications OrderingInformation on page 13‑17.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in the vehicle isfilled with DEX-COOL® enginecoolant. This coolant is designed toremain in the vehicle for 5 years or240 000 km (150,000 mi), whicheveroccurs first.

The following explains the coolingsystem and how to check and addcoolant when it is low. If there is aproblem with engine overheating,see Engine Overheating onpage 10‑28.

What to Use

{ WARNING

Adding only plain water or someother liquid to the cooling systemcan be dangerous. Plain waterand other liquids, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.The coolant warning system is setfor the proper coolant mixture.With plain water or the wrong

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

mixture, the engine could get toohot but you would not get theoverheat warning. The enginecould catch fire and you or otherscould be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant.

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant. If using this mixture,nothing else needs to be added.This mixture:. Gives freezing protection down

to −37°C (−34°F), outsidetemperature.

. Gives boiling protection up to129°C (265°F), enginetemperature.

. Protects against rust andcorrosion.

. Will not damage aluminum parts.


10-24 Vehicle Care

. Helps keep the proper enginetemperature.

Notice: If an improper coolantmixture is used, the engine couldoverheat and be badly damaged.The repair cost would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Too much water in the mixturecan freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, and otherparts.

Never dispose of engine coolant byputting it in the trash, pouring it onthe ground, or into sewers, streams,or bodies of water. Have the coolantchanged by an authorized servicecenter, familiar with legalrequirements regarding usedcoolant disposal. This will helpprotect the environment and yourhealth.

Checking Coolant

The vehicle must be on a levelsurface when checking the coolantlevel.

Check coolant as follows:

1. Turn the ignition off.

2. Locate the engine coolantrecovery bottle. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6.

3. Turn the coolant dipstick capcounterclockwise and slowly pullout the dipstick.

4. There are maximum andminimum markings on thedipstick. When the engine iscold, the coolant level should beat or above the MIN mark on thedipstick. After the vehicle hasbeen driven and the engine is atnormal operating temperature,the level should be somewherebetween half full and themaximum mark.

5. If the coolant level is correct,replace the dipstick and turn thecap clockwise to secure.


Vehicle Care 10-25

How to Add Coolant to theCoolant Recovery Bottle

{ WARNING

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

Notice: This vehicle has aspecific coolant fill procedure.Failure to follow this procedurecould cause the engine tooverheat and be severelydamaged.

Notice: If an improper coolantmixture is used, the engine couldoverheat and be badly damaged.The repair cost would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Too much water in the mixturecan freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, and otherparts.

Add coolant as follows:

1. Turn the engine coolant recoverybottle dipstick capcounterclockwise and slowly pullout the dipstick.

2. Pour the coolant into the enginecoolant recovery bottle.

3. When the level is correct,replace the dipstick and turn thecap clockwise to secure.

How to Add Coolant to theRadiator

{ WARNING

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

Notice: This vehicle has aspecific coolant fill procedure.Failure to follow this procedure

could cause the engine tooverheat and be severelydamaged.

{ WARNING

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

{ WARNING

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system can blow outand burn you badly. They areunder pressure, and if you turnthe surge tank pressurecap— even a little— they cancome out at high speed. Neverturn the cap when the coolingsystem, including the surge tank

(Continued)


10-26 Vehicle Care

WARNING (Continued)

pressure cap, is hot. Wait for thecooling system and surge tankpressure cap to cool if you everhave to turn the pressure cap.

If coolant is needed, add the propermixture directly to the radiator, butbe sure the cooling system is coolbefore this is done.

If no coolant is visible in the enginecoolant recovery bottle, add coolantas follows:

3.6L V6 Engine Fill Procedure

1. Locate the radiator cap. SeeEngine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6.

2. Remove the engine cover toaccess the radiator cap. SeeEngine Cover on page 10‑12.

3. Cover the radiator cap with athick cloth and turn it slowlycounterclockwise and remove.

4. If there is no coolant visible orthe level is low, slowly fill thesystem through the radiator capopening with a 50/50 mixture ofDEX-COOL and clean drinkablewater.

Wait 30 seconds for coolant tosettle and continue filling if thelevel drops.

Do not spill coolant on theaccessory drive belts.

If a spill occurs, rinse the beltwith fresh water.


6. With the engine idling, continueto add coolant through theradiator cap opening until full.

Wait 30 seconds for the coolantto settle and top off, if the leveldrops.

7. Once the system is full, put theradiator cap back on by turningclockwise.

8. With the engine still running,raise the engine to 2500 rpm for30–40 seconds.

9. Turn the engine off.

10. Repeat Steps 2–7 then turn theengine off.

11. Allow engine to cool for45 minutes. Top off coolantthrough the radiator capopening and reinstall theradiator cap.

12. Reinstall the engine cover. SeeEngine Cover on page 10‑12.


Vehicle Care 10-27

13. Check the coolant level in theengine coolant recovery bottleand fill it until the level is at thetop symbol on the dipstick.

6.2L V8 Engine Fill Procedure

1. Locate the radiator cap. SeeEngine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6.

2. Cover the radiator cap with athick cloth and turn it slowlycounterclockwise and remove.

3. If there is no coolant visible orthe level is low, slowly fill thesystem through the radiator capopening with a 50/50 mixture ofclean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL coolant until full.

Wait 30 seconds for coolant tosettle and top off if the leveldrops.

Do not spill coolant on theaccessory drive belts.

If a spill occurs, rinse the beltwith fresh water.


5. With the engine idling, top off thecoolant through the radiator capopening until full.

Wait 30 seconds for the coolantto settle and top off, if the leveldrops.

6. Once the system is full, put theradiator cap back on by turningclockwise.

7. Turn the engine off.

8. Check the coolant level in theengine coolant recovery bottleand fill it until the level is at thetop mark on the dipstick.


10-28 Vehicle Care

Notice: If the pressure cap is nottightly installed, coolant loss andpossible engine damage mayoccur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.

Engine OverheatingThe vehicle has an indicator to warnof engine overheating.

There is an engine coolanttemperature gauge on the vehicleinstrument panel. See EngineCoolant Temperature Gauge onpage 5‑13.

If the decision is made not to lift thehood when this warning appears,but instead get service help rightaway. See Roadside AssistanceProgram (Mexico) on page 13‑7 orRoadside Assistance Program (U.S.and Canada) on page 13‑11.

If the decision is made to lift thehood, make sure the vehicle isparked on a level surface.

Then check to see if the enginecooling fans are running. If theengine is overheating, both fansshould be running. If they are not,do not continue to run the engineand have the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Engine damage fromrunning the engine withoutcoolant is not covered by thewarranty.

Notice: If the engine catches firebecause of being driven with nocoolant, the vehicle can be badlydamaged. The costly repairswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

If Steam Is Coming from theEngine Compartment

{ WARNING

Steam from an overheated enginecan burn you badly, even if youjust open the hood. Stay awayfrom the engine if you see or hear

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

steam coming from it. Just turn itoff and get everyone away fromthe vehicle until it cools down.Wait until there is no sign ofsteam or coolant before you openthe hood.

If you keep driving when theengine is overheated, the liquidsin it can catch fire. You or otherscould be badly burned. Stop theengine if it overheats, and get outof the vehicle until the engineis cool.

If No Steam Is Coming fromthe Engine Compartment

If an engine overheat warning isdisplayed but no steam can be seenor heard, the problem may not betoo serious. Sometimes the enginecan get a little too hot when thevehicle:. Climbs a long hill on a hot day.


Vehicle Care 10-29

. Stops after high-speed driving.

. Idles for long periods in traffic.

. Tows a trailer.

If the overheat warning is displayedwith no sign of steam:

1. Turn the air conditioning off.

2. Turn the heater on to the highesttemperature and to the highestfan speed. Open the windows asnecessary.

3. In heavy traffic, let the engineidle in N (Neutral) while stopped.If it is safe to do so, pull off theroad, shift to P (Park) orN (Neutral) and let theengine idle.

If the temperature overheat gauge isno longer in the overheat zone or anoverheat warning no longerdisplays, the vehicle can be driven.Continue to drive the vehicle slowlyfor about 10 minutes. Keep a safevehicle distance from the vehicle infront. If the warning does not comeback on, continue to drive normally.

If the warning continues, pull over,stop, and park the vehicleright away.

If there is no sign of steam, idle theengine for three minutes whileparked. If the warning is stilldisplayed, turn off the engine until itcools down.

Power SteeringFluid (LFX)

The power steering fluid reservoir isunder the engine cover on the driverside toward the front of the enginecompartment. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6.

When to Check Power SteeringFluid

It is not necessary to regularlycheck power steering fluid unlessyou suspect there is a leak in thesystem or an unusual noise isheard. A fluid loss in this systemcould indicate a problem. Have thesystem inspected and repaired.

How to Check Power SteeringFluid

Check the level after the vehicle hasbeen driven for at least 20 minutesso the fluid is warm.

To check the power steering fluid:

1. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF and let the enginecompartment cool down.

2. Remove the engine cover. SeeEngine Cover on page 10‑12.

3. Wipe the cap and the top of thereservoir clean.

4. Turn the cap counterclockwiseand pull it straight up.


10-30 Vehicle Care

5. Wipe the dipstick with aclean rag.

6. Replace the cap and completelytighten it.

7. Remove the cap again and lookat the fluid level on the dipstick.

When the engine is hot, the levelshould be at the hot MAX level.When the engine is cold, thefluid level should be betweenMIN and MAX on the dipstick.

What to Use

To determine what kind of fluid touse, see Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12. Alwaysuse the proper fluid.

Power Steering Fluid(L99, LS3 and ZL1)The vehicle has electric powersteering and does not use powersteering fluid.

Washer Fluid

What to Use

When windshield washer fluid isneeded, be sure to read themanufacturer's instructions beforeuse. If operating the vehicle in anarea where the temperature can fallbelow freezing, use a fluid that hassufficient protection againstfreezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

Open the cap with the washersymbol on it. Add washer fluid untilthe reservoir is full. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for reservoir location.

Notice. When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer instructions foradding water.

. Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solutionto freeze and damage thewasher fluid tank and otherparts of the washer system.


Vehicle Care 10-31

. Fill the washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it isvery cold. This allows forfluid expansion if freezingoccurs, which could damagethe tank if it iscompletely full.

. Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in the windshieldwasher. It can damage thewindshield washer systemand paint.

BrakesThis vehicle has disc brakes. Discbrake pads have built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or beheard all the time the vehicle ismoving, except when applying thebrake pedal firmly.

{ WARNING

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes willnot work well. That could lead toa crash. When the brake wearwarning sound is heard, have thevehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive withworn-out brake pads could resultin costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal when thebrakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts arenecessary to help prevent brakepulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear andevenly tighten wheel nuts in theproper sequence to torquespecifications in Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2.

Brake linings should always bereplaced as complete axle sets.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedaldoes not return to normal height,or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a signthat brake service might berequired.

Brake Adjustment

Every time the brakes are applied,with or without the vehicle moving,the brakes adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System Parts

The braking system on a vehicle iscomplex. Its many parts have to beof top quality and work well togetherif the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. The vehicle was designedand tested with top-quality brakeparts. When parts of the brakingsystem are replaced, be sure to getnew, approved replacement parts.If this is not done, the brakes mightnot work properly. For example,


10-32 Vehicle Care

installing disc brake pads that arewrong for the vehicle, can changethe balance between the front andrear brakes — for the worse. Thebraking performance expected canchange in many other ways if thewrong replacement brake parts areinstalled.

Brake Fluid

The brake/clutch master cylinderreservoir is filled with DOT 3 brakefluid as indicated on the reservoircap. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 10‑6 for thelocation of the reservoir.

There are only two reasons why thefluid level in the reservoir mightgo down:. The fluid level goes down

because of normal brake liningwear. When new linings areinstalled, the fluid level goesback up.

. A fluid leak in the brake/clutchhydraulic system can also causea low fluid level. Have the brake/clutch hydraulic system fixed,since a leak means that sooneror later the brakes and/or clutchwill not work well.

Do not top off the brake/clutch fluid.Adding fluid does not correct a leak.If fluid is added when the linings areworn, there will be too much fluidwhen new brake linings areinstalled. Add or remove brake fluid,as necessary, only when work isdone on the brake/clutch hydraulicsystem.

{ WARNING

If too much brake fluid is added, itcan spill on the engine and burn,if the engine is hot enough. Youor others could be burned, andthe vehicle could be damaged.Add brake fluid only when work isdone on the brake/clutchhydraulic system.

When the brake/clutch fluid falls to alow level, the brake warning lightcomes on. See Brake SystemWarning Light on page 5‑20.

What to Add

Use only new DOT 3 brake fluidfrom a sealed container. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12.

Always clean the brake/clutch fluidreservoir cap and the area aroundthe cap before removing it. Thishelps keep dirt from entering thereservoir.


Vehicle Care 10-33

{ WARNING

With the wrong kind of fluid in thebrake/clutch hydraulic system, thebrakes might not work well. Thiscould cause a crash. Always usethe proper brake/clutch fluid.

Notice. Using the wrong fluid canbadly damage brake/clutchhydraulic system parts. Forexample, just a few drops ofmineral-based oil, such asengine oil, in the brakehydraulic system candamage brake hydraulicsystem parts so badly thatthey will have to be replaced.Do not let someone put inthe wrong kind of fluid.

. If brake fluid is spilled on thevehicle's painted surfaces,the paint finish can bedamaged. Be careful not to

spill brake fluid on thevehicle. If you do, wash it offimmediately.

BatteryRefer to the replacement numbershown on the original battery labelwhen a new battery is needed. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for battery location.

{ WARNING

Battery posts, terminals, andrelated accessories contain leadand lead compounds, chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and reproductiveharm. Wash hands after handling.

Vehicle Storage

{ WARNING

Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode.You can be badly hurt if you arenot careful. See Jump Starting onpage 10‑85 for tips on workingaround a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery to keep the battery fromrunning down.

Extended Storage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery or use a battery tricklecharger.


10-34 Vehicle Care

Rear Axle

When to Check Lubricant

It is not necessary to regularlycheck the rear axle fluid, unlessthere a leak is suspected or anunusual noise is heard. A fluid losscould indicate a problem. Have itinspected and repaired by yourdealer.

Starter Switch Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parkingbrake and the regular brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9‑35.

Do not use the acceleratorpedal, and be ready to turn offthe engine immediately if itstarts.

3. For automatic transmissionvehicles, try to start the enginein each gear. The vehicle shouldstart only in P (Park) orN (Neutral). If the vehicle startsin any other position, contactyour dealer for service.

For manual transmissionvehicles, put the shift lever inNeutral, push the clutch pedaldown halfway, and try to startthe engine. The vehicle shouldstart only when the clutch pedalis pushed down all the way tothe floor. If the vehicle startswhen the clutch pedal is notpushed all the way down,contact your dealer for service.

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock ControlFunction Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle. It should beparked on a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9‑35.

Be ready to apply the regularbrake immediately if the vehiclebegins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn theignition on, but do not start theengine. Without applying theregular brake, try to move the


Vehicle Care 10-35

shift lever out of P (Park) withnormal effort. If the shift levermoves out of P (Park), contactyour dealer for service.

Ignition TransmissionLock CheckWhile parked, and with the parkingbrake set, try to turn the ignition toLOCK/OFF in each shift leverposition.. The ignition should turn to

LOCK/OFF only when the shiftlever is in P (Park).

. The ignition key should comeout only in LOCK/OFF.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing this check,the vehicle could begin to move.You or others could be injuredand property could be damaged.Make sure there is room in frontof the vehicle in case it begins toroll. Be ready to apply the regularbrake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keepingyour foot on the regular brake, setthe parking brake.. To check the parking brake's

holding ability: With the enginerunning and the transmission inN (Neutral), slowly remove footpressure from the regular brakepedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.

. To check the P (Park)mechanism's holding ability:With the engine running, shift toP (Park). Then release theparking brake followed by theregular brake.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Wiper Blade ReplacementWindshield wiper blades should beinspected for wear and cracking.See Maintenance Schedule onpage 11‑2 for more information.

Replacement blades come indifferent types and are removed indifferent ways. For proper type andlength, see MaintenanceReplacement Parts on page 11‑14.

To replace the windshield wiperblade:

1. Pull the windshield wiperassembly away from thewindshield.


10-36 Vehicle Care

2. Lift up on the latch in the middleof the wiper blade where thewiper arm attaches.

3. With the latch open, pull thewiper blade down toward thewindshield far enough to releaseit from the J-hooked end of thewiper arm.

4. Remove the wiper blade.

Allowing the wiper blade arm totouch the windshield when nowiper blade is installed coulddamage the windshield. Anydamage that occurs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not allow the wiperblade arm to touch thewindshield.

5. Reverse Steps 1–3 for wiperblade replacement.

Windshield ReplacementIf the Head-Up display (HUD)system and the windshield need tobe replaced, get one that isdesigned for HUD or the HUDimage may look out of focus.

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp aim has been preset andshould need no further adjustment.

If the vehicle is damaged in a crash,the headlamp aim may be affected.If adjustment to the headlamps isnecessary, see your dealer.


Vehicle Care 10-37

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, see Replacement Bulbs onpage 10‑41.

For any bulb‐changing procedurenot listed in this section, contactyour dealer.

Halogen Bulbs

{ WARNING

Halogen bulbs have pressurizedgas inside and can burst if youdrop or scratch the bulb. You orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the instructionson the bulb package.

High Intensity Discharge(HID) Lighting

{ WARNING

The high intensity dischargelighting system operates at a veryhigh voltage. If you try to serviceany of the system components,you could be seriously injured.Have your dealer or a qualifiedtechnician service them.

After an HID headlamp bulb hasbeen replaced, the beam might be aslightly different shade than it wasoriginally. This is normal.

Headlamps, Front TurnSignal and ParkingLamps (Base Vehicle)The base model vehicle has ahalogen headlamp and a turnsignal/parking lamp on theheadlamp assembly.

1. Parking/Turn Signal Lamp

2. Halogen Headlamp


10-38 Vehicle Care

To replace one of these bulbs:


2. Press in on the tabs on the sidesof the duct, and then push theduct rearward into the aircleaner/filter housing.

3. Disconnect the wiring harnessand turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise to remove itfrom the headlamp assembly.

4. Pull the bulb straight out fromthe socket.

5. Push the new bulb into thesocket and reinstall the socketinto the headlamp assembly byturning it clockwise.

6. Reconnect the electricalconnector.

7. Pull the duct back out of the aircleaner/filter housing until thetabs snap the duct back intoposition.

Headlamps, Front TurnSignal and ParkingLamps (Uplevel Vehicle)The uplevel model vehicle has anHID headlamp and a turn signallamp on the headlamp assembly.The parking lamp is also thefunction of the HID headlamp. SeeHigh Intensity Discharge (HID)Lighting on page 10‑37.

To replace the turn signal bulb:


2. Press in on the tabs on the sidesof the duct, and then push theduct rearward into the aircleaner/filter housing.


Vehicle Care 10-39

3. Disconnect the wiring harnessand turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise to remove itfrom the headlamp assembly.

4. Pull the bulb straight out fromthe socket.

5. Push the new bulb into thesocket and reinstall the socketinto the headlamp assembly byturning it clockwise.

6. Reconnect the electricalconnector.

7. Pull the duct back out of the aircleaner/filter housing until thetabs snap the duct back intoposition.

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)The uplevel model vehicle mayhave daytime running lamps in thefront fascia.

To replace the DRL bulb in a ZL1,see your dealer.


1. Locate the bulb assembly underthe front fascia.

2. Disconnect the electricalconnector from the bulbassembly and pull out the bulbassembly.

3. Push in the new bulb assemblyto lock it into place.

4. Reconnect the electricalconnector to the bulb assembly.

The base model vehicle daytimerunning lamps are the low beam onthe halogen headlamp. If one theselamps fails, see Headlamps, FrontTurn Signal and Parking Lamps(Uplevel Vehicle) on page 10‑38 orHeadlamps, Front Turn Signal andParking Lamps (Base Vehicle) onpage 10‑37 for replacementinformation.

Fog LampsThis vehicle may have fog lamps inthe front fascia.

To replace the fog lamp bulb in aZL1, see your dealer.


10-40 Vehicle Care


1. Locate the bulb assembly underthe front fascia.

2. Disconnect the electricalconnector from the bulbassembly and pull out the bulbassembly.

3. Push in the new bulb assemblyto lock it into place.

4. Reconnect the electricalconnector to the bulb assembly.

Taillamps, Turn Signal,and StoplampsTo replace a taillamp, turn signal,or stoplamp bulb:

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk onpage 2‑8.

2. Remove the close out panelretainers to gain access to thebulb socket connectors.

3. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise to remove it.

4. Pull the old bulb straight out ofthe bulb socket.

5. Push the new bulb straight intothe bulb socket until it clicks.

6. Turn the bulb socket clockwiseto reinstall.

License Plate LampTo replace one of these bulbs:

1. Unclip the license plate lampfrom the fascia opening.

2. Pull the license plate lamp downthrough the fascia opening.

3. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise and pull thebulb straight out of the lampsocket.

4. Install the new bulb.


Vehicle Care 10-41

5. Push the bulb straight into thesocket and turn clockwise toreinstall.

6. Reinstall the license plate lampby lifting it through the fasciaopening until the clip is in place.

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior LampBulb

Number

Daytime RunningLamp (Uplevelvehicles)

PSX26W

Fog Lamp(Except ZL1)

PSX26W

Front Park and TurnSignal Lamp

3457NAK

Halogen Headlamp H13

License Plate Lamp W5W

Rear Turn Signaland Taillamps

3157K

For replacement bulbs not listedhere, contact your dealer.

Electrical System

Electrical SystemOverloadThe vehicle has fuses and circuitbreakers to protect against anelectrical system overload.

When the current electrical load istoo heavy, the circuit breaker opensand closes, protecting the circuituntil the current load returns tonormal or the problem is fixed. Thisgreatly reduces the chance of circuitoverload and fire caused byelectrical problems.

Fuses and circuit breakers protectpower devices in the vehicle.

Replace a bad fuse with a new oneof the identical size and rating.

If there is a problem on the road anda fuse needs to be replaced, thesame amperage fuse can beborrowed. Choose some feature ofthe vehicle that is not needed to useand replace it as soon as possible.

Headlamp Wiring

An electrical overload may causethe lamps to go on and off, or insome cases to remain off. Have theheadlamp wiring checked right awayif the lamps go on and off orremain off.

Windshield Wipers

If the wiper motor overheats due toheavy snow or ice, the windshieldwipers will stop until the motor coolsand will then restart.

Although the circuit is protectedfrom electrical overload, overloaddue to heavy snow or ice maycause wiper linkage damage.Always clear ice and heavy snowfrom the windshield before using thewindshield wipers.

If the overload is caused by anelectrical problem and not snow orice, be sure to get it fixed.


10-42 Vehicle Care

Fuses and CircuitBreakersThe wiring circuits in the vehicle areprotected from short circuits by acombination of fuses and circuitbreakers. This greatly reduces thechance of damage caused byelectrical problems.

To check a fuse, look at thesilver-colored band inside the fuse.If the band is broken or melted,replace the fuse. Be sure to replacea bad fuse with a new one of theidentical size and rating.

Fuses of the same amperage canbe temporarily borrowed fromanother fuse location, if a fuse goesout. Replace the fuse as soon aspossible.

To identify and check fuses, circuitbreakers, and relays, see EngineCompartment Fuse Block onpage 10‑42, Instrument Panel FuseBlock on page 10‑45, and RearCompartment Fuse Block onpage 10‑47.

Engine CompartmentFuse Block

To remove the hinged fuse blockcover, press the clip at the front ofthe cover, and swing it up.

Notice: Spilling liquid on anyelectrical component on thevehicle may damage it. Alwayskeep the covers on any electricalcomponent.


Vehicle Care 10-43

The vehicle may not be equipped with all of the fuses, relays, and featuresshown.

J-CaseFuses

Usage

6 Wiper

12 Starter

22 BrakeVacuum Pump

25 PowerWindows Rear

26 Power WindowsFront

27 Rear Defog

41 Cooling Fan High

43 Antilock BrakeSystem Pump

44 Cooling Fan Low

Mini Fuses Usage

1 Air ConditioningCompressor Clutch

2 TransmissionControl Module

3 Intercooler Pump


10-44 Vehicle Care

Mini Fuses Usage

5 Engine ControlModule Main

7 Pre-CatalyticConverter OxygenSensor

8 Post-CatalyticConverter OxygenSensor

9 Fuel Injectors– Even

10 Fuel Injectors – Odd

11 Cooling Fan Relay

14 Manifold Air Flow/Chassis Control

15 Ignition

16 Run/Crank IP

17 Sensing DiagnosticModule/Ignition

18 Run/Crank Body

Mini Fuses Usage

19 TransmissionControl Module/Ignition

20 Engine ControlModule/Ignition

31 Outside RearviewMirror

32 Canister VentSolenoid

33 Body ControlModule 6

34 Sunroof

35 Front Heated Seats

38 Washer Pump Front

40 Antilock BrakeSystem Valves

46 HID Headlamp –Left Front

47 HID Headlamp –Right Front

50 Fog Lamps

Mini Fuses Usage

51 Horn

52 Spare

55 High-BeamHeadlamp – RightFront

56 High-BeamHeadlamp – LeftFront

61 Heated Mirror

Mini Relays Usage

K26 Powertrain

K50 Run/Crank

K55 Rear Defog

K612 Cooling Fan High

K614 Cooling Fan Control

MicroRelays

Usage

K61 Starter


Vehicle Care 10-45

MicroRelays

Usage

K69 Wiper Control

K613 Cooling Fan Low

K617 Air ConditioningCompressor Clutch

K619 Wiper Speed

K627 High IntensityDischargeHeadlamps

K632 BrakeVacuum Pump

K641 Intercooler Pump

Instrument Panel FuseBlock

The instrument panel fuse block ison the end of the instrument panel,on the driver side of the vehicle. Toaccess the fuses, open the fusepanel door by pulling out.

To reinstall the door, push the doorback into its original location.


10-46 Vehicle Care

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

Fuses Usage

F1 Discrete LogicIgnition Switch

F2 Diagnostic LinkConnector

Fuses Usage

F3 Airbag

F4 Cluster

F5 Heating VentilationAir ConditioningController

Fuses Usage

F6 Body ControlModule 2

F8 Battery

F9 Spare

F10 Spare

F11 Spare

F12 Spare

F13 Display

F14 OnStar® UniversalHands-Free Phone(If Equipped)



F17 Power Outlet 1

F18 Power Outlet 2

F19 Steering WheelControls Backlight

F20 Spare


Vehicle Care 10-47

Fuses Usage

F21 Spare

F22 Spare

F23 Trunk

F24 Automatic OccupantSensing



F28 Front Heater,Ventilation, and AirConditioning



CircuitBreakers

Usage

CB7 Passenger Seat

CB26 Driver Seat

Relays Usage

K10 Retained AccessoryPower

K609 Trunk

SPARE SPARE

Rear Compartment FuseBlock

The rear compartment fuse block ison the right side of the trunk behinda cover. Remove the convenience

net retainers, the rear sill plate, andthe passenger side trim retainers,then swing the trim out of the way.


10-48 Vehicle Care

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

Fuses Usage

F1 Universal GarageDoor Opener/Ultra–sonic Rear ParkingAssist/InsideRearview Mirror

Fuses Usage

F2 Amplifier

F3 Radio

F4 Convertible Top 1

F5 Convertible Top 2

F6 Spare 1

Fuses Usage

F7 Real Time Damping

F8 Active ExhaustFlapper

F9 Spare 4

F10 Engine ControlModule/Battery

F11 Regulated VoltageControl

F12 Fuel System ControlModule

Relays Usage

R1 Spare

R2 Active ExhaustFlapper


Vehicle Care 10-49

Wheels and Tires

TiresEvery new GM vehicle hashigh-quality tires made by aleading tire manufacturer. Seethe warranty manual forinformation regarding the tirewarranty and where to getservice. For additionalinformation refer to the tiremanufacturer.

{ WARNING

. Poorly maintained andimproperly used tires aredangerous.

. Overloading the tires cancause overheating as aresult of too much flexing.There could be a blowout

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

and a serious crash. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑12.

. Underinflated tires posethe same danger asoverloaded tires. Theresulting crash couldcause serious injury.Check all tires frequentlyto maintain therecommended pressure.Tire pressure should bechecked when the tiresare cold.

. Overinflated tires are morelikely to be cut, punctured,or broken by a suddenimpact— such as whenhitting a pothole. Keeptires at the recommendedpressure.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Worn or old tires cancause a crash. If the treadis badly worn,replace them.

. Replace any tires thathave been damaged byimpacts with potholes,curbs, etc.

. Improperly repaired tirescan cause a crash. Onlythe dealer or anauthorized tire servicecenter should repair,replace, dismount, andmount the tires.

. Do not spin the tires inexcess of 56 km/h(35 mph) on slipperysurfaces such as snow,mud, ice, etc. Excessivespinning may cause thetires to explode.


10-50 Vehicle Care

All-Season TiresThis vehicle may come withall-season tires. These tires aredesigned to provide good overallperformance on most road surfacesand weather conditions. Originalequipment tires designed to GM'sspecific tire performance criteriahave a TPC specification codemolded onto the sidewall. Originalequipment all-season tires can beidentified by the last two charactersof this TPC code, which willbe “MS.”

Consider installing winter tires onthe vehicle if frequent driving onsnow or ice-covered roads isexpected. All-season tires provideadequate performance for mostwinter driving conditions, but theymay not offer the same level oftraction or performance as wintertires on snow or ice-covered roads.See Winter Tires on page 10‑50.

Winter TiresThis vehicle was not, originally,equipped with winter tires. Wintertires are designed for increasedtraction on snow and ice-coveredroads. Consider installing wintertires on the vehicle if frequentdriving on snow or ice-coveredroads is expected. See your dealerfor details regarding winter tireavailability and proper tire selection.Also, see Buying New Tires onpage 10‑65.

With winter tires, there may bedecreased dry road traction,increased road noise, and shortertread life. After changing to wintertires, be alert for changes in vehiclehandling and braking.

If using winter tires:. Use tires of the same brand and

tread type on all four wheelpositions.

. Use only radial ply tires of thesame size, load range, andspeed rating as the originalequipment tires.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipment tiresmay not be available for H, V, W, Y,and ZR speed rated tires. If wintertires with a lower speed rating arechosen, never exceed the tire'smaximum speed capability.

Summer TiresThis vehicle may come with highperformance summer tires. Thesetires have a special tread andcompound that are optimized formaximum dry and wet roadperformance. This special tread andcompound will decreaseperformance in cold climates, andon ice and snow. We recommendinstalling winter tires on the vehicleif frequent driving in coldtemperatures or on snow or icecovered roads is expected. SeeWinter Tires on page 10‑50.


Vehicle Care 10-51

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire ismolded into its sidewall. Theexamples show a typicalpassenger vehicle tire and acompact spare tire sidewall.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example

(1) Tire Size: The tire size is acombination of letters andnumbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,

and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection.

(2) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(3) DOT (Department ofTransportation): TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates that thetire is in compliance with theU.S. Department ofTransportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

DOT Tire Date ofManufacture: The last fourdigits of the TIN indicate the tiremanufactured date. The first two

digits represent the week (01–52) and the last two digits, theyear. For example, the thirdweek of the year 2010 wouldhave a four-digit DOT dateof 0310.

(4) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code are theTire Identification Number (TIN).The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(5) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(6) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required tograde tires based on three


10-52 Vehicle Care

performance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperatureresistance. For more informationsee Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 10‑67.

(7) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum load thatcan be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.

Compact Spare Tire Example

(1) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(2) Temporary Use Only: Thecompact spare tire or temporaryuse tire should not be driven atspeeds over 80 km/h (50 mph).The compact spare tire is foremergency use when a regularroad tire has lost air and goneflat. If the vehicle has a compactspare tire, see Compact SpareTire on page 10‑84 and If a TireGoes Flat on page 10‑70.

(3) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code are theTire Identification Number (TIN).The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(4) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum load thatcan be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.

(5) Tire Inflation: Thetemporary use tire or compactspare tire should be inflated to420 kPa (60 psi). For moreinformation on tire pressure andinflation see Tire Pressure onpage 10‑56.

(6) Tire Size: A combination ofletters and numbers define atire's width, height, aspect ratio,construction type, and servicedescription. The letter T as thefirst character in the tire sizemeans the tire is for temporaryuse only.

(7) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performance


Vehicle Care 10-53

criteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.

Tire Designations

Tire Size

The following is an example of atypical passenger vehicletire size.

(1) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:The United States version of ametric tire sizing system. Theletter P as the first character inthe tire size means a passenger

vehicle tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.

(2) Tire Width: The three-digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.

(3) Aspect Ratio: A two-digitnumber that indicates the tireheight-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 60, as shown initem 3 of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire's sidewall is60 percent as high as it is wide.

(4) Construction Code: A lettercode is used to indicate the typeof ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial plyconstruction; the letter D meansdiagonal or bias plyconstruction; and the letter Bmeans belted-bias plyconstruction.

(5) Rim Diameter: Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(6) Service Description: Thesecharacters represent the loadindex and speed rating of thetire. The load index representsthe load carrying capacity a tireis certified to carry. The speedrating is the maximum speed atire is certified to carry a load.

Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure: The amount ofair inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inch ofthe tire. Air pressure isexpressed in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch).

Accessory Weight: Thecombined weight of optionalaccessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories areautomatic transmission, power


10-54 Vehicle Care

steering, power brakes, powerwindows, power seats, and airconditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationshipof a tire's height to its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer ofcords between the plies and thetread. Cords may be made fromsteel or other reinforcingmaterials.

Bead: The tire bead containssteel wires wrapped by steelcords that hold the tire ontothe rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tirein which the plies are laid atalternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: Theamount of air pressure in a tire,measured in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch)

before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Tire Pressureon page 10‑56.

Curb Weight: The weight of amotor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil,and coolant, but withoutpassengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code moldedinto the sidewall of a tiresignifying that the tire is incompliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation(DOT) Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumericdesignator which can alsoidentify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand, anddate of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑12.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle WeightRating for the front axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑12.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle WeightRating for the rear axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑12.

Intended Outboard Sidewall:The side of an asymmetrical tire,that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metricunit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: Atire used on light duty trucks andsome multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assignednumber ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.


Vehicle Care 10-55

Maximum Inflation Pressure:The maximum air pressure towhich a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure ismolded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: Theload rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflationpressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight: The sum of curbweight, accessory weight,vehicle capacity weight, andproduction options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: Thenumber of occupants a vehicleis designed to seat multiplied by68 kg (150 lbs). See VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑12.

Occupant Distribution:Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: Theside of an asymmetrical tire thathas a particular side that faces

outward when mounted on avehicle. The side of the tire thatcontains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that ishigher or deeper than the samemoldings on the other sidewallof the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: Atire used on passenger cars andsome light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended InflationPressure: Vehiclemanufacturer's recommendedtire inflation pressure as shownon the tire placard. See TirePressure on page 10‑56 andVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑12.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatictire in which the ply cords thatextend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tireand upon which the tire beadsare seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating: Analphanumeric code assigned toa tire indicating the maximumspeed at which a tire canoperate.

Traction: The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface.The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire thatcomes into contact withthe road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrowbands, sometimes called wearbars, that show across the tread


10-56 Vehicle Care

of a tire when only 1.6 mm(1/16 in) of tread remains. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tireson page 10‑64.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards): A tireinformation system that providesconsumers with ratings for atire's traction, temperature, andtreadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tiremanufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures.The ratings are molded into thesidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading onpage 10‑67.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: Thenumber of designated seatingpositions multiplied by68 kg (150 lbs) plus the ratedcargo load. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑12.

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire: Load on an individual tiredue to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, andcargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A labelpermanently attached to avehicle showing the vehiclecapacity weight and the originalequipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure.See “Tire and LoadingInformation Label” under VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑12.

Tire PressureTires need the correct amount ofair pressure to operateeffectively.

Notice: Neither tireunderinflation noroverinflation is good.Underinflated tires, or tiresthat do not have enough air,can result in:

. Tire overloading andoverheating which couldlead to a blowout.

. Premature orirregular wear.

. Poor handling.

. Reduced fuel economy.

Overinflated tires, or tires thathave too much air, canresult in:. Unusual wear.. Poor handling.. Rough ride.. Needless damage fromroad hazards.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label on the vehicleindicates the original equipmenttires and the correct cold tireinflation pressures. Therecommended pressure is theminimum air pressure needed tosupport the vehicle's maximum


Vehicle Care 10-57

load carrying capacity. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑12.

How the vehicle is loadedaffects vehicle handling and ridecomfort. Never load the vehiclewith more weight than it wasdesigned to carry.

When to Check

Check the tires once a month ormore. Do not forget the compactspare, if the vehicle has one.The cold compact spare tirepressure should be at 420 kPa(60 psi). See Compact SpareTire on page 10‑84.

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegauge to check tire pressure.Proper tire inflation cannot bedetermined by looking at the tire.Check the tire inflation pressurewhen the tires are cold, meaning

the vehicle has not been drivenfor at least three hours or nomore than 1.6 km (1 mi).

Remove the valve cap from thetire valve stem. Press the tiregauge firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement.If the cold tire inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label, nofurther adjustment is necessary.If the inflation pressure is low,add air until the recommendedpressure is reached. If theinflation pressure is high, presson the metal stem in the centerof the tire valve to release air.

Recheck the tire pressure withthe tire gauge.

Return the valve caps on thevalve stems to prevent leaksand keep out dirt and moisture.

Tire Pressure forHigh-Speed Operation

{ WARNING

Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h(100mph) or higher, puts anadditional strain on tires.Sustained high-speed drivingcauses excessive heat buildupand can cause sudden tire failure.You could have a crash and youor others could be killed. Somehigh-speed rated tires requireinflation pressure adjustment forhigh-speed operation. Whenspeed limits and road conditionsare such that a vehicle can bedriven at high speeds, make surethe tires are rated for high-speedoperation, in excellent condition,and set to the correct cold tireinflation pressure for thevehicle load.


10-58 Vehicle Care

Vehicles with 245/45ZR20 103Y,P245/50ZR19 104W, 275/40ZR20 106Y, 285/35ZR20 (100Y),and 305/35ZR20 (104Y) size tires,have tires capable of highspeed use.

Make sure vehicles with 245/45ZR20 103Y, P245/50ZR19 104Wand 275/40ZR20 106Y size tires areinflated to the recommended coldinflation pressures before operatingthe vehicle at speeds over 160 km/h(100 mph). See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑12 and Tire Pressure onpage 10‑56.

Make sure vehicles with 285/35ZR20 (100Y), and 305/35ZR20(104Y) size tires are inflated to300 kPa (44 psi) before operatingthe vehicle at speeds of 160 km/h(100 mph) or higher.

Return the tires to therecommended cold tire inflationpressure when high-speed drivinghas ended. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑12 and Tire Pressure onpage 10‑56.

Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressurelevels. The TPMS sensors monitorthe air pressure in your tires andtransmit tire pressure readings to areceiver located in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard ortire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with atire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire

pressure telltale when one or moreof your tires is significantlyunder-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate themto the proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly under-inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under-inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency and tiretread life, and may affect thevehicle's handling and stoppingability.

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under-inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also beenequipped with a TPMS malfunctionindicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly.


Vehicle Care 10-59

The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups aslong as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10‑59.

Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules andwith Industry CanadaStandards

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑21 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)Rules and with Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Tire Pressure MonitorOperationThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).The TPMS is designed to warn thedriver when a low tire pressurecondition exists. TPMS sensors aremounted onto each tire and wheelassembly, excluding the spare tireand wheel assembly. The TPMSsensors monitor the air pressure inthe tires and transmit the tirepressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressure conditionis detected, the TPMS illuminatesthe low tire pressure warning lightlocated on the instrument cluster.If the warning light comes on, stopas soon as possible and inflate thetires to the recommended pressureshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑12.

A message to check the pressure ina specific tire displays in the DriverInformation Center (DIC) display.The low tire pressure warning lightand the DIC warning message comeon at each ignition cycle until thetires are inflated to the correctinflation pressure. Using the DIC,tire pressure levels can be viewed.For additional information and


10-60 Vehicle Care

details about the DIC operation anddisplays see Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑25.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thiscould be an early indicator that theair pressure is getting low and mustbe inflated to the proper pressure.

A Tire and Loading Information labelshows the size of the originalequipment tires and the correctinflation pressure for the tires whenthey are cold. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑12, for an exampleof the Tire and Loading Informationlabel and its location. Also see TirePressure on page 10‑56.

The TPMS can warn about a lowtire pressure condition but it doesnot replace normal tiremaintenance. See Tire Inspectionon page 10‑62, Tire Rotation onpage 10‑63 and Tires onpage 10‑49.

Notice: Tire sealant materials arenot all the same. A non-approvedtire sealant could damage theTPMS sensors. TPMS sensordamage caused by using anincorrect tire sealant is notcovered by the vehicle warranty.Always use only theGM-approved tire sealantavailable through your dealer orincluded in the vehicle.

Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kitsuse a GM-approved liquid tiresealant. Using non-approved tiresealants could damage the TPMSsensors. See Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit on page 10‑72 forinformation regarding the inflator kitmaterials and instructions.

TPMS Malfunction Light andMessage

The TPMS will not function properlyif one or more of the TPMS sensorsare missing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, thelow tire warning light flashes forabout one minute and then stays onfor the remainder of the ignitioncycle. A DIC warning message alsodisplays. The malfunction light andDIC warning message come on ateach ignition cycle until the problemis corrected. Some of the conditionsthat can cause these to comeon are:. One of the road tires has been

replaced with the spare tire. Thespare tire does not have aTPMS sensor. The malfunctionlight and DIC message shouldgo off after the road tire isreplaced and the sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See "TPMS SensorMatching Process" later in thissection.


Vehicle Care 10-61

. The TPMS sensor matchingprocess was not done or notcompleted successfully afterrotating the tires. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off aftersuccessfully completing thesensor matching process. See"TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess" later in this section.

. One or more TPMS sensors aremissing or damaged. The DICmessage and the malfunctionlight should go off when theTPMS sensors are installed andthe sensor matching process isperformed successfully. Seeyour dealer for service.

. Replacement tires or wheels donot match the original equipmenttires or wheels. Tires and wheelsother than those recommendedcould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tires on page 10‑65.

. Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioningproperly, it cannot detect or signal alow tire condition. See your dealerfor service if the TPMS malfunctionlight and DIC message come onand stay on.

TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess

Each TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. The identificationcode needs to be matched to a newtire/wheel position after rotating thetires or replacing one or more of theTPMS sensors. The TPMS sensormatching process should also beperformed after replacing a sparetire with a road tire containing theTPMS sensor. The malfunction lightand the DIC message should go offat the next ignition cycle. Thesensors are matched to the tire/wheel positions, using a TPMS

relearn tool, in the following order:driver side front tire, passenger sidefront tire, passenger side rear tire,and driver side rear. See yourdealer for service or to purchase arelearn tool.

There are two minutes to match thefirst tire/wheel position, andfive minutes overall to match all fourtire/wheel positions. If it takeslonger, the matching process stopsand must be restarted.

The TPMS sensor matchingprocess is:

1. Set the parking brake.


3. Use the MENU button to selectthe Vehicle Information menu inthe Driver InformationCenter (DIC).

4. Use the thumbwheel to scroll tothe Tire Pressure Menu itemscreen.


10-62 Vehicle Care

5. Press the SET/CLR button tobegin the sensor matchingprocess.

A message requestingacceptance of the processshould display.

6. Press the SET/CLR button againto confirm the selection.

The horn sounds twice to signalthe receiver is in relearn modeand the TIRE LEARNINGACTIVE message displays onthe DIC screen.

7. Start with the driver sidefront tire.

8. Place the relearn tool againstthe tire sidewall, near the valvestem. Then press the button toactivate the TPMS sensor.A horn chirp confirms that thesensor identification code hasbeen matched to this tire andwheel position.

9. Proceed to the passenger sidefront tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 8.

10. Proceed to the passenger siderear tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 8.

11. Proceed to the driver side reartire, and repeat the procedurein Step 8. The horn sounds twotimes to indicate the sensoridentification code has beenmatched to the driver side reartire, and the TPMS sensormatching process is no longeractive. The TIRE LEARNINGACTIVE message on the DICdisplay screen goes off.

12. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.

13. Set all four tires to therecommended air pressurelevel as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.

Tire InspectionWe recommend that the tires,including the spare tire, if thevehicle has one, be inspectedfor signs of wear or damage atleast once a month.

Replace the tire if:. The indicators at three or

more places around the tirecan be seen.

. There is cord or fabricshowing through the tire'srubber.

. The tread or sidewall iscracked, cut, or snaggeddeep enough to show cord orfabric.

. The tire has a bump, bulge,or split.

. The tire has a puncture, cut,or other damage that cannotbe repaired well because ofthe size or location of thedamage.


Vehicle Care 10-63

Tire RotationIf the vehicle has non-directionaltires, they should be rotatedevery 12 000 km/7,500 mi. SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11‑2.

Tires are rotated to achieve auniform wear for all tires. Thefirst rotation is the mostimportant.

Anytime unusual wear isnoticed, rotate the tires as soonas possible, check for proper tireinflation pressure, and check fordamaged tires or wheels. If theunusual wear continues after therotation, check the wheelalignment. See When It Is Timefor New Tires on page 10‑64and Wheel Replacement onpage 10‑69.

Directional tires should not berotated. Each tire and wheelshould be used only in the

position it is in. Directional tireswill have an arrow on the tireindicating the proper direction ofrotation or will have “left” or“right” molded on the sidewall.

Use this rotation pattern if thevehicle has different size tireson the front and rear and theyare non-directional.

Different tire sizes should not berotated front to rear.

Use this rotation pattern whenrotating tires of the same sizeinstalled on all four wheelpositions.

If the vehicle has a compactspare tire, do not include it in thetire rotation.

Adjust the front and rear tires tothe recommended inflationpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label afterthe tires have been rotated. See


10-64 Vehicle Care

Tire Pressure on page 9‑12 andVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑12.

Reset the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation onpage 10‑59.

Check that all wheel nuts areproperly tightened. See “WheelNut Torque” under Capacitiesand Specifications onpage 12‑2.

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, a cloth or a paper

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

towel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

Lightly coat the center of thewheel hub with wheel bearinggrease after a wheel change ortire rotation to prevent corrosionor rust build-up. Do not getgrease on the flat wheelmounting surface or on thewheel nuts or bolts.

When It Is Time for NewTiresFactors such as maintenance,temperatures, driving speeds,vehicle loading, and road conditionsaffect the wear rate of the tires.

Treadwear indicators are one way totell when it is time for new tires.Treadwear indicators appear whenthe tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)or less of tread remaining. See TireInspection on page 10‑62 and TireRotation on page 10‑63.

The rubber in tires ages over time.This also applies to the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, even if it isnever used. Multiple factorsincluding temperatures, loadingconditions, and inflation pressuremaintenance affect how fast agingtakes place. GM recommends thattires, including the spare if


Vehicle Care 10-65

equipped, be replaced after sixyears, regardless of tread wear. Thetire manufacturer date is the lastfour digits of the DOT TireIdentification Number (TIN) which ismolded into one side of the tiresidewall. The first two digitsrepresent the week (01–52) and thelast two digits, the year. Forexample, the third week of the year2010 would have a four-digit DOTdate of 0310.

Vehicle Storage

Tires age when stored normallymounted on a parked vehicle. Parka vehicle that will be stored for atleast a month in a cool, dry, cleanarea away from direct sunlight toslow aging. This area should be freeof grease, gasoline, or othersubstances that can deterioraterubber.

Parking for an extended period cancause flat spots on the tires thatmay result in vibrations whiledriving. When storing a vehicle for

at least a month, remove the tires orraise the vehicle to reduce theweight from the tires.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matchedspecific tires for the vehicle. Theoriginal equipment tires installedwere designed to meet GeneralMotors Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification (TPC Spec)system rating. Whenreplacement tires are needed,GM strongly recommendsbuying tires with the same TPCSpec rating.

GM's exclusive TPC Specsystem considers over a dozencritical specifications that impactthe overall performance of thevehicle, including brake systemperformance, ride and handling,traction control, and tirepressure monitoringperformance. GM's TPC Spec

number is molded onto the tire'ssidewall near the tire size. If thetires have an all-season treaddesign, the TPC Spec numberwill be followed by MS for mudand snow. See Tire SidewallLabeling on page 10‑51.

GM recommends replacing worntires in complete sets of four.Uniform tread depth on all tireswill help to maintain theperformance of the vehicle.Braking and handlingperformance may be adverselyaffected if all the tires are notreplaced at the same time.If proper rotation andmaintenance have been done,all four tires should wear out atabout the same time. See TireRotation on page 10‑63 forinformation on proper tirerotation. However, if it isnecessary to replace only oneaxle set of worn tires, place thenew tires on the rear axle.


10-66 Vehicle Care

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipmenttires may not be available for H,V, W, Y and ZR speed ratedtires. Never exceed the wintertire's maximum speed capabilitywhen using winter tires with alower speed rating.

{ WARNING

Tires could explode duringimproper service. Attemptingto mount or dismount a tirecould cause injury or death.Only your dealer or authorizedtire service center shouldmount or dismount the tires.

{ WARNING

Mixing tires of different sizes,brands, or types may causeloss of control of the vehicle,resulting in a crash or othervehicle damage. Use thecorrect size, brand, and typeof tires on all wheels.

{ WARNING

Using bias-ply tires on thevehicle may cause the wheelrim flanges to develop cracksafter many miles of driving.A tire and/or wheel could failsuddenly and cause a crash.Use only radial-ply tires withthe wheels on the vehicle.

If the vehicle tires must bereplaced with a tire that does nothave a TPC Spec number, make

sure they are the same size,load range, speed rating, andconstruction (radial) as theoriginal tires.

Vehicles that have a tirepressure monitoring systemcould give an inaccuratelow-pressure warning if non-TPCSpec rated tires are installed.See Tire Pressure MonitorSystem on page 10‑58.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label indicates theoriginal equipment tires on thevehicle. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑12.

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf wheels or tires are installed thatare a different size than the originalequipment wheels and tires, vehicleperformance, including its braking,ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollover


Vehicle Care 10-67

may be affected. If the vehicle haselectronic systems such as antilockbrakes, rollover airbags, tractioncontrol, electronic stability control,or All-Wheel Drive, the performanceof these systems can also beaffected.

{ WARNING

If different sized wheels are used,there may not be an acceptablelevel of performance and safety iftires not recommended for thosewheels are selected. Thisincreases the chance of a crashand serious injury. Only use GMspecific wheel and tire systemsdeveloped for the vehicle, andhave them properly installed by aGM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires onpage 10‑65 and Accessories andModifications on page 10‑3.

Uniform Tire QualityGradingQuality grades can be foundwhere applicable on the tiresidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width. Forexample:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

The following information relatesto the system developed by theUnited States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA), which grades tires bytreadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. Thisapplies only to vehicles sold inthe United States. The gradesare molded on the sidewalls ofmost passenger car tires. TheUniform Tire Quality Grading(UTQG) system does not applyto deep tread, winter tires,compact spare tires, tires with

nominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),or to some limited-productiontires.

While the tires available onGeneral Motors passenger carsand light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, theymust also conform to federalsafety requirements andadditional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC)standards.

All Passenger Car Tires MustConform to Federal SafetyRequirements In Addition ToThese Grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on aspecified government testcourse. For example, a tire


10-68 Vehicle Care

graded 150 would wear one andone-half (1½) times as well onthe government course as a tiregraded 100. The relativeperformance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and maydepart significantly from thenorm due to variations in drivinghabits, service practices anddifferences in roadcharacteristics and climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, fromhighest to lowest, are AA, A, B,and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wetpavement as measured undercontrolled conditions onspecified government testsurfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C mayhave poor traction performance.Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based on

straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not includeacceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature – A, B, C

The temperature grades are A(the highest), B, and C,representing the tire's resistanceto the generation of heat and itsability to dissipate heat whentested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can leadto sudden tire failure. The gradeC corresponds to a level ofperformance which allpassenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B andA represent higher levels of

performance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimumrequired by law. Warning: Thetemperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that isproperly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and TireBalanceThe tires and wheels were alignedand balanced at the factory toprovide the longest tire life and bestoverall performance. Adjustments towheel alignment and tire balancingwill not be necessary on a regularbasis. However, check thealignment if there is unusual tirewear or if the vehicle is pulling toone side or the other. If the vehiclevibrates when driving on a smooth


Vehicle Care 10-69

road, the tires and wheels mightneed to be rebalanced. See yourdealer for proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly rusted orcorroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, andwheel nuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air, replace it.Some aluminum wheels can berepaired. See your dealer if any ofthese conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind ofwheel that is needed.

Each new wheel should have thesame load-carrying capacity,diameter, width, offset, and bemounted the same way as the one itreplaces.

Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheelnuts, or Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS) sensors with newGM original equipment parts.

{ WARNING

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheelnuts can be dangerous. It couldaffect the braking and handling ofthe vehicle. Tires can lose air,and cause loss of control, causinga crash. Always use the correctwheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel canalso cause problems with bearinglife, brake cooling, speedometeror odometer calibration,headlamp aim, rear differential,bumper height, vehicle groundclearance, and tire or tire chainclearance to the body andchassis.

See If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 10‑70 for more information.

Used Replacement Wheels

{ WARNING

Replacing a wheel with a usedone is dangerous. How it hasbeen used or how far it has beendriven may be unknown. It couldfail suddenly and cause a crash.When replacing wheels, use anew GM original equipmentwheel.

Tire Chains

{ WARNING

Do not use tire chains. There isnot enough clearance. Tire chainsused on a vehicle without theproper amount of clearance cancause damage to the brakes,suspension, or other vehicleparts. The area damaged by thetire chains could cause loss of

(Continued)


10-70 Vehicle Care

WARNING (Continued)

control and a crash. Use anothertype of traction device only if itsmanufacturer recommends it forthe vehicle's tire size combinationand road conditions. Follow thatmanufacturer's instructions. Toavoid vehicle damage, driveslowly and readjust or remove thetraction device if it contacts thevehicle. Do not spin the wheels.If traction devices are used, installthem on the rear tires.

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blow outwhile driving, especially if the tiresare maintained properly. See Tireson page 10‑49. If air goes out of atire, it is much more likely to leakout slowly. But if there is ever ablowout, here are a few tips aboutwhat to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tirecreates a drag that pulls the vehicletoward that side. Take your foot offthe accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer tomaintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop, well off theroad, if possible.

A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid andmay require the same correction asused in a skid. Stop pressing theaccelerator pedal and steer tostraighten the vehicle. It may bevery bumpy and noisy. Gently braketo a stop, well off the road,if possible.

{ WARNING

Driving on a flat tire will causepermanent damage to the tire.Re-inflating a tire after it has beendriven on while severelyunderinflated or flat may cause ablowout and a serious crash.Never attempt to re-inflate a tirethat has been driven on whileseverely underinflated or flat.Have your dealer or an authorizedtire service center repair orreplace the flat tire as soon aspossible.

{ WARNING

Lifting a vehicle and getting underit to do maintenance or repairs isdangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only for

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 10-71

WARNING (Continued)

changing a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place, well off the road,if possible. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 6‑4.

{ WARNING

Changing a tire can bedangerous. The vehicle can slipoff the jack and roll over or fallcausing injury or death. Find alevel place to change the tire. Tohelp prevent the vehicle frommoving:

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put an automatictransmission in P (Park) or amanual transmission in1 (First) or R (Reverse).

3. Turn off the engine and donot restart while the vehicleis raised.

4. Do not allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

5. Place wheel blocks on bothsides of the tire at theopposite corner of the tirebeing changed.

This vehicle may come with a jackand spare tire or a tire sealant andcompressor kit. To use the jackingequipment to change a spare tiresafely, follow the instructions below.Then see Tire Changing onpage 10‑79. To use the tire sealant

and compressor kit, see TireSealant and Compressor Kit onpage 10‑72.

When the vehicle has a flat tire (2),use the following example as aguide to assist you in the placementof wheel blocks (1).

1. Wheel Block

2. Flat Tire

The following information explainshow to repair or change a tire.


10-72 Vehicle Care

Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit

{ WARNING

Idling a vehicle in an enclosedarea with poor ventilation isdangerous. Engine exhaust mayenter the vehicle. Engine exhaustcontains carbon monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death. Never run theengine in an enclosed area thathas no fresh air ventilation. Formore information, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑25.

{ WARNING

Overinflating a tire could causethe tire to rupture and you orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the tire sealant

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

and compressor kit instructionsand inflate the tire to itsrecommended pressure. Do notexceed the recommendedpressure.

{ WARNING

Storing the tire sealant andcompressor kit or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store the tiresealant and compressor kit in itsoriginal location.

Tire sealant may not completelyseal a 305/35ZR20 tire below–18° C (0° F).

If this vehicle has a tire sealant andcompressor kit, there may not be aspare tire, tire changing equipment,and on some vehicles there may notbe a place to store a tire.

The tire sealant and compressorcan be used to temporarily sealpunctures up to 6 mm (0.25 in) inthe tread area of the tire. It can alsobe used to inflate an underinflated tire.

If the tire has been separated fromthe wheel, has damaged sidewalls,or has a large puncture, the tire istoo severely damaged for the tiresealant and compressor kit to beeffective. See Roadside AssistanceProgram (Mexico) on page 13‑7 orRoadside Assistance Program (U.S.and Canada) on page 13‑11.

Read and follow all of the tiresealant and compressor kitinstructions.


Vehicle Care 10-73

The kit includes:

1. On/Off Button

2. Selector Switch (Sealant/Air orAir Only)

3. Pressure Relief Button

4. Pressure Gauge

5. Air Only Hose (Black)

6. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear)

7. Power Plug

Tire Sealant

Read and follow the safe handlinginstructions on the label adhered tothe compressor.

Check the tire sealant expirationdate on the sealant canister. Thesealant canister should be replacedbefore its expiration date.Replacement sealant canisters areavailable at your local dealer. See“Removal and Installation of theSealant Canister” following.

There is only enough sealant to sealone tire. After usage, the sealantcanister and sealant/air hoseassembly must be replaced. See“Removal and Installation of theSealant Canister” following.

Using the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit to TemporarilySeal and Inflate aPunctured Tire

Follow the directions closely forcorrect sealant usage.

When using the tire sealant andcompressor kit during coldtemperatures, warm the kit in aheated environment for five minutes.This will help to inflate the tirefaster.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 6‑4.

See If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 10‑70 for other importantsafety warnings.


10-74 Vehicle Care

Do not remove any objects thathave penetrated the tire.

1. Remove the tire sealant andcompressor kit from its storagelocation. See Storing the TireSealant and Compressor Kit onpage 10‑78.

2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (6)and the power plug (7).

3. Place the kit on the ground.

Make sure the tire valve stem ispositioned close to the groundso the hose will reach it.

4. Remove the valve stem cap fromthe flat tire by turning itcounterclockwise.

5. Attach the sealant/air hose (6)onto the tire valve stem. Turn itclockwise until it is tight.

6. Plug the power plug (7) into theaccessory power outlet in thevehicle. Unplug all items fromother accessory power outlets.See Power Outlets on page 5‑5.

If the vehicle has an accessorypower outlet, do not use thecigarette lighter.

If the vehicle only has a cigarettelighter, use the cigarette lighter.

Do not pinch the power plugcord in the door or window.

7. Start the vehicle. The vehiclemust be running while using theair compressor.

8. Turn the selector switch (2)clockwise to the Sealant + Airposition.

9. Press the on/off button (1) toturn the tire sealant andcompressor kit on.

The compressor will injectsealant and air into the tire.

The pressure gauge (4) willinitially show a high pressurewhile the compressor pushes thesealant into the tire. Once thesealant is completely dispersedinto the tire, the pressure willquickly drop and start to riseagain as the tire inflates withair only.

10. Inflate the tire to therecommended inflationpressure using the pressuregauge (4). The recommendedinflation pressure can be foundon the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See TirePressure on page 10‑56.

The pressure gauge (4) mayread higher than the actual tirepressure while the compressoris on. Turn the compressor offto get an accurate pressure


Vehicle Care 10-75

reading. The compressor maybe turned on/off until thecorrect pressure is reached.

Notice: If the recommendedpressure cannot be reached afterapproximately 25 minutes, thevehicle should not be drivenfarther. The tire is too severelydamaged and the tire sealant andcompressor kit cannot inflate thetire. Remove the power plug fromthe accessory power outlet andunscrew the inflating hose fromthe tire valve. See RoadsideAssistance Program (Mexico) onpage 13‑7 or Roadside AssistanceProgram (U.S. and Canada) onpage 13‑11.

11. Press the on/off button (1) toturn the tire sealant andcompressor kit off.

The tire is not sealed and willcontinue to leak air until thevehicle is driven and thesealant is distributed in the tire;therefore, Steps 12–18 must bedone immediately afterStep 11.

Be careful while handling thetire sealant and compressor kitas it could be warm afterusage.

12. Unplug the power plug (7) fromthe accessory power outlet inthe vehicle.

13. Turn the sealant/air hose (6)counterclockwise to remove itfrom the tire valve stem.

14. Replace the tire valvestem cap.

15. Return the sealant/air hose (6)and the power plug (7) back intheir original locations.

16. If the flat tire was able to inflateto the recommended inflationpressure, remove themaximum speed label from thesealant canister and place it ina highly visible location. Do notexceed the speed on this labeluntil the damaged tire isrepaired or replaced.

17. Return the equipment to itsoriginal storage location in thevehicle.

18. Immediately drive the vehicle8 km (5 mi) to distribute thesealant in the tire.


10-76 Vehicle Care

19. Stop at a safe location andcheck the tire pressure. Referto Steps 1–11 under “Using theTire Sealant and CompressorKit without Sealant to Inflate aTire (Not Punctured).”

If the tire pressure has fallenmore than 68 kPa (10 psi)below the recommendedinflation pressure, stop drivingthe vehicle. The tire is tooseverely damaged and the tiresealant cannot seal the tire.See Roadside AssistanceProgram (Mexico) onpage 13‑7 or RoadsideAssistance Program (U.S. andCanada) on page 13‑11.

If the tire pressure has notdropped more than 68 kPa(10 psi) from the recommendedinflation pressure, use thecompressor kit to inflate the tireto the recommended inflationpressure.

20. Wipe off any sealant from thewheel, tire, and vehicle.

21. Dispose of the used sealantcanister and sealant/air hose(6) assembly at a local dealeror in accordance with localstate codes and practices.

22. Replace it with a new canisteravailable from your dealer.

23. After temporarily sealing a tireusing the tire sealant andcompressor kit, take thevehicle to an authorized dealerwithin 161 km (100 mi) ofdriving to have the tire repairedor replaced.

Using the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit withoutSealant to Inflate a Tire (NotPunctured)

To use the air compressor to inflatea tire with air only and not sealant:

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 6‑4.

See If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 10‑70 for other importantsafety warnings.


Vehicle Care 10-77

1. Remove the tire sealant andcompressor kit from its storagelocation. See Storing the TireSealant and Compressor Kit onpage 10‑78.

2. Unwrap the air only hose (5) andthe power plug (7).

3. Place the kit on the ground.

Make sure the tire valve stem ispositioned close to the groundso the hose will reach it.

4. Remove the tire valve stem capfrom the flat tire by turning itcounterclockwise.

5. Attach the air only hose (5) ontothe tire valve stem by turning itclockwise until it is tight.

6. Plug the power plug (7) into theaccessory power outlet in thevehicle. Unplug all items fromother accessory power outlets.See Power Outlets on page 5‑5.

If the vehicle has an accessorypower outlet, do not use thecigarette lighter.

If the vehicle only has a cigarettelighter, use the cigarette lighter.

Do not pinch the power plugcord in the door or window.

7. Start the vehicle. The vehiclemust be running while using theair compressor.

8. Turn the selector switch (2)counterclockwise to the Air Onlyposition.

9. Press the on/off button (1) toturn the compressor on.

The compressor will inflate thetire with air only.

10. Inflate the tire to therecommended inflationpressure using the pressuregauge (4). The recommendedinflation pressure can be foundon the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See TirePressure on page 10‑56.

The pressure gauge (4) mayread higher than the actual tirepressure while the compressoris on. Turn the compressor offto get an accurate reading. Thecompressor may be turned on/off until the correct pressure isreached. If the tire is inflatedhigher than the recommendedpressure, press the pressurerelief button (3), if equipped,until the proper pressurereading is reached. This optionis only functional when usingthe air only hose (5).


10-78 Vehicle Care

11. Press the on/off button (1) toturn the tire sealant andcompressor kit off.

Be careful while handling thetire sealant and compressor kitas it could be warm afterusage.

12. Unplug the power plug (7) fromthe accessory power outlet inthe vehicle.

13. Disconnect the air onlyhose (5) from the tire valvestem, by turning itcounterclockwise, and replacethe tire valve stem cap.

14. Return the air only hose (5)and the power plug (7) back totheir original locations.

15. Return the equipment to itsoriginal storage location in thevehicle.

Removal and Installation of theSealant Canister

To remove the sealant canister:

1. Remove the plastic cover.

2. Unscrew the connector (2) fromthe canister (1).

3. Pull up on the canister (1) toremove it.

4. Replace with a new canisterwhich is available from yourdealer.

5. Push the new canister intoplace.

6. Screw the connector (2) to thecanister (1).

7. Slide the plastic cover back on.

Storing the Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit

The tire sealant and compressor kitis in a foam container in the trunk.


2. Remove the carpet.


Vehicle Care 10-79

3. Turn the center retainercounterclockwise to remove thecover.

4. Remove the tire sealant andcompressor kit from the foamcontainer.

To store the tire sealant andcompressor kit, reverse the steps.

Tire Changing

Removing the Spare Tire andTools

Spare Tire


2. Remove the carpet.

3. Turn the center retainercounterclockwise to remove thespare tire cover.

4. Remove the spare tire and placeit next to the tire being changed.

Tools

The jack and tools are stored belowthe spare tire.

Coin/Pierce Jack with Two-PieceWrench

1. Tool Container

2. Two-Piece Wrench

3. Strap

4. Jack Handle Extension

5. Coin/Pierce Jack


10-80 Vehicle Care

Hex-Head Jack with Three-PieceWrench

1. Tool Container

2. Three-Piece Wrench

3. Strap

4. Hex Head Jack

1. Tool Container

2. Jack

3. End of the Jack

1. Turn the end of the jack (3)counterclockwise to loosen it.Remove the jack (2) from theretaining bracket.

2. Remove the tool container (1).

3. Remove the tools and tire strapfrom the tool container.

4. Place the tools next to the tirebeing changed.

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

1. Do a safety check beforeproceeding. See If a Tire GoesFlat on page 10‑70 for moreinformation.

2. If the vehicle has wheel boltcaps, remove the caps. Storethe caps with the wheel cover.

3. Use the fully extended wheelwrench to loosen all the wheelnuts one-half turncounterclockwise. Do notremove them yet.


Vehicle Care 10-81

Notice: Make sure that the jacklift head is in the correct positionor you may damage your vehicle.The repairs would not be coveredby your warranty.

4. Position the jack lift head at thejack location nearest the flat tire.The location is indicated by amark on the bottom edge of thevehicle. The jack must not beused in any other position.

Raise the jack until it engageswith the jacking point.

{ WARNING

Getting under a vehicle when it islifted on a jack is dangerous.If the vehicle slips off the jack,you could be badly injured orkilled. Never get under a vehiclewhen it is supported only bya jack.

{ WARNING

Lifting a vehicle and getting underit to do maintenance or repairs isdangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

{ WARNING

Raising the vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned candamage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To helpavoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lifthead into the proper locationbefore raising the vehicle.

5. If you have a coin/pierce jack,attach the jack handle extensionto the jack by sliding the hookthrough the end of the jack andinsert the other end of the jackhandle into the wrench.

If you have a hex head jack,place the hex tube end of thewrench over the hex head ofthe jack.


10-82 Vehicle Care

Coin/Pierce Jack and Wrench

Hex Head Jack and Wrench

6. Raise the vehicle by turning thewrench clockwise until thevehicle is far enough off theground to allow enough room forthe compact spare tire to fitunder the vehicle.

Keep the hook parallel to theground. The wrench may needto be removed and repositionedto continue turning it.

7. Remove all of the wheel nutsand place them in a dry, cleanplace to avoid getting dirt in thethreads.

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, a cloth or a papertowel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.


Vehicle Care 10-83

8. Remove any rust or dirt from thewheel bolts, mounting surfaces,and spare wheel.

9. Place the compact spare tire onthe wheel-mounting surface.

{ WARNING

Never use oil or grease on boltsor nuts because the nuts mightcome loose. The vehicle's wheelcould fall off, causing a crash.

10. Reinstall the wheel nuts withthe rounded end of the nutstoward the wheel. Tighten eachnut as much as possible usingthe wheel wrench until thewheel is held firmly againstthe hub.

Use your free hand to preventthe wheel from turning whileyou are tightening.

11. Lower the vehicle by turningthe wrench counterclockwise.Lower the jack completely.

12. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly ina crisscross sequence, asshown.

{ WARNING

Wheel nuts that are improperly orincorrectly tightened can causethe wheels to become loose orcome off. The wheel nuts shouldbe tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specificationafter replacing. Follow the torquespecification supplied by theaftermarket manufacturer whenusing accessory locking wheelnuts. See Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2 fororiginal equipment wheel nuttorque specifications.

Notice: Improperly tightenedwheel nuts can lead to brakepulsation and rotor damage. Toavoid expensive brake repairs,evenly tighten the wheel nuts inthe proper sequence and to the


10-84 Vehicle Care

proper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications onpage 12‑2 for the wheel nuttorque specification.

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{ WARNING

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these inthe proper place.

To store a flat or spare tire andtools:

1. Return the jack and tools as theywere originally stored in thetrunk.

2. Return the spare tire cover as itwas in the trunk.

3. Install the retainer nut and turn itclockwise until tight.

4. Return the rear trunk carpet.

5. Place the flat tire face up on theload floor.

6. Route the strap provided, asshown, to secure the flat tire.

The compact spare tire is fortemporary use only. Replace thecompact spare with a full-size tire assoon as possible.

Compact Spare Tire

{ WARNING

Driving with more than onecompact spare tire at a time couldresult in loss of braking andhandling. This could lead to acrash and you or others could beinjured. Use only one compactspare tire at a time.

If this vehicle has a compact sparetire, it was fully inflated when new;however, it can lose air over time.Check the inflation pressureregularly. It should be 420 kPa(60 psi).

Stop as soon as possible and checkthat the spare tire is correctlyinflated after being installed on thevehicle. The compact spare tire isdesigned for temporary use only.


Vehicle Care 10-85

The vehicle will perform differentlywith the spare tire installed and it isrecommended that the vehiclespeed be limited to 80 km/h(50 mph). To conserve the tread ofthe spare tire, have the standard tirerepaired or replaced as soon asconvenient and return the spare tireto the storage area.

Notice: When the compact spareis installed, do not take thevehicle through an automatic carwash with guide rails. Thecompact spare can get caught onthe rails which can damage thetire, wheel, and other parts of thevehicle.

Do not use the compact spare onother vehicles.

Do not mix the compact spare tire orwheel with other wheels or tires.They will not fit. Keep the spare tireand its wheel together.

Notice: Tire chains will not fit thecompact spare. Using them candamage the vehicle and thechains. Do not use tire chains onthe compact spare.

Jump StartingFor more information about thevehicle battery, see Battery onpage 10‑33.

If the battery has run down, try touse another vehicle and somejumper cables to start your vehicle.Be sure to use the following steps todo it safely.

{ WARNING

Batteries can hurt you. They canbe dangerous because:

. They contain acid that canburn you.

. They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

. They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of thesethings can hurt you.


10-86 Vehicle Care

Notice: Ignoring these stepscould result in costly damage tothe vehicle that would not becovered by the warranty.

Trying to start the vehicle bypushing or pulling it will notwork, and it could damage thevehicle.

1. Remote Positve (+) Terminal

2. Remote Negative (-) Terminal

The jump start remote positive (1)and negative (2) terminals are in theengine compartment on the driverside of the vehicle.

These terminals are used instead ofa direct connection to the battery.

The positive jump start connectionis covered by a red cap. Remove toexpose the terminal.

1. Check the other vehicle. It musthave a 12-volt battery with anegative ground system.

Notice: Only use a vehicle thathas a 12-volt system with anegative ground for jumpstarting. If the other vehicle doesnot have a 12-volt system with anegative ground, both vehiclescan be damaged.

2. Position the two vehicles so thatthey are not touching.

3. Set the parking brake firmly.Vehicles with an automatictransmission should be inP (Park). See Shifting Into Parkon page 9‑22. Vehicles with amanual transmission should bein Neutral. See Parking (ManualTransmission) on page 9‑24.

Notice: If any accessories are lefton or plugged in during the jumpstarting procedure, they could bedamaged. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Whenever possible,turn off or unplug all accessorieson either vehicle when jumpstarting the vehicle.

4. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFFand switch off all lights andaccessories in both vehicles,except the hazard warningflashers if needed.

{ WARNING

An electric fan can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can injure you. Keep hands,clothing and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.


Vehicle Care 10-87

{ WARNING

Using a match near a battery cancause battery gas to explode.People have been hurt doing this,and some have been blinded.Use a flashlight if you need morelight.

Be sure the battery has enoughwater. You do not need to addwater to the battery installed inyour new vehicle. But if a batteryhas filler caps, be sure the rightamount of fluid is there. If it is low,add water to take care of thatfirst. If you do not, explosive gascould be present.

Battery fluid contains acid thatcan burn you. Do not get it onyou. If you accidentally get it inyour eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with water and getmedical help immediately.

{ WARNING

Fans or other moving engineparts can injure you badly. Keepyour hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.

5. Connect one end of the redpositive (+) cable to the jumpstart positive (+) post.

6. Connect the other end of the redpositive (+) cable to thepositive (+) terminal of the goodbattery.

7. Connect one end of the blacknegative (–) cable to thenegative (–) terminal of the goodbattery.

8. Connect the other end of theblack negative (–) cable to thenegative (–) post.

9. Start the engine in the vehiclewith the good battery and runthe engine at idle speed for atleast four minutes.

10. Try to start the vehicle that hadthe dead battery. If it will notstart after a few tries, itprobably needs service.

Notice: If the jumper cables areconnected or removed in thewrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage thevehicle. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always connect and remove thejumper cables in the correctorder, making sure that thecables do not touch each other orother metal.

Jumper Cable Removal

Reverse the sequence exactly whenremoving the jumper cables.


10-88 Vehicle Care

Towing

Towing the VehicleNotice: Incorrectly towing adisabled vehicle may causedamage. The damage would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Have the vehicle towed on a flatbedcar carrier. A wheel lift tow truckcould damage the vehicle.

Due to low ramp angles on the ZL1,use care when loading the vehicleonto a flatbed carrier. Front springspacers are provided for lifting thefront suspension.

Consult your dealer or aprofessional towing service if thedisabled vehicle must be towed.

To tow the vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes,such as behind a motor home, see“Recreational Vehicle Towing” in thissection.

Recreational VehicleTowingNotice: Dolly towing or dinghytowing the vehicle may causedamage because of reducedground clearance. Always put thevehicle on a flatbed truck ortrailer.

The vehicle was neither designednor intended to be towed with any ofits wheels on the ground. If thevehicle must be towed, see “Towingthe Vehicle” earlier in this section.


Vehicle Care 10-89

Appearance Care

Exterior Care

Washing the Vehicle

To preserve the vehicle's finish,wash it often and out of directsunlight.

Notice: Do not usepetroleum-based, acidic,or abrasive cleaning agents asthey can damage the vehicle'spaint, metal, or plastic parts.If damage occurs, it would not becovered by the vehicle's warranty.Approved cleaning products canbe obtained from your dealer.Follow all manufacturerdirections regarding correctproduct usage, necessary safetyprecautions, and appropriatedisposal of any vehicle careproduct.

Notice: Avoid usinghigh-pressure washes closer than30 cm (12 in) to the surface of thevehicle. Use of power washers

exceeding 8,274 kPa (1,200 psi)can result in damage or removalof paint and decals.

Rinse the vehicle well, beforewashing and after, to remove allcleaning agents completely. If theyare allowed to dry on the surface,they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches and waterspotting.

Finish Care

Application of aftermarket clearcoatsealant/wax materials is notrecommended. If painted surfacesare damaged, see your dealer tohave the damage assessed andrepaired. Foreign materials such ascalcium chloride and other salts, icemelting agents, road oil and tar, treesap, bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., candamage the vehicle's finish if theyremain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible.If necessary, use non-abrasive

cleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreignmatter.

Occasional hand waxing or mildpolishing should be done to removeresidue from the paint finish. Seeyour dealer for approved cleaningproducts.

Do not apply waxes or polishes touncoated plastic, vinyl, rubber,decals, simulated wood, or flat paintas damage can occur.

Notice: Machine compounding oraggressive polishing on abasecoat/clearcoat paint finishmay damage it. Use onlynon-abrasive waxes and polishesthat are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on thevehicle.

To keep the paint finish looking new,keep the vehicle garaged orcovered whenever possible.


10-90 Vehicle Care

Protecting Exterior Bright MetalParts

Regularly clean bright metal partswith water or chrome polish onchrome or stainless steel trim,if necessary.

For aluminum, never use auto orchrome polish, steam, or causticsoap to clean. A coating of wax,rubbed to high polish, isrecommended for all bright metalparts.

Hood Air Extractor

It is not recommended that the airextractor on the ZL1 be waxed, as itwill change the gloss level of thesurface. In addition, care must beused when waxing around the airextractor. If a small amount of waxis applied to the extractor it cancreate an irregular appearance inthe surface of the panel. If wax,debris, or other materials createstains on the air extractor, see yourdealer for the recommendedcleaner.

The air extractor has vent screensin the openings. Keep leaves orother debris out of the vent screens.

Notice: Pushing on the ventscreens could damage them. Donot push on the screens whenclearing.

There is a water deflector on theunderside of the air extractor. Donot remove it.

Convertible Top care

Frequently hand wash convertibletops with mild car wash soap. Neveruse a stiff brush, steam, bleach,or aggressive cleaners.If necessary, a soft brush can beused to remove dirt. When finishedcleaning, thoroughly rinse the fabric.Avoid automatic car washes withoverhead brushes or very highpressure sprays as they can causedamage and leaking.

Only lower the top when it iscompletely dry and avoid leavingthe top lowered for extendedperiods of time to prevent excessiveinterior weathering.

Avoid leaving large amounts ofsnow on the top for extendedperiods of time as damage may alsooccur.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses and Emblems

Use only lukewarm or cold water, asoft cloth, and a car washing soapto clean exterior lamps, lenses and


Vehicle Care 10-91

emblems. Follow instructions under"Washing the Vehicle" in thissection.

Windshield and Wiper Blades

Clean the outside of the windshieldwith glass cleaner.

Clean rubber blades using lint-freecloth or paper towel soaked withwindshield washer fluid or a milddetergent. Wash the windshieldthoroughly when cleaning theblades. Bugs, road grime, sap, anda buildup of vehicle wash/waxtreatments may cause wiperstreaking.

Replace the wiper blades if they areworn or damaged. Damage can becaused by extreme dustyconditions, sand, salt, heat, sun,snow and ice.

Weatherstrips

Apply silicone grease onweatherstrips to make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick orsqueak. Lubricate weatherstripsonce a year. Black marks from

rubber material on painted surfacescan be removed by rubbing with aclean cloth. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants onpage 11‑12.

Tires

Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner toclean the tires.

Notice: Using petroleum-basedtire dressing products on thevehicle may damage the paintfinish and/or tires. When applyinga tire dressing, always wipe offany overspray from all paintedsurfaces on the vehicle.

Wheels and Trim—Aluminumor Chrome

Use a soft, clean cloth with mildsoap and water to clean the wheels.After rinsing thoroughly with cleanwater, dry with a soft, clean towel.A wax may then be applied.

Notice: Chrome wheels and otherchrome trim may be damaged ifthe vehicle is not washed after

driving on roads that have beensprayed with magnesium,calcium, or sodium chloride.These chlorides are used onroads for conditions such as iceand dust. Always wash thechrome with soap and water afterexposure.

Notice: To avoid surface damage,do not use strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes,cleaners, brushes, or cleanersthat contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels. Use onlyapproved cleaners. Also, neverdrive a vehicle with aluminum orchrome-plated wheels through anautomatic car wash that usessilicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes. Damage could occurand the repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Steering, Suspension, andChassis Components

Visually inspect front and rearsuspension and steering system fordamaged, loose, or missing parts or


10-92 Vehicle Care

signs of wear. Inspect the powersteering for proper hook-up, binding,leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Visuallycheck constant velocity joints,rubber boots, and axle seals forleaks.

Body Component Lubrication

Lubricate all key lock cylinders,hood hinges, liftgate hinges, andsteel fuel door hinge unless thecomponents are plastic. Applyingsilicone grease on weatherstripswith a clean cloth will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stickor squeak.

Underbody Maintenance

Use plain water to flush dirt anddebris from the vehicle's underbody.Your dealer or an underbody carwashing system can do this. If notremoved, rust and corrosion candevelop.

Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged andrequires sheet metal repair orreplacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosionmaterial to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintaining thevehicle warranty.

Finish Damage

Quickly repair minor chips andscratches with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer to avoidcorrosion. Larger areas of finishdamage can be corrected in yourdealer's body and paint shop.

Chemical Paint Spotting

Airborne pollutants can fall uponand attack painted vehicle surfacescausing blotchy, ring-shaped

discolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paintsurface.

Interior CareTo prevent dirt particle abrasions,regularly clean the vehicle's interior.Immediately remove any soils. Notethat newspapers or dark garmentsthat can transfer color to homefurnishings can also permanentlytransfer color to the vehicle'sinterior.

Use a soft bristle brush to removedust from knobs and crevices on theinstrument cluster. Using a mildsoap solution, immediately removehand lotions, sunscreen, and insectrepellent from all interior surfaces orpermanent damage may result.

Your dealer may have products forcleaning the interior. Use cleanersspecifically designed for thesurfaces being cleaned to preventpermanent damage. Apply allcleaners directly to the cleaningcloth. Do not spray cleaners directly


Vehicle Care 10-93

on any switches or controls.Cleaners should be removedquickly. Never allow cleaners toremain on the surface beingcleaned for extended periodsof time.

Cleaners may contain solvents thatcan become concentrated in theinterior. Before using cleaners, readand adhere to all safety instructionson the label. While cleaning theinterior, maintain adequateventilation by opening the doors andwindows.

To prevent damage, do not cleanthe interior using the followingcleaners or techniques:. Never use a razor or any other

sharp object to remove a soilfrom any interior surface.

. Never use a brush with stiffbristles.

. Never rub any surfaceaggressively or with excessivepressure.

. Do not use laundry detergents ordishwashing soaps withdegreasers. For liquid cleaners,use approximately 20 drops per3.78 L (1 gal) of water.A concentrated soap solution willleave a residue that createsstreaks and attracts dirt. Do notuse solutions that contain strongor caustic soap.

. Do not heavily saturate theupholstery when cleaning.

. Do not use solvents or cleanerscontaining solvents.

Interior Glass

To clean, use a terry cloth fabricdampened with water. Wipe dropletsleft behind with a clean dry cloth.Commercial glass cleaners may beused, if necessary, after cleaningthe interior glass with plain water.

Notice: To prevent scratching,never use abrasive cleaners onautomotive glass. Abrasive

cleaners or aggressive cleaningmay damage the rear windowdefogger.

Notice: Cleaning the windshieldwith water during the first three tosix months of ownership willreduce tendency to fog.

Speaker Covers

Vacuum around a speaker covergently, so that the speaker will notbe damaged. Clean spots with justwater and mild soap.

Coated Moldings

Coated moldings should be cleaned.. When lightly soiled, wipe with a

sponge or soft lint-free clothdampened with water.

. When heavily soiled, use warmsoapy water.


10-94 Vehicle Care

Fabric/Carpet/Suede

Start by vacuuming the surfaceusing a soft brush attachment. If arotating brush attachment is beingused during vacuuming, only use iton the floor carpet. Before cleaning,gently remove as much of the soilas possible using one of thefollowing techniques:. Gently blot liquids with a paper

towel. Continue blotting until nomore soil can be removed.

. For solid soils, remove as muchas possible prior to vacuuming.

To clean:

1. Saturate a clean lint-freecolorfast cloth with water or clubsoda. Microfiber cloth isrecommended to prevent linttransfer to the fabric or carpet.

2. Remove excess moisture bygently wringing until water doesnot drip from the cleaning cloth.

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Fold the cleaning cloth toa clean area frequently toprevent forcing the soil in to thefabric.

4. Continue gently rubbing thesoiled area until there is nolonger any color transfer fromthe soil to the cleaning cloth.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution followed only by clubsoda or plain water.

If the soil is not completelyremoved, it may be necessary touse a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. Test a smallhidden area for colorfastness beforeusing a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. If ringformation occurs, clean the entirefabric or carpet.

Following the cleaning process, apaper towel can be used to blotexcess moisture.

Cleaning High Gloss Surfacesand Vehicle Information andRadio Displays

For vehicles with high glosssurfaces or vehicle displays, use amicrofiber cloth to wipe surfaces.Before wiping the surface with themicrofiber cloth, use a soft bristlebrush to remove dirt that couldscratch the surface. Then use themicrofiber cloth by gently rubbing toclean. Never use window cleanersor solvents. Periodically hand washthe microfiber cloth separately,using mild soap. Do not use bleachor fabric softener. Rinse thoroughlyand air dry before next use.

Notice: Do not attach a devicewith a suction cup to the display.This may cause damage andwould not be covered by thewarranty.


Vehicle Care 10-95

Instrument Panel, Leather,Vinyl, & Other Plastic Surfaces

Use a soft microfiber clothdampened with water to removedust and loose dirt. For a morethorough cleaning, use a softmicrofiber cloth dampened with amild soap solution.

Notice: Soaking or saturatingleather, especially perforatedleather, as well as other interiorsurfaces, may cause permanentdamage. Wipe excess moisturefrom these surfaces aftercleaning and allow them to drynaturally. Never use heat, steam,spot lifters, or spot removers. Donot use cleaners that containsilicone or wax-based products.Cleaners containing thesesolvents can permanently changethe appearance and feel of leatheror soft trim and are notrecommended.

Do not use cleaners that increasegloss, especially on the instrumentpanel. Reflected glare can decreasevisibility through the windshieldunder certain conditions.

Notice: Use of air fresheners maycause permanent damage toplastics and painted surfaces.If an air freshener comes incontact with any plastic orpainted surface in the vehicle,blot immediately and clean with asoft cloth dampened with a mildsoap solution. Damage caused byair fresheners would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Cargo Cover andConvenience Net

Wash with warm water and milddetergent. Do not use chlorinebleach. Rinse with cold water, andthen dry completely.

Care of Safety Belts

Keep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Floor Mats

{ WARNING

If a floor mat is the wrong size oris not properly installed, it caninterfere with the pedals.Interference with the pedals cancause unintended accelerationand/or increased stoppingdistance which can cause a crashand injury. Make sure the floormat does not interfere with thepedals.

Use the following guidelines forproper floor mat usage.


10-96 Vehicle Care

. The original equipment floormats were designed for yourvehicle. If the floor mats needreplacing, it is recommendedthat GM certified floor mats bepurchased. Non-GM floor matsmay not fit properly and mayinterefere with the pedals.Always check that the floor matsdo not interfere with the pedals.

. Use the floor mat with thecorrect side up. Do not turnit over.

. Do not place anything on top ofthe driver side floor mat.

. Use only a single floor mat onthe driver side.

. Do not place one floor mat ontop of another.

Both floor mats are held in place bytwo hook-type retainers.

Removing and Replacing theFloor Mats

1. Pull up on the rear of the mat toremove it from the hooks.

2. Reinstall by lining up the floormat retainer openings over thecarpet retainers and hook intoposition.

3. Make sure the floor mat isproperly secured and verify thatit does not interfere with thepedals.


Service and Maintenance 11-1

Service andMaintenance

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Maintenance ScheduleMaintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-2

Special Application ServicesSpecial ApplicationServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Additional Maintenanceand CareAdditional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and PartsRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12

Maintenance ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14

Maintenance RecordsMaintenance Records . . . . . . 11-16

General InformationYour vehicle is an importantinvestment. This section describesthe required maintenance for thevehicle. Follow this schedule to helpprotect against major repairexpenses resulting from neglect orinadequate maintenance. It mayalso help to maintain the value ofthe vehicle if it is sold. It is theresponsibility of the owner to haveall required maintenance performed.

Your dealer has trained technicianswho can perform requiredmaintenance using genuinereplacement parts. They have up‐to‐date tools and equipment for fastand accurate diagnostics. Manydealers have extended evening andSaturday hours, courtesytransportation, and onlinescheduling to assist with serviceneeds.

Your dealer recognizes theimportance of providingcompetitively priced maintenanceand repair services. With trained

technicians, the dealer is the placefor routine maintenance such as oilchanges and tire rotations andadditional maintenance items liketires, brakes, batteries, and wiperblades.

Notice: Damage caused byimproper maintenance can lead tocostly repairs and may not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, recommended fluids,and lubricants are important tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition.

The Tire Rotation and RequiredServices are the responsibility of thevehicle owner. It is recommended tohave your dealer perform theseservices every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.Proper vehicle maintenance helps tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition, improves fuel economy,and reduces vehicle emissions.


11-2 Service and Maintenance

Because of the way people usevehicles, maintenance needs vary.There may need to be morefrequent checks and services. TheAdditional Required Services ‐Normal are for vehicles that:. Carry passengers and cargo

within recommended limits onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑12.

. Are driven on reasonable roadsurfaces within legal drivinglimits.

. Use the recommended fuel. SeeRecommended Fuel onpage 9‑49.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services ‐ Normal chart.

The Additional Required Services ‐Severe are for vehicles that are:. Mainly driven in heavy city traffic

in hot weather.. Mainly driven in hilly or

mountainous terrain.

. Frequently towing a trailer.

. Used for high speed orcompetitive driving.

. Used for taxi, police, or deliveryservice.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services ‐ Severe chart.

{ WARNING

Performing maintenance work canbe dangerous and can causeserious injury. Performmaintenance work only if therequired information, proper tools,and equipment are available.If they are not, see your dealer tohave a trained technician do thework. See Doing Your OwnService Work on page 10‑4.

MaintenanceScheduleOwner Checks and Services

At Each Fuel Stop. Check the engine oil level. See

Engine Oil on page 10‑13.

Once a Month. Check the tire inflation

pressures. See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑56.

. Inspect the tires for wear. SeeTire Inspection on page 10‑62.

. Check the windshield washerfluid level. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑30.

Engine Oil Change

When the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message displays, have theengine oil and filter changed withinthe next 1 000 km/600 mi. If drivenunder the best conditions, theengine oil life system might notindicate the need for vehicle service



for more than a year. The engine oiland filter must be changed at leastonce a year and the oil life systemmust be reset. Your trained dealertechnician can perform this work.If the engine oil life system is resetaccidentally, service the vehiclewithin 5 000 km/3,000 mi since thelast service. Reset the oil lifesystem when the oil is changed.See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑15.

Tire Rotation and RequiredServices Every 12 000 km/7,500 mi

Rotate the tires, if recommended forthe vehicle, and perform thefollowing services. See TireRotation on page 10‑63.. Check engine oil level and oil

life percentage. If needed,change engine oil and filter, andreset oil life system. See EngineOil on page 10‑13 and EngineOil Life System on page 10‑15.

. Check engine coolant level. SeeEngine Coolant on page 10‑23.

. Check windshield washer fluidlevel. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑30.

. Visually inspect windshield wiperblades for wear, cracking,or contamination. See ExteriorCare on page 10‑89. Replaceworn or damaged wiper blades.See Wiper Blade Replacementon page 10‑35.

. Check tire inflation pressures.See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑56.

. Inspect tire wear. See TireInspection on page 10‑62.

. Visually check for fluid leaks.

. Inspect engine air cleaner filter.See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter(Except ZL1) on page 10‑17 orEngine Air Cleaner/Filter (ZL1Only) on page 10‑19.

. Inspect brake system.

. Visually inspect steering,suspension, and chassiscomponents for damaged, loose,or missing parts or signs ofwear. See Exterior Care onpage 10‑89.

. Check restraint systemcomponents. See Safety SystemCheck on page 3‑15.

. Visually inspect fuel system fordamage or leaks.

. Visually inspect exhaust systemand nearby heat shields forloose or damaged parts.

. Lubricate body components. SeeExterior Care on page 10‑89.

. Check starter switch. See StarterSwitch Check on page 10‑34.

. Check automatic transmissionshift lock control function. SeeAutomatic Transmission ShiftLock Control Function Check onpage 10‑34.

. Check ignition transmission lock.See Ignition Transmission LockCheck on page 10‑35.



. Check parking brake andautomatic transmission parkmechanism. See Park Brake andP (Park) Mechanism Check onpage 10‑35.

. Check accelerator pedal fordamage, high effort, or binding.Replace if needed.

. Visually inspect gas strut forsigns of wear, cracks, or otherdamage. Check the hold openability of the strut. See yourdealer if service is required.

. Check tire sealant expirationdate, if equipped. See TireSealant and Compressor Kit onpage 10‑72.

. Inspect sunroof track and seal,if equipped. See Sunroof onpage 2‑16.



Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices — Normal

(1) Or every two years, whichevercomes first. More frequentreplacement may be needed if thevehicle is driven in areas with heavytraffic, areas with poor air quality,or areas with high dust levels.Replacement may also be needed ifthere is a reduction in air flow,excessive window fogging, or odors.

(2) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook-up,routing, and condition. Check thatthe purge valve, if the vehicle hasone, works properly. Replace asneeded.

(3) Or every four years, whichevercomes first.

(4) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System(Except ZL1 Engine) on page 10‑20or Cooling System (ZL1 EngineOnly) on page 10‑21 or CoolingSystem (Intercooler) on page 10‑22.

(5) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first.

(6) Inspect for fraying, excessivecracking, or damage; replace,if needed.



Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices — Severe

(1) Or every two years, whichevercomes first. More frequentreplacement may be needed if thevehicle is driven in areas with heavytraffic, areas with poor air quality,or areas with high dust levels.Replacement may also be needed ifthere is a reduction in air flow,excessive window fogging, or odors.

(2) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook-up,routing, and condition. Check thatthe purge valve, if the vehicle hasone, works properly. Replace asneeded.

(3) Or every four years, whichevercomes first.

(4) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System(Except ZL1 Engine) on page 10‑20or Cooling System (ZL1 EngineOnly) on page 10‑21 or CoolingSystem (Intercooler) on page 10‑22.

(5) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first.

(6) Inspect for fraying, excessivecracking, or damage; replace,if needed.

Special ApplicationServices. Severe Commercial Use

Vehicles Only: Lubricate chassiscomponents every 5 000 km/3,000 mi.

. Have underbody flushing serviceperformed once a year.



AdditionalMaintenance and CareYour vehicle is an importantinvestment and caring for it properlymay help to avoid future costlyrepairs. To maintain vehicleperformance, additionalmaintenance services may berequired. It is recommended thatyour dealer perform these services— their trained dealer techniciansknow your vehicle best. Your dealercan also perform a thoroughassessment with a multi-pointinspection to recommend when yourvehicle may need attention. Thefollowing list is intended to explainthe services and conditions to lookfor that may indicate services arerequired.

Battery

The battery supplies power to startthe engine and operate anyadditional electrical accessories.

. To avoid break-down or failure tostart the vehicle, maintain abattery with full cranking power.

. Trained dealer technicians havethe diagnostic equipment to testthe battery and ensure that theconnections and cables arecorrosion-free.

Belts. Belts may need replacing if they

squeak or show signs ofcracking or splitting.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the belts andrecommend adjustment orreplacement when necessary.

Brakes

Brakes stop the vehicle and arecrucial to safe driving.. Signs of brake wear may include

chirping, grinding, or squealingnoises, or difficulty stopping.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the brakes andrecommend quality partsengineered for the vehicle.

Fluids

Proper fluid levels and approvedfluids protect the vehicle’s systemsand components. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12 for GMapproved fluids.. Engine oil and windshield

washer fluid levels should bechecked at every fuel fill.

. Instrument cluster lights maycome on to indicate that fluidsmay be low and need to befilled.

Hoses

Hoses transport fluids and shouldbe regularly inspected to ensurethat there are no cracks or leaks.With a multi-point inspection, yourdealer can inspect the hoses andadvise if replacement is needed.



Lamps

Properly working headlamps,taillamps, and brake lamps areimportant to see and be seen onthe road.. Signs that the headlamps need

attention include dimming, failureto light, cracking, or damage.The brake lamps need to bechecked periodically to ensurethat they light when braking.

. With a multi-point inspection,your dealer can check the lampsand note any concerns.

Shocks and Struts

Shocks and struts help aid in controlfor a smoother ride.. Signs of wear may include

steering wheel vibration, bounce/sway while braking, longerstopping distance, or uneventire wear.

. As part of the multi-pointinspection, trained dealertechnicians can visually inspectthe shocks and struts for signsof leaking, blown seals,or damage, and can advisewhen service is needed.

Tires

Tires need to be properly inflated,rotated, and balanced. Maintainingthe tires can save money, fuel, andcan reduce the risk of tire failure.. Signs that the tires need to be

replaced include three or morevisible treadwear indicators; cordor fabric showing through therubber; cracks or cuts in thetread or sidewall; or a bulge orsplit in the tire.

. Trained dealer technicians caninspect and recommend the righttires. Your dealer can alsoprovide tire/wheel balancingservices to ensure smoothvehicle operation at all speeds.Your dealer sells and servicesname brand tires.

Vehicle Care

To help keep the vehicle looking likenew, vehicle care products areavailable from your dealer. Forinformation on how to clean andprotect the vehicle’s interior andexterior, see Interior Care onpage 10‑92 and Exterior Care onpage 10‑89.

Wheel Alignment

Wheel alignment is critical forensuring that the tires deliveroptimal wear and performance.. Signs that the alignment may

need to be adjusted includepulling, improper vehiclehandling, or unusual tire wear.

. Your dealer has the requiredequipment to ensure properwheel alignment.



Windshield

For safety, appearance, and thebest viewing, keep the windshieldclean and clear.. Signs of damage include

scratches, cracks, and chips.. Trained dealer technicians can

inspect the windshield andrecommend proper replacementif needed.

Wiper Blades

Wiper blades need to be cleanedand kept in good condition toprovide a clear view.. Signs of wear include streaking,

skipping across the windshield,and worn or split rubber.

. Trained dealer technicians cancheck the wiper blades andreplace them when needed.



Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil Use only engine oil licensed to the dexos1 specfication, or equivalent, ofthe proper SAE viscosity grade. ACDelco dexos1 Synthetic Blend isrecommended. See Engine Oil on page 10‑13.

Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.See Engine Coolant on page 10‑23.

Hydraulic Brake System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 88862806, inCanada 88862807).

Windshield Washer Automotive windshield washer fluid that meets regional freeze protectionrequirements.

Hydraulic Clutch System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 88862806, inCanada 88862807).

Hydraulic Power Steering System GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 89020661, inCanada 89021186).

Parking Brake Cable Guides Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) orlubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.




Manual Transmission (V6 Engine) SAE 75W-90 GL5 Gear Oil (GM Part No. 88862475, inCanada 88862476).

Manual Transmission (V8 Engine) Manual Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. 88861800, inCanada 88861801).

Rear Axle (V6 Engine with AutomaticTransmission)

Rear Differential Fluid 75W-90 (GM Part No. 88900401, inCanada 89021678).

Rear Axle (V6 Engine with ManualTransmission)

Rear Differential Fluid 75W-90 Limited Slip (GM Part No. 88900401 andLimited Slip Additive 88900330, in Canada 89021678 and Limited SlipAdditive 00992694).

Rear Axle (SS) Rear Differential Fluid 75W-90 Limited Slip (GM Part No. 88900401 andLimited Slip Additive 88900330, in Canada 89021678 and Limited SlipAdditive 00992694).

Rear Axle (ZL1) Rear Differential Fluid Dextron LS Gear 75W-90 (GM Part No. 88862624,in Canada 88862625).

Key Lock Cylinders Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Hood Latch Assembly, SecondaryLatch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and

Release Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 89021668, inCanada 89021674) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood and Door Hinges Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).




Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 10953481).

Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter (except ZL1) 92196275 A3137C

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter (ZL1) 92229651 —

Engine Oil Filter

3.6L V6 Engine 25177917 PF2129

6.2L V8 Engine 89017524 PF48

Passenger Compartment Air Filter 92234714 —

Spark Plugs

3.6L V6 Engine 12622561 41-109

6.2L V8 Engine (L99 or LS3) 12621258 41-110

6.2L V8 Engine (LSA) 12571165 41-104



Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Wiper Blades

Driver Side 92231676 —

Passenger Side 92231677 —



Maintenance RecordsAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

DateOdometerReading

Serviced By Services Performed



DateOdometerReading




2 NOTES


Technical Data 12-1

Technical Data

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Vehicle DataCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-5

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This legal identifier is in the frontcorner of the instrument panel, onthe left side of the vehicle. It can beseen through the windshield fromoutside. The VIN also appears onthe Vehicle Certification and ServiceParts labels and certificates of titleand registration.

Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN isthe engine code. This codeidentifies the vehicle's engine,specifications, and replacementparts. See “Engine Specifications”under Capacities and Specificationson page 12‑2 for the vehicle'sengine code.

Service PartsIdentification LabelThis label, in the trunk, has thefollowing information:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN).. Model designation.. Paint information.. Production options and special

equipment.

Do not remove this label from thevehicle.


12-2 Technical Data

Vehicle Data

Capacities and Specifications

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a For the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant label under the hood.

See your dealer for more information.

Engine Cooling System

3.6L V6 Engine (LFX) Automatic Transmission 10.2 L 10.8 qt

3.6L V6 Engine (LFX) Manual Transmission 10.6 L 11.2 qt

6.2L V8 Engine (L99) Automatic Transmission 10.8 L 11.4 qt

6.2L V8 Engine (LS3) Manual Transmission 11.2 L 11.8 qt

6.2L V8 Engine (LSA) 10.9 L 11.5 qt

Cooling System — Intercooler (ZL1) 2.3 L 2.4 qt

Engine Oil with Filter

3.6L V6 Engine (LFX) 5.7 L 6.0 qt

6.2L V8 Engine 7.6 L 8.0 qt

Fuel Tank 71.0 L 18.8 gal


Technical Data 12-3

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Rear Axle Fluid

V6 Engine 6–Speed Automatic 0.9 L 1.0 qt

V6 Engine 6–Speed Manual* 0.9 L 1.0 qt

V8 Engine* (L99 or LS3) 0.9 L 1.0 qt

V8 Engine (LSA) 2.0 L 2.1 qt

Transmission Fluid

Automatic — V6 and V8 (Pan Removal and FilterReplacement)**

6.3 L 6.7 qt

V6 Engine 6–Speed Manual 1.8 L 1.9 qt

V8 Engine SS 6–Speed Manual 3.9 L 4.2 qt

V8 Engine ZL1 6–Speed Manual 4.4 L 4.6 qt

Wheel Nut Torque 150Y 110 lb ft

*Add 3.3 oz. (98 mL) of friction modifier to the specified quantity of axle lubricant.

**See Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 10‑16 for information on checking fluid level.

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.


12-4 Technical Data

Engine Specifications

Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

3.6L V6 (LFX) 3 AutomaticManual

1.10 mm (0.043 in)

6.2L V8 (L99) J Automatic 1.02 mm (0.040 in)

6.2L V8 (LS3) W Manual 1.02 mm (0.040 in)

6.2L V8 (LSA) P AutomaticManual

1.02 mm (0.040 in)


Technical Data 12-5

Engine Drive Belt Routing

3.6L V6 Engine

6.2L V8 Engines (L99 or LS3) 6.2L V8 Engines (LSA)


12-6 Technical Data

2 NOTES


Customer Information 13-1

CustomerInformation

Customer InformationCustomer SatisfactionProcedure (U.S. andCanada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2

Customer SatisfactionProcedure (Mexico) . . . . . . . . 13-4

Customer Assistance Offices(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Customer Assistance Offices(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) Users (U.S.and Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-6GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram (U.S. andCanada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Roadside Assistance Program(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Roadside AssistanceProgram (U.S. andCanada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11

Scheduling ServiceAppointments (U.S. andCanada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Courtesy TransportationProgram (U.S. andCanada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Collision Damage Repair(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . 13-14

Service PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-17

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defects tothe United StatesGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18

Reporting Safety Defects tothe CanadianGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyVehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19

Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-19OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20Infotainment System . . . . . . . . 13-20Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-20

Radio FrequencyStatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21


13-2 Customer Information

Customer Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedure (U.S. andCanada)Your satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your dealer and toChevrolet. Normally, any concernswith the sales transaction or theoperation of the vehicle will beresolved by your dealer's sales orservice departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentionsof all concerned, misunderstandingscan occur. If your concern has notbeen resolved to your satisfaction,the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concernwith a member of dealershipmanagement. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level.If the matter has already beenreviewed with the sales, service,or parts manager, contact the ownerof your dealership or the generalmanager.

STEP TWO: If after contacting amember of dealership management,it appears your concern cannot beresolved by your dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., call theChevrolet Customer AssistanceCenter at 1-800-222-1020. InCanada, call General Motors ofCanada Customer Care Centre at1-800-263-3777 (English),or 1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call thetoll-free number in order to give yourinquiry prompt attention. Have thefollowing information available togive the Customer Assistancerepresentative:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). This is availablefrom the vehicle registration ortitle, or the plate at the top left ofthe instrument panel and visiblethrough the windshield.

. Dealership name and location.

. Vehicle delivery date andpresent mileage.

When contacting Chevrolet,remember that your concern willlikely be resolved at a dealer'sfacility. That is why we suggestfollowing Step One first.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners:Both General Motors and yourdealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfiedwith your new vehicle. However,if you continue to remain unsatisfiedafter following the procedureoutlined in Steps One and Two, youcan file with the Better BusinessBureau (BBB) Auto Line® Programto enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is anout-of-court program administeredby the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotivedisputes regarding vehicle repairs orthe interpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Although you maybe required to resort to this informaldispute resolution program prior tofiling a court action, use of theprogram is free of charge and yourcase will generally be heard within



40 days. If you do not agree with thedecision given in your case, youmay reject it and proceed with anyother venue for relief availableto you.

You may contact the BBB Auto LineProgram using the toll-freetelephone number or write them atthe following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus,Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100www.dr.bbb.org/goauto

This program is available in all50 states and the District ofColumbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage, and otherfactors. General Motors reservesthe right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.

STEP THREE — CanadianOwners: In the event that you donot feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following theprocedure outlined in Steps Oneand Two, General Motors of CanadaLimited wants you to be aware of itsparticipation in a no-chargeMediation/Arbitration Program.General Motors of Canada Limitedhas committed to binding arbitrationof owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle serviceclaims. The program provides forthe review of the facts involved byan impartial third party arbiter, andmay include an informal hearingbefore the arbiter. The program isdesigned so that the entire disputesettlement process, from the timeyou file your complaint to the finaldecision, should be completed inabout 70 days. We believe ourimpartial program offers advantagesover courts in most jurisdictionsbecause it is informal, quick, andfree of charge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or callthe General Motors Customer CareCentre, 1-800-263-3777 (English),1-800-263-7854 (French),or write to:

The Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Care CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Your inquiry should be accompaniedby the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).



Customer SatisfactionProcedure (Mexico)

Did you get the Warranty ExtensionPlan? This plan is recommended byGeneral Motors to supplement thewarranty included with the newvehicle purchase.

See your dealer for details.

Customer AssistanceProcedure

Owner satisfaction and goodwill arevery important to your dealer andGeneral Motors.

Normally, any problem with thetransaction, sale, or usage of thevehicle must be handled by yourdealer sales or service departments.However, we recognize that despite

the good intentions of all partiesinvolved, sometimes amisunderstanding may occur.

If you have a problem that has notbeen satisfactorily handled throughthe normal means, we suggest thefollowing steps:

STEP ONE

Explain your case to your dealerservice agent, service manager,dealer sales agent, or salesmanager, depending on your case.

Make sure that they have allnecessary information. They areinterested in your continualsatisfaction.

STEP TWO

If you are not satisfied, pleasecontact the general manager or yourdealership owner to ask for theirhelp. If they are not able to resolveyour case, ask them to contact theright people at General Motors forsupport, if needed.

STEP THREE

If your case is not resolved in areasonable amount of time by yourdealer, please call the GeneralMotors Customer AssistanceCenter (CAC) and provide thefollowing information:. Name. Address. Phone number. Model year. Brand. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). Mileage. Delivery date. Description of the problem. Dealership name. Dealership address

See Customer Assistance Offices(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑5 orCustomer Assistance Offices(Mexico) on page 13‑5.



Customer AssistanceOffices (U.S. and Canada)Chevrolet encourages customers tocall the toll-free number forassistance. However, if a customerwishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet,the letter should be addressed to:

United States and Puerto Rico

Chevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer AssistanceCenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170www.Chevrolet.com

1-800-222-10201-800-833-2438 (For TextTelephone Devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-243-8872

From U.S. Virgin Islands:

1-800-496-9994

Canada

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Care Centre, Mail Code:CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7www.gm.ca

1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-268-6800

Overseas

Please contact the local GeneralMotors Business Unit.

Customer AssistanceOffices (Mexico)To contact the Customer AssistanceCenter (CAC), use the phonenumbers listed in this section.Customer assistance is availableMonday through Friday, 08:00 to20:00 hours, and Saturdays from08:00 to 15:00 hours.

All e-mail inquiries to the CustomerAssistance Center (CAC) should besent to: [email protected].

Mexico

From Mexico City

5329-0811

From Other Mexico Locations

01-800-466-0811

United States and Canada

1-866-466-8190

Costa Rica

00-800-052-1005

Guatemala

1-800-999-5252

Panama

00-800-052-0001

Dominican Republic

1-888-751-5301



El Salvador

800-6273

Honduras

800-0122-6101

Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)Users (U.S. and Canada)To assist customers who are deaf,hard of hearing, or speech-impairedand who use Text Telephones(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTYequipment available at its CustomerAssistance Center. Any TTY user inthe U.S. can communicate withChevrolet by dialing:1-800-833-2438. TTY users inCanada can dial 1-800-263-3830.

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Experience(U.S.) my.chevrolet.com

The Chevrolet online ownerexperience is a one-stop resourcethat allows interaction withChevrolet and keeps importantvehicle-specific information in oneplace.

Membership Benefits

E (Vehicle Information):Download owner manuals and viewvehicle-specific how-to videos.

G (Maintenance Information):View maintenance schedules,required alerts, OnStar onboardvehicle diagnostic information, andschedule service appointments.

I (Service History): Viewprintable dealer-recorded servicerecords and self-recorded servicerecords.

D (Preferred DealerInformation): Select a preferreddealer and view dealer location,maps, phone numbers, and hours.

J (Warranty TrackingInformation): Track the vehicle’swarranty information.

J (Recall Information): Viewactive recalls or search by VehicleIdentification Number (VIN). SeeVehicle Identification Number (VIN)on page 12‑1.

H (Other Account Information):View GM Card, SiriusXM Satelliteradio, and OnStar accountinformation.

F (Live Chat Support): Chat livewith online help representatives.

Visit my.chevrolet.com to registeryour vehicle.



Chevrolet Owner Centre(Canada) chevroletowner.ca

Take a trip to the Chevrolet OwnerCentre:. Chat live with online help

representatives.. Use the Vehicle Tools section.. Access third party enthusiast

sites and social media networks.. Locate owner resources such as

lease-end, financing, andwarranty information.

. Retrieve your favorite articles,quizzes, tips, and multimediagalleries organized into theFeatures and Auto CareSections.

. Download the owner manual foryour vehicle, quickly and easily.

. Find theChevrolet-recommendedmaintenance services for yourvehicle.

GM MobilityReimbursement Program(U.S. and Canada)

This program is available toqualified applicants for costreimbursement of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipmentrequired for the vehicle, such ashand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift for the vehicle.

For more information on the limitedoffer, visit www.gmmobility.com orcall the GM Mobility AssistanceCenter at 1-800-323-9935. TextTelephone (TTY) users, call1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada also hasa Mobility Program. Call1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) fordetails. TTY users call1-800-263-3830.

Roadside AssistanceProgram (Mexico)As a new owner, your vehicle isautomatically enrolled in theRoadside Assistance program. Theservices are available at no costunder the terms and conditions ofthe program. The RoadsideAssistance program is not part of,or included, in the coverageprovided by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty.

Roadside Assistance providesassistance to the driver andpassengers while driving the vehiclewithin your city of residence or onany passable road in Mexico, theUnited States, and Canada.Services are subject to the



limitations described in the followingpages. Program coverage varies bycountry.

Roadside Assistance is available24 hours a day, 365 days ofthe year.

This program expires two yearsfrom the date of the invoice for thevehicle, regardless of vehiclemileage and changes in vehicleownership.

For more information about therenewal of this program at the endof its term, contact the ChevroletCustomer Assistance Center at01-800-466-0800.

Services Provided. Flat Tire Change: If unable to

change a flat tire, RoadsideAssistance will provide towingservice to the nearest authorizedChevrolet dealership. It is theowner's responsibility for therepair or replacement of the tire.

This service is limited to thetransfer of the vehicle to therepair facility.

. Emergency Fuel Delivery:Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

. Lock-Out Service: Service tounlock the vehicle if you arelocked out.

. Battery Jump Start: Service tojump start a dead battery.

. *Emergency Messages:Transmission of urgent phonemessages.

. *Emergency Calls: Call foremergency services.

. *Dealership LocationAssistance: Informationregarding addresses andtelephone numbers for Chevroletdealers.

. Emergency Towing: Tow to thenearest dealer for warrantyservice if the vehicle cannot bedriven.

If the vehicle is involved in anaccident during the commissionof a crime, administrativeviolation, or breach of trafficregulations, RoadsideAssistance will not provideservice. When the vehicle is notaccessible to be towed, allmaneuvers required to access itwill be at the owner's expense.

If the vehicle is in another cityoutside of your residence,Roadside Assistance is limitedto moving the vehicle to thenearest dealer. If you would likethe vehicle moved to a differentdealer, you will be asked tocover the difference in cost atthe time of the move.



If the vehicle cannot be receivedby the nearest Chevrolet dealerdue to scheduling conflicts, thevehicle will be taken to a safeplace where it will remain for upto 48 hours until it can be takento the dealer. If the storage costsexceed the amount authorized,the owner is responsible to paythe difference at the time ofservice. Contact RoadsideAssistance for more informationon authorized amounts.

. *Trip Interruption: This serviceis provided if you are preventedfrom further usage of yourvehicle while traveling and it isnot possible for the nearestChevrolet dealership to repairthe vehicle the same day,requiring the vehicle to stay atthe dealership for a night ormore. If this happens, in additionto the previously listed servicesand prior to confirmation by thedealership, you are entitled tochoose one of the followingalternatives, within the limits ofexisting Roadside Assistanceprogram guidelines. If the costsexceed the amount authorizedfor these services, you must paythe difference at the time ofservice.

Roadside Assistance willcoordinate hotelaccommodations for all vehicletravelers for up to two nights.

A rental car will be provided forup to two days and the vehiclemust be returned to its originaldestination, excluding vehicleswith a carrying capacity greaterthan 3.5 tons.

Complimentary Transportation: Ifyou prefer to continue your tripto the intended destination orreturn to your place ofresidence, and the trip requiresmore than eight hours driving onthe road, transportation for thedriver and passengers by firstclass bus or coach commercialairline will be provided to alocation chosen by RoadsideAssistance, depending onavailability at the chosendestination. Restrictions applybased on vehicle specifications.



If you are on the road, taxiservice to the nearest busstation or airport will beprovided.

. *ComplimentaryTransportation for Vehicle PickUp: Transportation to pick upyour vehicle after repairs arecomplete. Once the dealer hasreported that the vehicle hasbeen repaired, RoadsideAssistance will provide bus orcommercial airline one-wayservice (subject to availability)for the person designated by youto collect your vehicle at thedealership's location if you or thedesignated person are not in thesame town or city as thedealership.

*These services are not provided forU.S. or Canada residents. Allservices provided in the U.S. andCanada are at the owner's expenseand will be reimbursed by RoadsideAssistance.

Services Not Included in RoadsideAssistance

Roadside Assistance does notcover or reimburse services for thefollowing:. Events caused by fraud or bad

faith by the driver.. Vehicle immobilization situations

due to a major force orunforeseen circumstances, suchas natural phenomena of anextraordinary nature,earthquakes, volcanic eruptions,and other cyclonic storms.

. Vehicle immobilization situationsarising from car accidentscaused by the driver of thevehicle or third parties. Thismeans any occurrence thatcauses physical injury to theoccupants and/or the vehiclecaused by external forces.

. Acts of terrorism, riot or uproar,armed forces or police actionswhich prevent timely delivery ofassistance services.

. Food service, beverages,telephone calls, or other extracosts. Accommodation costsapply only to Mexico per theterms and conditions of theRoadside Assistance program.

. Any damage to the vehiclewithout intent, derived from theservices provided.

. Cost of towing a trailer whenchoosing a Chevrolet dealer thatis nearest to the temporarystorage facility for the disabledvehicle.

. Cost of all maneuvers requiredto access the vehicle when it isnot available to be towed.

. Cost of fuel provided.

Routine vehicle repair costs are notcovered by the RoadsideAssistance program. For moreinformation, see your new vehiclewarranty.



Contacting Roadside Assistance

Roadside Assistance services are ofno cost to you and available24 hours a day, 365 days a year.Costs are only incurred in situationsthat exceed the limits of theprogram, some of which are listedpreviously in this section.

To contact Roadside Assistance byphone, use the following numbers:

Mexico

01-800-466-0800

United States

1-866-466-8901

Canada

1-800-268-6800

E-mail

[email protected]

Chevrolet reserves the right to makeany changes or discontinue theRoadside Assistance program atany time without notification.

Roadside AssistanceProgram (U.S. andCanada)For U.S.-purchased vehicles, call1-800-243-8872; (Text Telephone(TTY): 1-888-889-2438).

For Canadian-purchased vehicles,call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

Calling for Assistance

When calling Roadside Assistance,have the following informationready:. Your name, home address, and

home telephone number.. Telephone number of your

location.. Location of the vehicle.. Model, year, color, and license

plate number of the vehicle.

. Odometer reading, VehicleIdentification Number (VIN), anddelivery date of the vehicle.

. Description of the problem.

Coverage

Services are provided up to 5 years/160 000 km (100,000mi), whichevercomes first.

In the U.S., anyone driving thevehicle is covered. In Canada, aperson driving the vehicle withoutpermission from the owner is notcovered.

Roadside Assistance is not a part ofthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.Chevrolet and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tomake any changes or discontinuethe Roadside Assistance program atany time without notification.

Chevrolet and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tolimit services or payment to anowner or driver if they decide the



claims are made too often, or thesame type of claim is made manytimes.

Services Provided. Emergency Fuel Delivery:

Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

. Lock-Out Service: Service tounlock the vehicle if you arelocked out. A remote unlock maybe available if you have OnStar.For security reasons, the drivermust present identificationbefore this service is given.

. Emergency Tow from a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow to thenearest Chevrolet dealer forwarranty service, or if the vehiclewas in a crash and cannot bedriven. Assistance is also givenwhen the vehicle is stuck in thesand, mud, or snow.

. Flat Tire Change: Service tochange a flat tire with the sparetire. The spare tire, if equipped,

must be in good condition andproperly inflated. It is the owner'sresponsibility for the repair orreplacement of the tire if it is notcovered by the warranty.

. Battery Jump Start: Service tojump start a dead battery.

Services Not Included inRoadside Assistance. Impound towing caused by

violation of any laws.. Legal fines.. Mounting, dismounting,

or changing of snow tires,chains, or other traction devices.

. Towing or services for vehiclesdriven on a non-public road orhighway.

Services Specific toCanadian-Purchased Vehicles. Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement

is approximately $5 Canadian.Diesel fuel delivery may be

restricted. Propane and otherfuels are not provided throughthis service.

. Lock-Out Service: Vehicleregistration is required.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: Must be over250 kilometers from where yourtrip was started to qualify.General Motors of CanadaLimited requirespre-authorization, originaldetailed receipts, and a copy ofthe repair orders. Onceauthorization has been received,the Roadside Assistance advisorwill help to make arrangementsand explain how to receivepayment.

. Alternative Service: Ifassistance cannot be providedright away, the RoadsideAssistance advisor may givepermission to get localemergency road service. You willreceive payment, up to $100,after sending the original receipt



to Roadside Assistance.Mechanical failures may becovered, however any cost forparts and labor for repairs notcovered by the warranty are theowner responsibility.

Scheduling ServiceAppointments (U.S. andCanada)When the vehicle requires warrantyservice, contact your dealer andrequest an appointment. Byscheduling a service appointmentand advising the service consultantof your transportation needs, yourdealer can help minimize yourinconvenience.

If the vehicle cannot be scheduledinto the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it until itcan be scheduled for service,unless, of course, the problem issafety related. If it is, please callyour dealership, let them know this,and ask for instructions.

If your dealer requests you to bringthe vehicle for service, you areurged to do so as early in the workday as possible to allow forsame-day repair.

Courtesy TransportationProgram (U.S. andCanada)To enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participatingdealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer supportprogram for vehicles with theBumper-to-Bumper (Base WarrantyCoverage period in Canada),extended powertrain, and/orhybrid-specific warranties in boththe U.S. and Canada.

Several Courtesy Transportationoptions are available to assist inreducing inconvenience whenwarranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not apart of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. A separate booklet

entitled “Limited Warranty andOwner Assistance Information”furnished with each new vehicleprovides detailed warranty coverageinformation.

Transportation Options

Warranty service can generally becompleted while you wait. However,if you are unable to wait, GM helpsto minimize inconvenience byproviding several transportationoptions. Depending on thecircumstances, your dealer can offerone of the following:

Shuttle Service

Shuttle service is the preferredmeans of offering CourtesyTransportation. Dealers may provideshuttle service to get you to yourdestination with minimal interruptionof your daily schedule. This includesone-way or round-trip shuttle servicewithin reasonable time and distanceparameters of your dealer's area.



Public Transportation or FuelReimbursement

If the vehicle requires overnightwarranty repairs, and publictransportation is used instead ofyour dealer's shuttle service, theexpense must be supported byoriginal receipts and can only be upto the maximum amount allowed byGM for shuttle service. In addition,for U.S. customers, should youarrange transportation through afriend or relative, limitedreimbursement for reasonable fuelexpenses may be available. Claimamounts should reflect actual costsand be supported by originalreceipts. See your dealer forinformation regarding the allowanceamounts for reimbursement of fuelor other transportation costs.

Courtesy Rental Vehicle

Your dealer may arrange to provideyou with a courtesy rental vehicle orreimburse you for a rental vehiclethat you obtain if the vehicle is keptfor an overnight warranty repair.

Rental reimbursement will be limitedand must be supported by originalreceipts. This requires that you signand complete a rental agreementand meet state/provincial, local, andrental vehicle provider requirements.Requirements vary and may includeminimum age requirements,insurance coverage, credit card, etc.You are responsible for fuel usagecharges and may also beresponsible for taxes, levies, usagefees, excessive mileage, or rentalusage beyond the completion of therepair.

It may not be possible to provide alike vehicle as a courtesy rental.

Additional ProgramInformation

All program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available atevery dealer. Please contact yourdealer for specific information aboutavailability. All CourtesyTransportation arrangements will beadministered by appropriate dealerpersonnel.

General Motors reserves the right tounilaterally modify, change,or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and toresolve all questions of claimeligibility pursuant to the terms andconditions described herein at itssole discretion.

Collision Damage Repair(U.S. and Canada)If the vehicle is involved in acollision and it is damaged, have thedamage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the properequipment and quality replacementparts. Poorly performed collisionrepairs diminish the vehicle resalevalue, and safety performance canbe compromised in subsequentcollisions.

Collision Parts

Genuine GM Collision parts are newparts made with the same materialsand construction methods as theparts with which the vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GM



Collision parts are the best choice toensure that the vehicle's designedappearance, durability, and safetyare preserved. The use of GenuineGM parts can help maintain the GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Recycled original equipment partsmay also be used for repair. Theseparts are typically removed fromvehicles that were total losses inprior crashes. In most cases, theparts being recycled are fromundamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GMpart may be an acceptable choice tomaintain the vehicle's originallydesigned appearance and safetyperformance; however, the history ofthese parts is not known. Such partsare not covered by the GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered bythat warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are alsoavailable. These are made bycompanies other than GM and maynot have been tested for the vehicle.As a result, these parts may fit

poorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems, and may notperform properly in subsequentcollisions. Aftermarket parts are notcovered by the GM New VehicleLimited Warranty, and any vehiclefailure related to such parts is notcovered by that warranty.

Repair Facility

GM also recommends that youchoose a collision repair facility thatmeets your needs before you everneed collision repairs. Your dealermay have a collision repair centerwith GM-trained technicians andstate‐of‐the‐art equipment, or beable to recommend a collision repaircenter that has GM-trainedtechnicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring the Vehicle

Protect your investment in the GMvehicle with comprehensive andcollision insurance coverage. Thereare significant differences in thequality of coverage afforded by

various insurance policy terms.Many insurance policies providereduced protection to the GMvehicle by limiting compensation fordamage repairs through the use ofaftermarket collision parts. Someinsurance companies will notspecify aftermarket collision parts.When purchasing insurance, werecommend that you ensure that thevehicle will be repaired with GMoriginal equipment collision parts.If such insurance coverage is notavailable from your currentinsurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If the vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you to haveinsurance that ensures repairs withGenuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts orGenuine Manufacturer replacementparts. Read the lease carefully, asyou may be charged at the end ofthe lease for poor quality repairs.



If a Crash Occurs

If there has been an injury, callemergency services for help. Do notleave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of.Move the vehicle only if its positionputs you in danger, or you areinstructed to move it by a policeofficer.

Give only the necessary informationto police and other parties involvedin the crash.

For emergency towing seeRoadside Assistance Program(Mexico) on page 13‑7 or RoadsideAssistance Program (U.S. andCanada) on page 13‑11.

Gather the following information:. Driver name, address, and

telephone number.. Driver license number.. Owner name, address, and

telephone number.. Vehicle license plate number.

. Vehicle make, model, andmodel year.

. Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

. Insurance company and policynumber.

. General description of thedamage to the other vehicle.

Choose a reputable repair facilitythat uses quality replacement parts.See “Collision Parts” earlier in thissection.

If the airbag has inflated, see WhatWill You See after an AirbagInflates? on page 3‑22.

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair Process

In the event that the vehicle requiresdamage repairs, GM recommendsthat you take an active role in itsrepair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take thevehicle there, or have it towed there.Specify to the facility that anyrequired replacement collision parts

be original equipment parts, eithernew Genuine GM parts or recycledoriginal GM parts. Remember,recycled parts will not be covered bythe GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair,but you must live with the repair.Depending on your policy limits,your insurance company mayinitially value the repair usingaftermarket parts. Discuss this withthe repair professional, and insist onGenuine GM parts. Remember,if the vehicle is leased, you may beobligated to have the vehiclerepaired with Genuine GM parts,even if your insurance coveragedoes not pay the full cost.

If another party's insurancecompany is paying for the repairs,you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on thatinsurance company's collision policyrepair limits, as you have nocontractual limits with that company.In such cases, you can have control



of the repair and parts choices aslong as the cost stays withinreasonable limits.

Service PublicationsOrdering Information

Service Manuals

Service Manuals have the diagnosisand repair information on theengines, transmission, axle,suspension, brakes, electrical,steering, body, etc.

Service Bulletins

Service Bulletins give additionaltechnical service informationneeded to knowledgeably serviceGeneral Motors cars and trucks.Each bulletin contains instructionsto assist in the diagnosis andservice of the vehicle.

Owner Information

Owner publications are writtenspecifically for owners and intendedto provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. TheOwner Manual includes theMaintenance Schedule for allmodels.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,Owner Manual, and WarrantyBooklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$35.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Without Portfolio: OwnerManual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Current and Past Models

Technical Service Bulletins andManuals are available for currentand past model GM vehicles.

ORDER TOLL FREE:1-800-551-4123 Monday – Friday8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time

For Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), seeHelm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.

Or write to:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurringobligation. Allow ample time fordelivery.

All listed prices are quoted in U.S.funds. Make checks payable in U.S.funds.



Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernmentIf you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could causea crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediatelyinform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds thata safety defect exists in a groupof vehicles, it may order a recalland remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individualproblems between you, yourdealer, or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may callthe Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; orwrite to:

Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain otherinformation about motor vehiclesafety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernmentIf you live in Canada, and youbelieve that the vehicle has a safetydefect, notify Transport Canadaimmediately, and notify GeneralMotors of Canada Limited. CallTransport Canada at1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch80 rue NoelGatineau, QC J8Z 0A1



Reporting Safety Defectsto General MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (orTransport Canada) in a situation likethis, notify General Motors.

Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:

Chevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer AssistanceCenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170

In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854(French), or write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Care Centre, Mail Code:CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Vehicle DataRecording andPrivacyThe vehicle has a number ofcomputers that record informationabout the vehicle’s performance andhow it is driven. For example, thevehicle uses computer modules tomonitor and control engine andtransmission performance, tomonitor the conditions for airbagdeployment and deploy them in acrash, and, if equipped, to provideantilock braking to help the drivercontrol the vehicle. These modulesmay store data to help the dealertechnician service the vehicle.Some modules may also store dataabout how the vehicle is operated,such as rate of fuel consumption oraverage speed. These modules mayretain personal preferences, such asradio presets, seat positions, andtemperature settings.

Event Data RecordersThis vehicle is equipped with anevent data recorder (EDR). Themain purpose of an EDR is torecord, in certain crash or nearcrash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a roadobstacle, data that will assist inunderstanding how a vehicle’ssystems performed. The EDR isdesigned to record data related tovehicle dynamics and safetysystems for a short period of time,typically 30 seconds or less. TheEDR in this vehicle is designed torecord such data as:. How various systems in your

vehicle were operating;. Whether or not the driver and

passenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened;

. How far (if at all) the driver wasdepressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

. How fast the vehicle wastraveling.



These data can help provide abetter understanding of thecircumstances in which crashes andinjuries occur. NOTE: EDR data arerecorded by your vehicle only if anon-trivial crash situation occurs; nodata are recorded by the EDR undernormal driving conditions and nopersonal data (e.g., name, gender,age, and crash location) arerecorded. However, other parties,such as law enforcement, couldcombine the EDR data with the typeof personally identifying dataroutinely acquired during a crashinvestigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required, andaccess to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, that have thespecial equipment, can read theinformation if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.

GM will not access this data orshare it with others except: with theconsent of the vehicle owner or,if the vehicle is leased, with theconsent of the lessee; in responseto an official request by police orsimilar government office; as part ofGM's defense of litigation throughthe discovery process; or, asrequired by law. Data that GMcollects or receives may also beused for GM research needs or maybe made available to others forresearch purposes, where a need isshown and the data is not tied to aspecific vehicle or vehicle owner.

OnStar®

If the vehicle is equipped withOnStar® and has an activesubscription, additional data may becollected through the OnStarsystem. This includes informationabout the vehicle’s operation; aboutcollisions involving the vehicle; theuse of the vehicle and its features;and, in certain situations, thelocation and approximate GPS

speed of the vehicle. Refer to theOnStar Terms and Conditions andPrivacy Statement on the OnStarwebsite.

Infotainment SystemIf the vehicle is equipped with anavigation system as part of theinfotainment system, use of thesystem may result in the storage ofdestinations, addresses, telephonenumbers, and other trip information.See the infotainment manual forinformation on stored data and fordeletion instructions.

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)RFID technology is used in somevehicles for functions such as tirepressure monitoring and ignitionsystem security, as well as inconnection with conveniences suchas Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitters for remote door locking/unlocking and starting, andin-vehicle transmitters for garage



door openers. RFID technology inGM vehicles does not use or recordpersonal information or link with anyother GM system containingpersonal information.

Radio FrequencyStatementThis vehicle has systems thatoperate on a radio frequency thatcomply with Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and with Industry CanadaStandards RSS‐GEN/210/220/310.

Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. The device may not causeharmful interference.

2. The device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.

Changes or modifications to any ofthese systems by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.



2 NOTES


OnStar 14-1

OnStar

OnStar OverviewOnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

OnStar ServicesEmergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

OnStar Additional InformationOnStar AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

OnStar Overview

Manual Rearview Mirror

Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror

If equipped, this vehicle has acomprehensive, in-vehicle systemthat can connect to a live Advisorfor Emergency, Security, Navigation,Connection, and DiagnosticServices.

Manual and AutomaticDimming Rearview Mirrors. Press the mirror controls.

If OnStar does not respond,adjust finger position or removeany gloves.

. Avoid touching the controls whileadjusting the mirror. To cancel acommand pressQ.

. Clean the mirror while thevehicle is off to avoid makingcalls.

Status Indicator

The OnStar system status light isnext to the OnStar controls on themanual rearview mirror.

If the status light is:. Solid Green: System is ready.. Flashing Green: On a call.. Red: Indicates a problem.

For the automatic dimming rearviewmirror, the status is providedthrough the Display on DemandIcons.


14-2 OnStar

. Three Color Icons: The systemis enabled and active.

. No Icons: The vehicle is inmotion or the OnStarsubscription is inactive

. Blinking: Button has beenpressed.

. Solid: On a call.

. ~ (Fault Icon On): Indicates aproblem.

OnStar Commands

Press| or call 1-888-4ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) to speak to anAdvisor.

PressQ to:

. Make a call, end a call,or answer an incoming call.

. Give OnStar Hands-Free Callingvoice commands.

. Give OnStar Turn-by-TurnNavigation voice commands.Requires the available Directionsand Connections service plan.

Press| to connect to a liveAdvisor to:. Verify account information or

update contact information.. Get driving directions. Requires

the available Directions andConnections service plan.

. Receive On-DemandDiagnostics for a check of thevehicle’s key operating systems.

. Receive Roadside Assistance.

Press the OnStar Emergency buttonU to get a priority connection to anEmergency Advisor available 24/7 to:. Get help for an emergency.. Be a Good Samaritan or

respond to an AMBER Alert.. Get crisis assistance and

evacuation routes.

OnStar Services

EmergencyWith Automatic Crash Response,the built-in system can automaticallyconnect to help in most crashes,even if help cannot be requested.

PressU to connect to anEmergency Advisor. GPStechnology is used to identify thevehicle location and can providecritical information to emergencypersonnel. The Advisor is alsotrained to offer critical assistance inemergency situations before firstresponders arrive.

SecurityOnStar provides services like StolenVehicle Assistance, Remote IgnitionBlock, and Roadside Assistance,if the vehicle is equipped with theseservices. OnStar can unlock thevehicle doors remotely, if it is


OnStar 14-3

equipped with automatic door locks,and can help police locate thevehicle if it is stolen.

NavigationOnStar navigation requires theDirections and Connectionsservice plan.

Press| to receive directions orhave them sent to the vehiclenavigation screen, if equipped.Destinations can also be forwardedto the vehicle from MapQuest.com.The OnStar mapping database iscontinuously updated. Visitwww.onstar.com for coverage maps.

Turn-by-Turn Navigation

1. Press| to connect to a liveAdvisor.

2. Request directions.

3. Directions are downloaded to thevehicle.

4. Follow the voice-guidedcommands.

Using Voice CommandsDuring a Planned Route

Cancel Route

1. PressQ. System responds:“OnStar ready,” then a tone. Say“Cancel route.” Systemresponds: “Do you want tocancel directions?”

2. Say “Yes.” System responds:“OK, request completed, thankyou, goodbye.”

Route Preview

1. PressQ. System responds:“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

2. Say “Route preview.” Systemresponds with the next threemaneuvers.

3. Say “Goodbye.” Exits voicecommands.

Repeat


2. Say “Repeat.” System respondswith the last direction given, thenresponds with “OnStar ready,”then a tone.


Get My Destination


2. Say “Get my destination.”System responds with addressand the distance to thedestination, then responds with“OnStar ready,” then a tone.


Other Navigation ServicesAvailable from OnStar

OnStar eNav: Allows subscribersto send destinations fromMapQuest.com to their Turn-by-TurnNavigation or screen-basednavigation system. When ready, thedirections will be downloaded to thevehicle.


14-4 OnStar

Destination Download: Press|,then request the Advisor todownload directions to thenavigation system in the vehicle.After the call ends, press the “Go”button on the navigation screen tobegin driving directions.

Destinations can also bedownloaded on the go. Forinformation about eNav, DestinationDownload, and coverage maps visitwww.onstar.com.

ConnectionsOnStar Hands-Free Calling allowscalls to be made and received fromthe vehicle. The vehicle can also becontrolled from a cell phone throughthe OnStar RemoteLink mobile app.See www.onstar.com forcoverage maps.

Hands-Free Calling

1. PressQ. System responds:“OnStar ready.”

2. Say “Call.” System responds:“Please say the name or numberto call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing, including a “1” and thearea code. System responds:“OK calling.”

Calling 911 Emergency

1. PressQ. The system responds“OnStar Ready,” followed bya tone.

2. Say “Call.” The system responds“Please say the name or numberto call.”

3. Say “911” without pausing. Thesystem responds “911.”

4. Say “Call.” The system responds“OK, dialing 911.”

Retrieve My Number


2. Say “My number.” Systemresponds: “Your OnStarHands-Free Calling number is.”

End a Call

PressQ. System responds: “Callended.”

Store a Name Tag for SpeedDialing


2. Say “Store.” System responds:“Please say the number youwould like to store.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing. System responds:“Please say the name tag.”

4. Pick a name tag. Systemresponds: “About to store <nametag>. Does that sound OK?”

5. Say “Yes” or “No” to try again.System responds: “OK, storing<name tag>.”

Place a Call Using a StoredNumber



OnStar 14-5

2. Say “Call <name tag>.” Systemresponds: “OK, calling<name tag>.”

Verify Minutes and Expiration

PressQ and say “Minutes” then“Verify” to check how many minutesremain and their expiration date.

OnStar Mobile App

Download the OnStar RemoteLinkmobile app to your iPhone, Androidor BlackBerry smartphone to checkvehicle fuel level, oil life, or tirepressure; to start the vehicle (ifequipped) or unlock it; or to connectto an OnStar Advisor. For OnStarRemoteLink information andcompatibility, see www.onstar.com.

DiagnosticsOnStar Vehicle Diagnostics willperform a vehicle check everymonth. It will check the engine,transmission, antilock brakes, andmajor vehicle systems. It alsochecks the tire pressures, if thevehicle is equipped with the TirePressure Monitoring System. If adiagnostics check is neededbetween e-mails, press |, and anAdvisor can run a check.

OnStar AdditionalInformationTransferring Service

Press| to request account transfereligibility information. The Advisorcan assist in canceling or removingaccount information. If OnStarreceives information that vehicleownership has changed, OnStarmay send a voice message to thevehicle, requesting updated accountinformation.

Reactivation for SubsequentOwners

Press| and follow the prompts tospeak to an Advisor as soon aspossible after acquiring the vehicle.The Advisor will update vehiclerecords and will explain the OnStarservice offers and options available.


14-6 OnStar

How OnStar Service Works

Automatic Crash Response,Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,Stolen Vehicle Assistance, VehicleDiagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,Roadside Assistance, Turn-by-TurnNavigation, and Hands-Free Callingare available on most vehicles. Notall OnStar services are availableeverywhere or on all vehicles. Formore information, a full descriptionof OnStar services, systemlimitations, and OnStar terms andconditions, see www.onstar.com(U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada);contact OnStar at 1-888-4ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) or TTY1-877-248-2080; or press | tospeak with an Advisor. OnStarservices require a vehicle electricalsystem, wireless service, and GPSsatellite technologies to be availableand operating for features tofunction properly. These systemsmay not operate if the battery isdischarged or disconnected.

OnStar service cannot work unlessyour vehicle is in a place whereOnStar has an agreement with awireless service provider for servicein that area, and the wirelessservice provider has coverage,network capacity, reception, andtechnology compatible with OnStarservice. Service involving locationinformation about the vehicle cannotwork unless GPS signals areavailable, unobstructed, andcompatible with the OnStarhardware. OnStar service may notwork if the OnStar equipment is notproperly installed or it has not beenproperly maintained. If equipment orsoftware is added, connected,or modified, OnStar service may notwork. Other problems beyond thecontrol of OnStar may preventservice such as hills, tall buildings,tunnels, weather, electrical systemdesign and architecture of thevehicle, damage to the vehicle in acrash, or wireless phone networkcongestion or jamming.

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑21 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Services for People withDisabilities

Advisors provide services to helpsubscribers with physical disabilitiesand medical conditions.

Press| for help with:

. Locating a gas station with anattendant to pump gas.

. Finding a hotel, restaurant, etc.,that meets accessibility needs.

. Providing directions to theclosest hospital or pharmacy inurgent situations.

TTY Users

OnStar has the ability tocommunicate to the deaf,hard-of-hearing, or speech-impairedcustomers while in the vehicle. The


OnStar 14-7

available dealer-installed TTYsystem can provide in-vehicleaccess to all of the OnStar services,except Virtual Advisor and OnStarTurn-by-Turn Navigation.

OnStar.com

The website provides access toaccount information, manages theOnStar subscription, and allowsviewing of videos of each service.Get subscription plan pricing andsign up for OnStar VehicleDiagnostics. Click on the “MyAccount” tab on the home page.

OnStar Personal IdentificationNumber (PIN)

A PIN is needed to access some ofthe OnStar services, like RemoteDoor Unlock and Stolen VehicleAssistance. You will be prompted tochange the PIN the first time whenspeaking with an Advisor. Tochange the OnStar PIN, call OnStarand provide the Advisor with thecurrent number.

Warranty

OnStar equipment may bewarranted as part of the NewVehicle Limited Warranty. Themanufacturer of the vehiclefurnishes detailed warrantyinformation.

Languages

The vehicle can be programmed torespond in French or Spanish.Press| and ask an Advisor.Advisors can speak French orSpanish.

Potential Issues

Some OnStar services are disabledafter five days. OnStar cannotperform Remote Door Unlock orStolen Vehicle Assistance after thevehicle has been off continuouslyfor five days. After five days, OnStarcan contact Roadside Assistanceand a locksmith to help gain accessto the vehicle.

Global PositioningSystem (GPS). Obstruction of the GPS can

occur in a large city with tallbuildings; in parking garages;around airports; in tunnels,underpasses, or parkinggarages; or in an area with verydense trees. If GPS signals arenot available, the OnStar systemshould still operate to callOnStar. However, OnStar couldhave difficulty identifying theexact location.

. In emergency situations, OnStarcan use the last stored GPSlocation to send to emergencyresponders.

. A temporary loss of GPS cancause loss of the ability to senda Turn-by-Turn Navigation route.The Advisor may give a verbalroute or may ask for a call backafter the vehicle is driven into anopen area.


14-8 OnStar

Cellular and GPS Antennas

Avoid placing items over or near theantenna to prevent blocking cellularand GPS signal reception. Cellularreception is required for OnStar tosend remote signals to the vehicle.

Unable to Connect to OnStarMessage

If there is limited cellular coverageor the cellular network has reachedmaximum capacity, this messagemay come on. Press| to try thecall again or try again after driving afew miles into another cellular area.

Vehicle and Power Issues

OnStar services require a vehicleelectrical system, wireless service,and GPS satellite technologies to beavailable and operating for featuresto function properly. These systemsmay not operate if the battery isdischarged or disconnected.

Add-on Electrical Equipment

The OnStar system is integratedinto the electrical architecture of thevehicle. Do not add any electricalequipment. See Add-On ElectricalEquipment on page 9‑59. Addedelectrical equipment may interferewith the operation of the OnStarsystem and cause it to not operate.

Privacy

The complete OnStar PrivacyStatement may be found atwww.onstar.com. Privacy-sensitiveusers of wireless communicationsare cautioned that the privacy of anyinformation sent via wireless cellularcommunications cannot be assured.Third parties may unlawfullyintercept or access transmissionsand private communications withoutconsent.

OnStar - libcurl and unzipacknowledgments

Certain OnStar components includelibcurl and unzip software. Beloware the notices and licensesassociated with this software:

libcurl:

COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSIONNOTICE

Copyright (c) 1996 - 2010, DanielStenberg, <[email protected]>.

All rights reserved.

Permission to use, copy, modify,and distribute this software for anypurpose with or without fee ishereby granted, provided that theabove copyright notice and thispermission notice appear in allcopies.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED“AS IS,” WITHOUT WARRANTY OFANY KIND, EXPRESS ORIMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOTLIMITED TO THE WARRANTIESOF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS


OnStar 14-9

FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSEAND NONINFRINGEMENT OFTHIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NOEVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS ORCOPYRIGHT HOLDERS BELIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM,DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,WHETHER IN AN ACTION OFCONTRACT, TORT OROTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,OUT OF OR IN CONNECTIONWITH THE SOFTWARE OR THEUSE OR OTHER DEALINGS INTHE SOFTWARE.

Except as contained in this notice,the name of a copyright holder shallnot be used in advertising orotherwise to promote the sale, useor other dealings in this Softwarewithout prior written authorization ofthe copyright holder.

unzip:

This is version 2005-Feb-10 of theInfo-ZIP copyright and license. Thedefinitive version of this document

should be available at ftp://ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/license.html indefinitely.

Copyright (c) 1990-2005 Info-ZIP. Allrights reserved.

For the purposes of this copyrightand license, “Info-ZIP” is defined asthe following set of individuals:

Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis,Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois,Jean-loup Gailly, Hunter Goatley, EdGordon, Ian Gorman, ChrisHerborth, Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig,Robert Heath, Jonathan Hudson,Paul Kienitz, David Kirschbaum,Johnny Lee, Onno van der Linden,Igor Mandrichenko, Steve P. Miller,Sergio Monesi, Keith Owens,George Petrov, Greg Roelofs, KaiUwe Rommel, Steve Salisbury,Dave Smith, Steven M. Schweda,Christian Spieler, Cosmin Truta,Antoine Verheijen, Paul von Behren,Rich Wales, Mike White

This software is provided “as is,”without warranty of any kind,express or implied. In no event shall

Info-ZIP or its contributors be heldliable for any direct, indirect,incidental, special or consequentialdamages arising out of the use of orinability to use this software.

Permission is granted to anyone touse this software for any purpose,including commercial applications,and to alter it and redistribute itfreely, subject to the followingrestrictions:

1. Redistributions of source codemust retain the above copyrightnotice, definition, disclaimer, andthis list of conditions.

2. Redistributions in binary form(compiled executables) mustreproduce the above copyrightnotice, definition, disclaimer, andthis list of conditions indocumentation and/or othermaterials provided with thedistribution. The sole exceptionto this condition is redistributionof a standard UnZipSFX binary(including SFXWiz) as part of aself-extracting archive; that is


14-10 OnStar

permitted without inclusion ofthis license, as long as thenormal SFX banner has notbeen removed from the binary ordisabled.

3. Altered versions–including, butnot limited to, ports to newoperating systems, existing portswith new graphical interfaces,and dynamic, shared, or staticlibrary versions–must be plainlymarked as such and must not bemisrepresented as being theoriginal source. Such alteredversions also must not bemisrepresented as beingInfo-ZIP releases–including, butnot limited to, labeling of thealtered versions with the names“Info-ZIP” (or any variationthereof, including, but not limitedto, different capitalizations),“Pocket UnZip,” “WiZ” or“MacZip” without the explicitpermission of Info-ZIP. Such

altered versions are furtherprohibited frommisrepresentative use of theZip-Bugs or Info-ZIP e-mailaddresses or of theInfo-ZIP URL(s).

4. Info-ZIP retains the right to usethe names “Info-ZIP,” “Zip,”“UnZip,” “UnZipSFX,” “WiZ,”“Pocket UnZip,” “Pocket Zip,”and “MacZip” for its own sourceand binary releases.


INDEX i-1

AAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21Active Fuel Management® . . . . . 9-24Add-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59

Additional InformationOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5

Air Cleaner/Filter,Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-17, 10-19

Air Filter, PassengerCompartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3Airbag SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21

Airbag System (cont'd)What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22

When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20

Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-18AirbagsAdding Equipment to theVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28

Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-16Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15Servicing Airbag-EquippedVehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27

System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16AlarmVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10

AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7AntennaSatellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21

Appearance CareExterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-92

Assistance Program,Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7, 13-11

Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13

Audio SystemBackglass Antenna . . . . . . . . . . .7-12Diversity Antenna System . . . .7-13Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2

AutomaticDimming Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . 10-16

Automatic TransmissionManual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29Shift Lock ControlFunction Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34

AuxiliaryDevices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15

Axle, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34


i-2 INDEX

BBattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-85Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33

Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-35Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . 7-20, 7-22, 7-25Boost Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10BrakeSystem Warning Light . . . . . . . .5-20

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34

Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-16Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

Bulb Replacement (cont'd)Headlamps, FrontTurn Signal, andParking Lamps . . . . . 10-37, 10-38

High Intensity Discharge(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-40Taillamps, Turn Signal,and Stoplamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65

CCalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4CaliforniaFuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-50Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3Camera, Rear Vision . . . . . . . . . . 9-47Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iiiCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Carbon MonoxideEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10

Cautions, Danger, andWarnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-2Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-17CheckEngine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17IgnitionTransmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-35

Child RestraintsInfants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-37

Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-43, 3-45Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34

Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42CleaningExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-92

Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 8-1Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4


INDEX i-3

Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Clutch, Hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 13-14Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-84Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34

Competitive Driving Mode . . . . . 9-39Competitive Driving, Racingor Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Compressor Kit, TireSealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72

ConnectionsOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-4

Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5Convertible Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34

Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12CoolantEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Engine TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13

Cooling System . . . . . . . .10-20–10-22Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

CoverEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12Tonneau . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35

Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-6Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-5Text Telephone (TTY)Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-6

Customer InformationService PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-17

Customer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2, 13-4

DDamage Repair, Collision . . . . . 13-14Danger, Warnings, andCautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-19Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39, 6-2

Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3DevicesAuxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15

DiagnosticsOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5

Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6DoorAjar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . 12-5Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25

DrivingCharacteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-54

Competitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-39Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3For Better Fuel Economy . . . . .1-19Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-9If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 9-11Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-12Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10


i-4 INDEX

EElectrical Equipment,Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59

Electrical SystemEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42


Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45

Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41Rear Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47

EmergencyOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-17, 10-19Check and Service EngineSoon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17

Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-6Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13

Engine (cont'd)Cooling System . . . . . . 10-20–10-22Cooling System Messages . . .5-35Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-5Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15Oil Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36Oil Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-26Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19

Engine OilTemperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . .5-12

Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-19Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-15Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1

FFilter,Engine AirCleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17, 10-19

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-4Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79

Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-95FluidAutomatic Transmission . . . . 10-16Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32Power Steering . . . . . . 10-29, 10-30Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

Fog LampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-39Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Front Fog LampLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24

Front SeatsAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6


INDEX i-5

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-51Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-53

Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-52Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . .9-51Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-50Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Management, Active . . . . . . . . . .9-24Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-49Requirements, California . . . . .9-50System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37

FusesEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42


Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45

Rear Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47

GGarage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . 5-46Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46

GasolineSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-50

GaugesBoost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Engine CoolantTemperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13

Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Engine Oil Temperature . . . . . . .5-12Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Transmission Temperature . . . .5-13Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14Warning Lights andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

General InformationService and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-54Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

HHalogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-4Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Head-up Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28HeadlampsAiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-37Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . .10-39, 6-2

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2High Intensity Discharge(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-24High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2

Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12


i-6 INDEX

HeaterEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20

Heating and Air Conditioning . . . 8-1High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . 10-57Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 9-9Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . 9-36Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17

IIgnition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35

Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24

Infants and Young Children,Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32

Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 13-20Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

JJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-85

KKey and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-37Keyless EntryRemote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-51LampsDaytimeRunning (DRL) . . . . . . . .10-39, 6-2

Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Front Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Headlamps, FrontTurn Signal, andParking Lamps . . . . . 10-37, 10-38

License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-17Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

LATCH SystemReplacing Parts after aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-42

LATCH, Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-37

Latches, Seatback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5LightingEntry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Theater Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

LightsAirbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21

Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-20Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-23Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-15Taillamp Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23


INDEX i-7

Lights (cont'd)Traction Control OFF/StabiliTrak OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22

Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . .5-22

Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . 9-42LocksDoor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37

MMaintenanceRecords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-16

Maintenance ScheduleRecommended Fluidsand Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-12

Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-17Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 9-32Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16

MessagesAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40Battery Voltage andCharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33

Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34Convertible Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-35Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37Object Detection System . . . . .5-38Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-38Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43

MirrorsAutomatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Automatic DimmingRearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12

Monitor System, TirePressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58

NNavigationOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-3

Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-16

OObject Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38

Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Off-RoadRecovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5


i-8 INDEX

OilEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-15Engine Oil PressureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23

Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-30Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-6OnStar®

System, In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19OnStar® AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

OnStar® Connections . . . . . . . . . . 14-4OnStar® Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5OnStar® Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2OnStar® Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3OnStar® Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1OnStar® Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Operation, InfotainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

OrderingService Publications . . . . . . . . 13-17

OutletsPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

Overview, InfotainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

PParkShifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23

Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24Assist, Ultrasonic . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-46Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-35

Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-24Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Passenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-24Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements, California . . . . . 10-3

PersonalizationVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . 7-20, 7-22, 7-25

PowerDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-21Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . 10-29, 10-30Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

Pregnancy, Using SafetyBelts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

PrivacyRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-20

ProgramCourtesy Transportation . . . . 13-13

Proposition 65 Warning,California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

RRacing or Other CompetitiveDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-20Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21


INDEX i-9

RadiosAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34Limited-Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42

Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 9-47Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4RecommendedFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-49

Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12

RecordsMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-16

Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88

Reimbursement Program,GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2, 2-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41

Replacement PartsAirbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-14

Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-29Replacing LATCH SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after a Crash . . . 3-15

Reporting Safety DefectsCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-18General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18

RestraintsWhere to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21

Ride Control SystemsLimited Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . .9-42Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38Selective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43

RoadsDriving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7, 13-11

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16

Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-5Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26

SSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15Replacing after a Crash . . . . . .3-15Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-14

Safety Defects ReportingCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-18General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18

Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-15Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9Scheduling Appointments . . . . . 13-13Sealant Kit, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72Seatback Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5


i-10 INDEX

SeatsAdjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-4Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Securing ChildRestraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43, 3-45

SecurityMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10Vehicle Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10

Selective Ride Control . . . . . . . . . 9-43ServiceAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-4Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-16Maintenance, GeneralInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1

Service (cont'd)Publications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17

Scheduling Appointments . . . 13-13Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41

Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck, AutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34

ShiftingInto Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23

Signals, Turn andLane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Spare TireCompact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84

Specifications andCapacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9StabiliTrakOFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-38

Start Assist, Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-34Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19

Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . 10-29, 10-30Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

StorageRear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Storage AreasCenter Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Storing the Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . 10-78

Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivSystemInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . .13-20, 7-1

TTachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Taillamp Indicator Light . . . . . . . . 5-24TaillampsTurn Signal andStoplamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40

Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-6


INDEX i-11

Theater Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-11Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4TiresBuying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-70Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-59Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-58Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72

Sealant and CompressorKit, Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78

Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53

Tires (cont'd)Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-69When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64

Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50Tonneau Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2TowingDriving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-54Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-58General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-54Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-88Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-57, 9-58Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88

Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22Control OFF/StabiliTrakOFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22

Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . .9-37Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22

Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . .9-42Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Selective Ride Control . . . . . . . .9-43

TrailerTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-57, 9-58

TransmissionAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Fluid, Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . .5-13

Transportation Program,Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

UUltrasonic Parking Assist . . . . . . 9-46Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67

Universal Remote System . . . . . 5-46Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-49Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46

Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv


i-12 INDEX

VVehicleAlarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iiiControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1

Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . .5-42Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10Speed Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88

Vehicle CareStoring the Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit . . . . . . . 10-78

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

WWarningBrake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-20

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivCautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .ivHazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30WheelsAlignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68

Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69

When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64

Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-36Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

WindshieldReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

WinterDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10

Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-35

2013 Chevrolet Camaro Owner Manual M

Documents

Transcript of 2013 Chevrolet Camaro Owner Manual M